extracted_text:
Practice
Tests for the
Russian State Exam

Elena Klekovkina Malcolm Mann
Steve Taylore - Knowles
MACMILLAN
lntroduction

В—хние в СЪрник тестов
для подготовки к государственному экзамену по
языку.
пклю•кется в том. чтобы помочь и Успешно слать единый по английскому
языку ( Ы Э).
С— в себя 20 тестов. каждый из которых состоит
К— —дествуег серия упражнений. которые к выткхлнению заданий соответству
юших
Мы настоятельно рекомендуем вам
проделать у—жжния того. как вы приступите к выполнению —иний.
сборник
лестн сугражаег содержание и формат ЕГЭ мглийскому языку
Структура единого
государственного экзамена по английскому языку
Единый государственный
экзамен по английскому языку состоит частей. Первая часть. письменная.
включает в себя чинре разделс «Ау:шрование». «Чтение». «Грамматика и лексика».
-Пж•ьмо-. Вторая часть, усмая. включает раздел «Кворение».
 проведения экзамена на одного человека (без учета  ожидания и ш№груктажи) 167 мины“.
Первая часть хмтся минут. њгорая — 12 минут.
Ра.»ел 1: Ау)ирование
ДЕ— состоит
из 14 тестовых заданий. У вас будет прослушать каждый текст дважды. что поможет
вам лучк спраыпыя с поставленными задачами. Рекомендуемое выполнение кианиГ1
Раздела не более 25 минут. зца_нии (В 1 ) вы услышите пять коротких
ч»пттически.х высказываний. Ваша киача — установить схот—тстык• между
услышанными текстами и предложениями. выражают их основное содержание.
части
радела (зщцанпя А 1-А6) вы услышите диалог. Вл необходимо ксгановитъ
соответсгвие утверждений сохржаникз прослушанного текста.
• В третьем части раздела (задания
A7-A13) вы услышше  Тетерь вам нужно будет (Угнетить на семь вопросов по со.ХРА"НИЮ
диалога, выбрав правильный огвег из трех

2: Чтение
Данный раздел включает 9
запаний. Рекомендуемое время на вьининение кианий Раздела 2 нс Гипсе 30 минут.
 заиние (Ю) состоит из шести небольших по объему текстов. Ваша задача —
установить соеугвегслмие между тексгами и пре.иожениями. которые могуг служить
загтовками к этим

• Второе задание (ВЗ) представлено одним
[в двух медов утражнении.
• ГКрвый вил упражнений состоит из шести
утверждений и одного. двух или трех текстов. Ваша з:иача — установить скогве:спше между
угнержленињми и содержанием текстов.
• Второй вил упражнений включает в себя
семь коротк»х текстов и шесть вопросов. Вам нужно *'становить соответствие
между вощух•ами и текстами. В каждом тексте ны нагнетт «угнет. т«иько на один
вопрос. В задании один гекст лишний.
• Третья часть раздела (задан11я А
14-А2Ој содержит достаточно (Яиьшой по 061.eMv текст, Вам нужно (угнетать на
семь вопросов по его содержанию. выбирая правильный «угнет из челнрех
Ра.зДел 3: Грамматика и
лексика
Лапный раздел состоьп• из
23 талий. Рекомендуемое время на ньшшнение з:ианий Раздела З —40 мину.
• Первая часть раздела (зиания В4-В11 )
содержит тексг с восемью пропусками. Каждому пропуску сосугветттвует слово, выделенное
жирным шрифтом. Вам необходимо преобразовать слова таким образом, •гобы они  и лексически содержанию текла.
• Вторая часть раздела (зиания В
12-1318) Состоит из текста с семью пропусками. Каждому пропуску слово. вьше.ленное жирным шрифтом. Вам
необходимо изменить форму слова таким образом, чтобы оно соответствов&ло
содержанию текста.
• Третья часть рамела (задания А21-А28)
содержит текс-г с восемью пропусками, Вам необходимо заполнить пропуски; выбрав правгшьный
ответ их четырех ире,иоженных.
РазДел 4: Письмо
ДанныЙ раздел состмгт• из
двух заданий. Рекомендуемое время на вып«хлненис заданий Раздела 4 не более 60 минут.
• В первом з:цании (С 1 -) вам
[тредлатисгся написать письмо личного характера. Объем письма не лолжен
превышать слов. На выполнение задания отводится около 20 минут.
• Во втором  вам необходимо составить письменное
высказывание с хјсментами рассуждения по лре№юженной теме.
Объем
высказывания не должен превыш:ггь слон. Предлагаемый поможет вам успешно
справиться с лим заданием. На вьптнснис задания отводится около Щ) минут.
РазДел 5: Говорение
Данный раздел состою из
трех заданий. Перед началом ответа вам дается 10 минут. чтобы ознакомиться с
заданиями. Время устного ответа — около мины-г.
Ланная часть экзамена
начинается с вступительной беседы между экзаменуемым и
экзаменатором-соГ«сдником с целью знакомства. за которог следут- три
экзаменационных задания.
• Первое задание (СЗ) — двухминутное
монологическое высказывание по предложенной теме. Предложенный план
высказывания поможет вам успешно справшъся с •лмм видом з:иания. Вам могут
знать Олин или два вопроса по теме высказывания.
• Второе задание (С4) предполагает
диалог с целью обмена фактической информацией. Вам решить проблему и сообщается. какую
информацию вам нужно 11кхлучить у экзаменатора, чтобы решить лу проблему, Вы
з:щдасле вопросы экзаменатору и получаете необходимую информацию. На основе
полученной информации вы Ло,'1ЖНЫ сделать определенный ВЫВОЛ или принять
соответствующее решение.
• Третье задание (С5) предполагает
диалог с целью обмена оценочной информацией. Вам некая проблема и несколько вариантов ее решения. Ваша
задача — обсудить предложенные варианты решения проблемы с экзаменатором и
найти оптимальное решение.
Мы н:цеемся. •гго работа
по нашему пособию будет и иъггересна для вас.
Желаем вам успеха на экзамене!
Elena klekovkina alcolm Мапп
Steve

предложенных.
Contents

Test 1

Test 12

Language and Exam Skills
  Development .

4

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

136

Test I

6

Test 12

138

Test 2

Test 13

Language and Exam Skills
  Development .

16

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

148

Test 2 .

18

Test 13

150

Test 3

Test 14

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

28

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

160

Test 3 .

30

Test 14

162

Test 4

Test 15

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

40

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

172

Test 4.

42

Test 15

174

Test 5

Test 16

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

52

Language
  and Exam Skills Development

184

Test 5 .

54

Test 16

186

Test 6

Test 17

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

64

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

196

Test 6

66

Test 17 .

198

Test 7

Test 18

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

76

Language
  and Exam Skills Development ,

208

Test 7 .

78

Test 18

210

Test 8

Test 19

Language and Exam Skills
  Development

88

Language and Exam Skills
  Development .

220

Test 8 .

90

Test 19

222

Test 9

Test 20

Language and Exam Skills
  Development .

100

Language
  and Exam Skills Development .

232

Test 9 .
Test 10

102

Test 20

234

Language and Exam Skills
  Development .

112

Answer
  sheets .

244

Test 10
Test 11

114

Language and Exam Skills
  Development .

124

Test Il

126

Section
1 Listening: first task
A Look at the first task on page 6.
Match the statements A-F to the following speakers.
I
'I need to find other people to play with.' Statement
2      'I don't understand why people find
sport so interesting.' Statement
3      'I think it would be exciting to be
in a
                Formula 1 race.'                Statement
4      'I like to see people working
together in sport.'    Statement
5      'Sally, Jackie and I play tennis
almost every weekend.' Statement
6      'I like to do sport to get exercise
and stay healthy.' Statement
Section 2 Reading: first task
B Quickly read the six texts on page
8 and answer these questions.
Which text is talking about .
1     a way of reading for people who can't
                see?                                                Text

2     the differences between plavs on
radio and on TV?         Text
3     people using radio to communicate 20
years ago?     Text
4     how people commumcated before radio
was invented? Text
5     a danger caused by using mobile
phones?
Text
6     using our hands and faces to
communicate? Text

o
C Find words and phrases in each text
which have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.
Text 1
1 something you see often
2
talking in a
friendly way
3
worried
Text 2
4
not able to see
5
created
Text 3
6
included
7
say how we feel
8
not telling the
truth
Text 4
9
not professional
10     communicate with
Text 5
Il kinds
12
send out
Text 6
13
started (a fire)
14
learn information
15
far away
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: first task
D
Quickly read the
first text on page 12 and answer these questions.
I In which country can you find the platypus?
2     Does the platypus live in other
countries?
3     XXhen did Europeans first see the
platypus?
4     Is the platypus a rare animal?
5     Do we know a lot about the platypus?

E

Complete the table.

first

three

seven eight nine

ten

Section 5 Speaking: first task
G Look at the Student Card for Task I
on page 15 and make notes to complete the table.

What are your favourite television
  programmes?

Why?

Has your taste in TVprogrammes
  changed? How and why?

Xhen do you watch television?

Do you watch
  TV with your family / with your friends on your own?

Section 4 Writing: first task
F Label the different parts of this
letter by writing the appropriate letter in each space.
A
Put Love, or Best
wishes, and then put my first name.
B
Put Dear and my
pen friend's first name, followed by a comma.
C
Write my address
and the date here.
D
Say goodbye and
tell my pen friend to write back.
E
Make more
suggestions and give further advice.
F
Say hello and
thank my pen friend for their letter.
G
Make my first
suggestions and give some advice.
1
2H Which of these statements do you agree 3       Idisagree with? Explain
why.

              4                                                                             1
'Young people watch too much TV.'
                5                                                                           2
'You can learn a lot by watching
6
television.'
7
3 'Most
programmes for children are very good.'
O
P',une.n

Bbl yc.abttuume 5 BblCKa.3btaaHUð1.
  Ycmcmoaume coomeemcmaue .ueycðy 6b1CKa.3b10aH11fLUU eoaopfltqeeo
  I — 5 u  6 cnucxe A — F. Mcno.1b3Yùme
  Ra.ycòyo t5ycay, ot;o.3Haqcuougyo .ymaepycòeHue, moabK0
  oòun paa. B aaðanuu ecntb oÒH0 autunee ymeepycðemte.
  Bbl aanucb 3cmecume ctgou omaenlbl 6
  maÕJ111tgy.

A.      She enjoys watching team sports.
B.      She wants to join a team to play a
sport.
C.      She thinks sport is a good way to
keep fit. D. She likes playing sports with her friends.
E. She would like to try a dangerous
sport. F. She thinks watching sport is boring.

roBop911AV11i

1

2

YTBepxneH1te

Test 1

Bbl
yc.lbttuume pa.3?060p mypucma Il euc)a. Onpeòeaume, Kay-cue 11.3
LIPU6eÒëHHbLV ymaep.ycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomaemcmayom
coòepycamuo meyccma (I ), KC1/C1te He coonwemcmayom (2) u o që.u 6
maccme He cya.3(lHO, mo ecntb Ha OCHOaaHU11 meKcma Heat„3f1 ()amb HI/ noao.ycumeJ1bH0?0,
HI/ omptugame-QbH0?0 omaema (3). ()õ6eòume no-uep
6bttîpt1HH0?0 eapuauma omeema. Bbl yc.abltuume aanucb
ÒßClYÒbl.

       Al      The tourist has a
limited amount of time in the area.
                            l) 13ep110               2)
HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He cwa3ŽIH0
       A2    Most visitors to
Montford Hall go by taxi.
                             1) BepHO               2)
HeBepH0                  3) B 'rewre He cK'd3'dH0
       A3      The guide recommends a
restaurant to the tourist.
                             l) BepHO               2)
ne13epH0               3) B -reKcTe He CKa3t1HO
       A4    The tourist wants to
enjoy the good weather.
                              l) BepHO                  2)
HeBepH0                    3) B -rewre He CKa3t1HO
            You have to pay to enter the Rose
Gardens.
                              l) BepH0               2)
HeBepHO              3) B -reKCTe He CK[BŽIHO
       A6     The tourist has a large
garden at home.
                             1) BepHO               2)
HeBepH0                3) B •reKCTe He CKagaH0
O

Bbl
ycablluume õeceòy pvK060òume.1H Kypcoe c
ÕyðYlUlLMll cmyòewnauu. B aaÒCIH11flX A 7413
oõeeòume tgucþpy 1, 2 10111 3, coomæmcmgyougyo
6blÕpaHHOMY ea.uu eapucmmy omeema. Bbl ycablluume aanuct,
Òeaycðbl.

A7

Carol wants to
I) work out the new timetable.
2)
    make a list
    of courses.
3)
    talk about
    the Centre.

AS

The man will get a reduction
    because he's 1) over 65 years old.
2)
    unemployed. 3) disabled.

A9

Students are allowed to
I) choose which classes of a course to attend.
2)
    attend the
    first class before deciding.
3)
    attend the
    first three classes before deciding.

AIO

The man is concerned about I) his inexperience.
2)
    his age.
3)
    not liking
    pottery.

All

The two pottery courses
I) each have classes twice a week.
2)
    are held on
    the same days.
3)
    are held in
    different weeks.

A12

Students on the pottery courses
I) have to bring their own clay and tools.
2)
    have to bring
    their own aprons.
3)
    do not have
    to bring equipment with them.

A13

The man decides

Test 1

1)
to do the
Advanced Pottery course.
2)
to choose a
different course.
3)
not to do a
course at all.

no aaÒaHllñl Bl U Al-A13
  HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo on16en1bl Ha
  aaòaHllf1 B I, Al-A13 pacnonaea,tomcfl 6 pa3HbLr

BI õYKßb1
  .3anucb1ecwomcfl õe.3 npoõee106 u ,31fflK06 npe'711}fflHllH.

                                         Pa3neJ1        Llrrerme

Mcnoau.ayùme Kaycðyo
  (5YK6_y mœ1bK0 oðtut pa.3. B 3aÒauuu oÒŒta me.ua
  autUHf1f1.

A.
POOR COMMUNICATION
B.
HELPFUL METHOD
C.
PAST HOBBY
D.
BODY LANGUAGE
E.
ENJOYABLE GAMES
F.
HEALTH PROBLEMS
G.
MORE IMAGINATION

1
  In just a few years you will see people concerned that a mobile
  close to ordinary phone
2
  We learn a lot by read braille. Braille fingers. A Frenchman
  system makes life
3
  When we talk to as little as 7% of we use our faces also show
  things
4
  People can now Twenty years ago, radio to contact their houses
  that and about the

mobile phones have become a common sight
everywhere. Walk past any café and chatting on their phones or sending
text messages. However, some people are the signals these phones send out mav
be bad for our health. They worry that holding your head might have an effect
on your brain. So, it may be a good idea to use your when you can.

reading, but what if you can't see the words on the page? Many blind people can
is a svstem of writing using raised dots on the page that you can feel with
your called Louis Braille invented it in 1821, when he was just 12 years old.
His easier for many thousands of blind people all over the world.
someone, only a small part of our meaning
is in what we say. Some people say that our message is contained in our words.
We use our hands to express ourselves and to show that we are listening or to
show how we feel. Our faces and our hands can that we might want to hide, like
the fact that we are lying, for example.
use
the Internet and e-mail to communicate with each other cheaply and quickly.
however, this wasn't
possible. In those days in Britain, some people used amateur people all over
the country, and even around the world. They had special radios in sent out
radio signals. They contacted each other to exchange news about their lives
weather, or even to play games such as chess.

decide exactly what a place or a person
  looks like. On radio, though, you can imagine it any you like.
the invention
  of radio, it was almost impossible to communicate over large distances. The
  onlv to communicate with people far away was to send a message or a letter
  with a person. People lit on hills as a signal to each other, but it wasn't a
  very good way of communicating. It was very difficult to find out what was
  happening in distant places and news often took weeks or even months travel
  around the world.

5
One of the most interesting types of radio programme is
radio drama. Although some radio stations only broadcast music, some also
produce plays for their listeners. Many people prefer listening to a play on
the radio to watching it on TV because thev can be more creative. On TV, the
programmemakers
6
Before

NL' ereKCTa

1

2

3

              4                 5

6

O

[Ipogumaúme YH16epycòeH11fl 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILUII
meKcn1b1. YcmaH0611me coomeemcmaue Jte.wòy ymgepycòeH11fLM11 u
coòep.ycamaeu mcyccmoe. Hanutuume I'll(þpy I — ecau ymoepyc)emue
gepHoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecau ymeepycòeH11e Heeepnoe. 3CIHecume C60U
omeenlbl 6 maõautcv.

1
    Most people
    in Devon work as farmers or fishermen.
2
    Devon is famous for its modern buildings.
3
    The south coast is popular because of the climate.
4
    It's easy to
    drive from London to Devon.
5
    Today, Lancashire produces a large amount of goods for sale
    abroad.
6
    Visitors can travel on old planes and trains at the museum.

Devon is a large county in the
    south-west of England.
Agriculture and fishing have always been important parts
    of the local economy, but these days tourism is the main source of income.
    Nearly five million people visit the area each year, many Of them coming to
    enjoy Devon's beaches and even to surf along its north coast. Apart from
    the beaches, Devon is also well known for its beautiful countryside and
    old, traditional cottages.
Many coastal towns in Britain have
    suffered as more and more people go abroad on holiday. However, on the
    south Devon coast, resort towns such as Brixham and Torquay are enjoying
    new life as the English Riviera, offering mild weather and sandy beaches.
    Another reason for its popularity is that it's possible to get to Devon
    from London in a short time by car. Two motorways, the M4 and the M5,
    connect the capital to Devon and in just four or five hours Londoners can
    be enjoying a cream tea or a relaxing country walk.
Lancashire, in the north-west of England, is a county
    with a long history, first as an agricultural area and later as one of the
    most important areas during the Industrial Revolution. Here, from the start
    of the nineteenth century onwards, factories and mills produced cotton and
    other goods that were sold all around the world. Today, almost all the
    mills are silent, but Lancashire is still an interesting place to visit.
    Apart from the attractions of coastal towns such as Fleetwood and
    Blackpool, there are many interesting museums, including the Museum of
    Transport in Rimington. Open all year round, the museum has a wonderful collection
    of models of different means of transport, including trains, planes and
    ships. For visitors who prefer a more active holidav, there are also many
    beautiful areas to walk in, particularlv in north Lancashire.

1

4

5

6

O

Ilpoqumaùme mcwcm u 6b1110JIHume .3aòaH1[H A 14-420,
OÕ60ÒH Illitþpy 1, 2, 3 11.111 4, coomaemcmeyoucyvo H0Mepy
6btÓpaHH0?0 6tLUU oapucmma omaema,

When my Uncle Alan turned up at my thirteenth birthday party without a
  present, I couldn't hide the disappointment on my face. He was my favourite
  uncle, and he always bought me fantastic presents.
'Don't look so sad, Anna,' he said kindly. 'I haven't forgotten to get
  you a present. I just couldn't bring it with me. Tomorrow, I'm taking you
  abseiling.' 'I didn't know you had a boat,' I said.
'No, not sailing! Abseiling!'
'What's that?' I asked. 'I've never
  heard of it.' 'You'll see,' he said mysteriously.
Early the next day, Uncle Alan drove me to Lamerton Adventure Park. I'd
  never been there before, but had often told my mum and dad how exciting it
  sounded. As we drove through the gates, it seemed that, once again, Uncle
  Alan had found me a birthday present I'd never forget. When we arrived, we
  went to find my instructor, a friendly young woman called Isabelle. She put
  me completely at ease, and I knew that, whatever I was going to be doing, I'd
  be quite safe with her.
'So, Anna, have you ever been abseiling before?' she asked. I admitted I
  didn't even know what abseiling was. 'Well, it's always fun to experience
  something new, isn't it?' she said.
We walked through the park, and
  ended up at a rocky hill. The biggest rock face was extremely high and steep,
  but there were smaller, easier faces too. When I saw the equipment waiting
  for me — a rope, a harness and a helmet — I guessed what I was going to be
  doing.
'Oh, I'm going rock climbing!' I said excitedly.
'Not exactly,' said Uncle Alan.
Isabelle explained. 'With rock climbing, you start at the bottom and go
  up, but with abseiling, you start at the top and go down.' Now I understood.
We carried the equipment up a path to the top of the smallest rock face.
  I carefully looked over the edge. The ground was about five metres below.
  'This is going to be fun,' I thought.
Isabelle tied the rope carefully to a metal ring, and then
  threaded it through my harness, which by now I was wearing round my waist.
  She threw the other end of the rope over the edge of the rock face, and it fell to the
  ground.
'This is where I say goodbye,' said Uncle Alan. 'I'm
  going back down to the bottom. I'll be holding the other end of the rope, so
  you'll be quite safe. See you when you come down!'
Isabelle was the perfect instructor. She talked me through
  what to do step by step. I stood on the edge of the rock face with my back to
  the drop. My left hand was holding the rope in front of me, my right hand
  holding the rope behind me. 'Now,' she said, 'gently lean back.'
This was the most difficult part. It's a terribly scary
  experience leaning back over a cliff, especially the first time you attempt
  it, and for the first few minutes I wondered whether I could actually do it.
  Finally, I decided to risk it. I didn't want Uncle Alan thinking I was a
  coward. Keeping my feet still, I leant back a little. Then a little more.
'Fantastic!' shouted Uncle Alan from below me.
'That's wonderful,' said Isabelle. 'Now, slowly start to
  walk down the rock.'
It was more
  like bouncing than actual walking, but I started to go down. It didn't take
  long to reach the bottom, but I felt a huge sense of achievement when I put
  my feet on the ground next to Uncle Alan.

'I'm so proud of you!' he
said. 'Do you want to try a higher rock face now?'
'You bet!' I said, 'The higher, the better!'

A14 When Uncle Alan saw Anna's
disappointment, he realised that I) he should have brought a present with him.
2)
he really was her
favourite uncle.
3)
she thought he
had forgotten to bring her a present. 4) he had to take her somewhere the next
day.
AIS    Anna had frequently told her
parents that I) Lamerton Adventure Park appealed to her.
2)
she had never
been abseiling before.
3)
Uncle Alan's
birthday presents were unforgettable. 4) abseiling sounded like a very
interesting activity.
A16    Isabelle made Anna
I) admit how little she knew about the park.
2)
feel totally
secure and comfortable.
3)
think about
previous enjoyable experiences. 4) realise that abseiling would be easy.
A17    When Anna saw the equipment,
she
I) understood immediately
what abseiling was.
2)
tried hard to
guess what it would be used for.
3)
asked Isabelle
for an explanation.
4)
still didn't
understand what she would be doing.
A18 Uncle Alan didn't stay at the top
of the rock face because 1) he wanted to see Anna when she reached the bottom.
2)
he had to hold
the rope at the bottom.
3)
the rope had
fallen over the edge by mistake.
4)
he thought she
would be safer without him up there.
A19    As Anna started to lean back,
she 1) felt extremely frightened.
2)
wondered if she
was a coward.
3)
knew she had to
risk the danger.
4)
remembered the
first time she'd done this.
A20 After reaching the bottom, Anna
I) thought she had achieved enough for one day.
2)
wanted to abseil
down a more difficult rock face.
3)
made a bet with
her uncle about the height of the rock.
4)
felt relieved to
be on the ground again with her uncle.

no        B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE
  3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !
ObPATJ4TE
  BHMMAHME, Elmo               Ha                  B2, B3 u A14-A20    6
Pa.3HbLX qacmm• âqamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1
  nuycneñ Liacmu Õaawca. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemt)6 6 sac)aH115LV B2,
  B3 õYK6b1 aanucbtecuomcfl õea npoõeaoe u .3HŒC06
  npemmauu.q.

Test 1

                       Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCUKa

Ilpoqumaúme
meR•cm 3anomtume nponycK11 6 npeÒaoyeHum- not) H0.uepa.uu B4-B11
coomaemcmeyougu.uu cþop.uaatu c:aoa, HaneqamaHHbLr aa?ACIBHbLUU
ÕYKßŒuu cnpaea om npeÒaoyceHllfl.

B4
B6
B9
BIO
Bil

STRANGE
EXIST
NEVER SEE
TWO
DIRTY
NOT KNOW

17poqumaùme
   HilO,'Ce mexcm
  [Ipeoõpaayñme c.aoga, naneqamaHHbte .3aua6HblJtlt
Õycga-uu nocae H0Mepoa
  B12-B18 maK, qmoÕbl OHU epa.M.uamuqecKll u ./WKCltqeCKU
  coomaemcmeoeaau coòepycaH1110 meKcma. .3an0JIHume nponycK11
  natyqeHHbLUt1 caoea.uu. Kaycòblù nponycK coomcemcmeyem
  omðe-QbH0MY aaÒaHtuo 11.3     B 12-B18.

B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18

The Tower of London has become one of the most symbols of the city of
  London, and of Britain as a whole. It was built by William the Conqueror in
  1078 and the
Tower took 20 years from start to finish.
The  of the Tower (almost 30 metres) and the thickness     HIGH
  of the walls made it a perfect prison. Famous  held at the PRISON Tower include
  Elizabeth (later Queen Elizabeth I) and King Edward V.
In the thirteenth century, King Henry Ill added many to BUILD the Tower, including a
  church and even a zoo.
Today, many thousands of come to the Tower each year VISIT
  and learn all about the history of this  place.       INTEREST

Tlpoqumaúme maccm c nponycxa.uu,
  OÕ03HULWHHbLUU HO-uepa.uu A21-A28. 3mu H0.uepa coomoemcmayom A21-A28, 6 Komopbtr
  npeòcmaaaeHbl 603MOYHbte aapuamnt,l omeemoe. Oõeeðume
  H0Jtep 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6ŒUU eapuŒma omeema.

When Andrew Carter was offered the position of Senior European Sales
  Manager in a large, successful multinational corporation, he A21  at the chance. One of the main
  reasons for his immediate acceptance was the opportunity for a large amount
  of foreign travel. He could see himself relaxing in a café by the
  Seine after a hard day's business, before jetting
A22  to an important meeting the next morning in Prague. How
  romantic it all seemed.
And yet now,
  only eight months after his first day in the job, how different his emotions
  were. For Andrew Carter was experiencing what many international business
  travellers had experienced before him, and will experience for years to come,
  that a life A23     on planes and in hotels is lonelv, dull and exhausting.
He longed to be back at home, and dreamt of the simple pleasures of
  having someone to watch television with, of being asked how his day was. As
  he lay on the bed in his luxurious, yet strangely soulless hotel room, he A24
  the empty evening ahead of him. 'What's the
A25     he asked himself, as he had
  done so many times, 'of going out this evening? I won't talk to anyone. I
  won't have anyone to enjoy it with. Every city's the same when you're alone.'
Not wanting to sit alone at a table in the hotel
  restaurant, he decided to have his evening meal delivered to his room by room
  service. Leafing through the menu, Andrew was
A26  by another desire — for some
  simple, home-cooked food. He sighed.
And then he thought the
  unthinkable. 'I don't have to A27  on like this,' he said out loud. 'I'm
  still young. My whole life's ahead of me. I could quit my job and do
  something I really enjoy. So what if I don't make so much money? Money isn't
  everything.'
It would
  take several years, and a number of A28    starts, but finally Andrew Carter
  did leave his highly-paid position. He was scared, but for the first time in
  his life he was truly content.

    A21                   l) took                      2)
jumped              3) seized               4) had

    A22                   l) by                         2)
forward              3) up                     4) off
    A23                   1) spent                  2) paid                  3)
passed             4) taken
    A24                  I) dreaded              2)
distrusted         3) depressed       4) disappointed
    A25                   I) theme                2) topic                 3)
point                4) subject
    A26                 1) attacked              2)
smashed           3) knocked          4) struck
    A27                  1) live                       2)
go                       3) move                4) continue
    A28                  I) false                     2)
fake                   3) artificial            4) forged

no B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOM
  OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha
  B4-B18 u A21-A28   e pa.3Hb1.r
  Itacmfl.r ÕJICIHRCI. B4-B18 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HU.YHeÙ qacmu
  õaamca. Tlpu nepenoce omaemoe
6 .3aÒaHll}LV B4-B18 õYKBb1 aanucbteawmcfi
  õea npoõeaog u .3HZlK06

                                       Pa3neJ1      TIWCbMO

 Ha                CT, C2 WIAHK OTBETOB
17pu
  Bbl'70JIHCHUU aaòauuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HtLUí1HUe
  oõpamume Ha mo, qmo aatuu omaembt õyòym
  ogehtuøamt.cn nt0J1bK0 no aanucf1.M, CÒeaCIHHbLM 6 WIAHKE
  OTBETOB X'2. 1-111KaK11e aanucu  He õyðym yqumbloamt»cfl
  .oxcnepmo,u.
aano.uteuuu WIAHKA OTBETOB YKaoæume cnaqaaa H0,uep
  .gaòaHl/fl CT, C2 aameM aanutuume caoù omaem oðHOÙ
  cmop0Hb1 õaamca HeòocmamotlH0, 6b/ .uo.yceme ucno.lbaoaamb
  òpyeyo cmopo,qy Õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.
This is part of a letter from your English pen friend.

Test 1

Write soon,
Love,
Tom
Write back to Tom
answering his questions.
Write 100-140 words.
Remember the rules of letter writing.
You have 40 minutes to do this task.
Comment on the following statement.
Many people think that we should explore
space and visit other planets. However, some people say that space exploration
is a waste of time and money.
What can you say for and
against exploring space and visiting other planets?
     Write 200-250 words.                                                Use
the following plan
1.   Introduction (State the problem).
2.   Arguments "for".
3.   Arguments "against".
4.   Conclusion.

Pa3aeJ1       IòBopeHne

Bbl noayqume KapmotlKY, Ha Komopoú
  npeòcmaoaellbl mpu aaÒCIH11f1 ycm,qoeo omaema.• C3 —
  me.uamuqecwoe .uo,qoaopuqeæcoe dblCKa.3bW,aH1te, C4 — òuaaoe c
  lge.Qb,to ot;.ueua cþaxmuqecK0ù  C5 — ()uaaoe c
  lge.1bY0 oÓ.ueua 01!t'Hoquoð1 Ithcþop.uatgueñ.
6btno.aneH11f1 Ra.ycÒO?O
  aaòaH11f1 onpeòe.,1Hem o,tcaa.ueuamop. Bo npoueòeH1151
  .»moli qacmu .9K3aateHa llòem nocmt)flltuafl aanucb Ha
  ayÒ110Kaccemy.

3aaaHvtq 9K'3aMeHYOtoro

STUDENT CARD
Task I (3—3.5 minutes)
Give a 2-minute talk on television. Remember to say:
•
what your
favourite television programmes are
•
if your taste in
television programmes has changed over the years and why
•
when you watch
television
•
if you watch
television with or without your family or friends
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you
have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2 (1.5—2 minutes)
You are visiting a town
and you are at the tourist information office. You would like to
find a hotel close to the town centre. You can pay £30 per night
only.

Testa

Before making
a decision, ask the tourist information guide about: • the hotels available
•
where the hotels
are  the cost
The teacher will play the part of the tourist
information guide and will speak first.
Remember to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the information
you need
•
decide on the
hotel to stay at
STUDENT CARD
Task 3 (3—4 minutes)
You and a friend are planning to do a course for one
evening each week at a local college. You are discussing which course to go on.
You can do:
•
basic car
maintenance
•
cookery
•
Mandarin Chinese
for beginners
•
photography
•
local history
The teacher will play the part of your friend.
Remember to:
•
discuss all the
options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement
Section 1 Listening: first task
A
Look at the first
task on page 18. The people will all be talking about clothes. In pairs or as a
group, make a list of the words and phrases you would expect to hear when
someone is talking about clothes.

clothes

fashion

B
Look at the
headings A-F again. Match each statement 1-6 below with a heading that has a
similar meaning.
I I
really enjoy shopping for jeans and tops, even if they are expensive.
2      You've got to make sure you feel good
in the clothes you're wearing.
3      Fashion isn't important to me at all.

4      The clothes I used to wear were
totally
different.
5      What I wear depends on where I am and
what I'm doing.
6      1'd never wear anything that didn't
look nice.

Section 2 Reading: second task
C
Read the two texts in the second task on page 21. Find words and phrases in the
texts which have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.
First text
I a place
where someone lives
2
king or queen
3
at the
moment
4
a person who
lives in a place
5
kind, type, sort
6
the garden, land,
etc that surrounds a building
Second
text
7
from then until
now
8
which
still exists
9
wrongly
10
called
11
real
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
second task
D
Read the text
with questions B12-B18 on page 24. For each gap, decide what kind of word
(noun, adjective, etc) fills the gap. B12 B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
E
Complete the
table. Include negative adjectives where appropriate.

verb

noun

adjective

invent
fly

direct

hot

Section 4 Writing: second task
F
Read the second
task on page 26. Decide whether the statements below are: arguments supporting
the behaviour and attitude of teenagers (S), arguments against teenagers'
behaviour and attitude (A) or irrelevant arguments (I).
1    In my opinion, the vast majority of
teenagers are
extremely hard-working.
2    1 personally believe that teenagers
today are much more considerate and caring than young people were thirty years
ago.
3    Getting a part-time job is a good way
for a teenager to make some extra money.
4    Teenagers today are much more likely
to swear in front of their parents and teachers.
5    At my school, for example, there are
very few discipline problems.
6    Most teenagers understand that they
have to work hard at school in order to get a good job when they are older.
7    Teenagers nowadays often prefer to
watch
television and play computer games
rather than do their homework.
8    Those people who criticise teenagers
should think back to their own childhood.
9

It is certainly true that many
teenagers today do not get enough physical exercise; this is probably due to
laziness.
10   According to some experts, exams are
not the best way to test how much a teenager knows about a subject.
G
In pairs or as a
group, discuss whether you think teenagers today are generally rude, lazy and
badly behaved.
Section 5 Speaking: second task
H
Look at the
Student Card for Task 2 on page 27. Answer these questions.
1
 What is an after-school club?
a a club for older teenagers who have
left school b a club for students which meets after the end of the school day
2
Which of these
clubs would not be suitable for you? Explain why.
a Art club — meets on Mondays and
Thursdays b Model aeroplane club — meets on
Tuesdays
3
Which of these
clubs would be suitable for you? Explain why.
a English club — meets on Wednesdays b
Games club — meets on Fridays
Correct each of these direct and indirect questions.
I
Could you tell me
what are clubs available?
2     What activities the maths club do?

3     Do you know what activities does the maths club do?
4     the chess club meets?

5     I wonder if you know when does the
chess club meet?

                                        Pa3aeJ1           AYAMI)0BaHVfe

Bbl vc-lbltuume 5 6blCKC13b16CIHUÙ.
YcmaH0ßume coomeemcmgue Meyðy 6b1CR•a.3blBaH1ffiJfU Ka.YCÒO?O
POBOPf1tge?0 1 — 5 u ymgepycòt'H11$1.uu, ÒaHHbLU11 cnucwe A — F.
Mcno.lbayùme KaycÒvŒo õYK6V,
t)õ03Haqa10110'10
ymgepycðemte, moa1bKO oðt1H pa.3. B aaòanuu ecntb oÒH0
autunee _ymeep.ycòenue. Bbl yca7b11uume aanucb ÒeaycÒb1.
3aHecume ('6011 omeenlbl 6 maõmugy.

A.
I don't care what
I wear.
B.
It's important to
feel comfortable.
C.
I love spending
money on nice clothes.
D.
My taste in
clothing has changed. E. Looking smart is very important to me.

F. Different situations need
different clothes.

F0Bop¶11U1ñ

1

3

4

5

YTBepùKJ1eHJ1e

Bbl ycvtbltuume paa¿oaop aeeHtna no
Ht'òßll.ycuatocmu MupuŒu c Kauewno,u. Onpeðeaume, KCIKUC'
113 'IPU6eÒëHHbLV ym(3epycòt'Hllù Al-A6 coomaemcmgyom
coòepycaptuyo moccma (1), KŒue He coomæmcmeyom (2) u o
qëM 6 meKcme He cyaaaHO, mo ecnlb Ha OCHOBLIHUII mewma He-Qb3f1 ()amt. Hit
noao.ycumeJ1bHoeo, Hil omputgamev1bH0?0 omeema (3).
C)õßeòume HO.uep Bblõpaymozo 6apuŒtma
omæma. Bbl ycablluume aanucb ð6aycÒbl,

Al        The owners of the house are
still living in it.
                      l) BepH0                2)
HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKagaHO
A2 The house has both a coal fire and central heating. I) BepHO 2)
HergepHO 3) B TeKCTe He CKŽBIIHO
A3       The kitchen is large.
                     I) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3)
B -rek'CTe He cKtuaH0
A4 There's space in the utility room for Mr Robinson's freezer. I) BepHO
2) HeBepH0 3) B TeKCTe He CKti3aHO
AS       The house is the largest in
the street.
                      l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0               3)
B •rewre He cwagaH0
A6       The owners might be willing
to reduce the price.
                      l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0              3)
B •rewre He CKa3ttHO

Test 2

Bbl yc•abltuume õeceðy
()upŒmopa eocn1UHUl!b1 c HOBbLVf cayyca1U11.u. B aaòauunx A
7-Ä13 oõeeòume Igucþpy I, 2 10111 3,
coomaemcP16Y10110"0 6b1ÕPCIHHOAf.V oapuawn_v omaema. Bbl
yc•vlbnuume aanucb Ò6G'YCÒb1.

     The manager says he will
I) show Denise exactly
what to do.

A8

Denise says she is worried about I)
  working with money.
2)
  dealing with
  the public.
3)
  operating a
  computer.

A9

The people Denise is responsible
  for
I) have
  worked together as a team for a long time.
2)
  are all quite
  new to the job,
3)
  usually work in
  pairs at reception.

AIO

In her previous job,
  Denise most enjoyed 1) managing a team of people.
2) solving difficult problems. 3) training new employees.

Al 1

If the computer system develops a problem 1) Denise may be
  able to repair it.
2)
  the manager
  will provide instructions.
3)
  they will write
  to the repair company.

A12

Denise would like to know about I) the salary.
2)   holidays.
3)
  working hours.

A13

The manager asks Denise to
I) check that some rooms are readv.
2) answer the phone while he's away.

2)
give
Denise a general idea of the job. 3) ask someone else to help Denise.
3)   take someone to the airport.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, timo omaenlbl Ha
  aaòaH11f1 BI, Al-A13 pacnonaztnomc•fl 6 pa.3Hb1X

19

                                       Pa3neJ1        I-IrreHne

Mcnoalbayùme Ka.YCÒVR)
  õYKBY mo.'bK0 oÒ11H pa.3. B .3aÒcutuu oðna me.ua
  auuutfl}l.

A.
DIFFERENT SUBJECTS
B.
MANY STUDENTS
c. TWO SECTIONS
D.
DIFFERING OPINIONS
E.
USEFUL FACTS
F.
IMPORTANT LESSON G. EASIER ANSWERS

1
2
3
4

Oxford University people studying at
  countries. In fact, at Oxford is a member part of the town.
What's the best age at as young an age are
  about three years children how to read, In most countries, You usually have
  to in two parts. The first second part is a asks you to do various When was
  Mozart the answers to these

has been a
centre of learning for over 900 years. Today, there are over 16,000 Oxford, but
they are not all British. About 4,000 of them come from other there are
currently students from over 130 countries studying there. Every student of a
'college'. There are 39 main colleges, and each college is in a different
for a child to learn
how to read? Some people believe that children should learn as possible.
Because of this, some parents start teaching their children when they old.
Other people believe it's better for a teacher at school to teach a class of so
many children don't learn to read until they are five or six vears old.
you are onlv allowed
to drive a car on a public road if vou have a driving licence. pass a driving
test in order to get the licence. In European countries, this test is part
is a 'theory' test. You have to answer questions about road safety. The
'practical' test.
You are in a car with an examiner, who tells you where to drive and things,
such as parking or reversing around a corner.
born?
What's the capital of Nigeria? Before the Internet, if we wanted to find out
questions, we'd have to look them up in reference books, such as
encyclopaedias. If we couldn't find the information in books at home, we'd have
to go to a public library. This kind of research would often take a very long
time. Now, however, as long as you have a computer connected to the Internet,
you can find the answers to questions like these in seconds.
 5 Although people sometimes confuse
astronomy and astrology, they are completely different.
Astronomy is the scientific studv of the
universe. Astronomers study stars, planets and other things in space, such as
comets, and record their findings scientifically. Astrology, which is based on
the belief that the position of the planets affects human behaviour, is not a
science. It is astrologers who write horoscopes in magazines, telling us what
they think is going to happen to us in the future.
6 A guide book can be
extremely helpful when you're visiting a place for the first time. Guide books
provide loads Of practical information, such as the opening times and entrance
fees of the main attractions, and often recommend sights to visit and places to
stay. They can also provide interesting information about the history of the
place and famous people who lived there.

TC'KCTa

1

3

4

5

6

- Test2

17poqumaùme
  .vm6epYòeH11H 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HUMU me,çcmbl.
  YcmaH06ttme coomaemcmaue

6epHoe, u 1411tþpv O — ec,lll
  ymaepycòeuue neaepnoe. 3anecume ('6011 omeembl 6 maõalllgy.

1
  Buckingham
  akeavs London
British
2
  Queen first British live there.
3
  Queen her
  husband
'state rooms' palace.
4
  Elizabeth queen
  for years.
5
  Kings and lived in
Westminster.
6
  Ifyou stand
  Palace of look up, Ben.

Palace has the official residence of the King or
Queen.
Victoria teas the monarch to
Elizabeth 11 and lice in the in the
Il has been more than
fifty
queens once Palace of
outside the
Westminster and you can see Big
No visit to London is complete vvithout a trip to Buckingham Palace, the official London residence
of the British monarch          (currently Queen Elizabeth Il).
Buckingham
Palace was built for the Duke of Buckingham in        1703 and, as such, was known simply
as Buckingham House.
Its first roval resident was King
George Ill, who bought it in 1762, but it was not until 1837, when Victoria
became queen, that it became the official royal palace of the British monarch.
Approximately
450 people work at Buckingham Palace, and each year more than 50,000 people
enjoy some form of entertainment there — the Queen often holds garden parties
and receptions for invited guests. In the 1990s, the palace became even more
open, with members of the public being allowed to go on a tour of the 'state
rooms'. These are the official reception rooms in the palace, rather than the
rooms that the Queen and her husband live in.
In June 2003, a concert of classical music and a pop concert were held in
the grounds of Buckingham Palace. This was to celebrate Elizabeth's 50th
anniversary as queen.
No king or queen has lived
in the Palace of Westminster, which is on the north bank of the River Thames in
London, since the 1500s. Today, the Palace of Westminster is better known by
its other name: the Houses of Parliament.
Although the oldest part of the palace in existence today is over 900
years old, most of the building is less than two hundred years old. In 1834,
the palace was almost completely destroyed by fire and had to be rebuilt. Parts
of the building were also damaged by bombs during the Second World War.
At one end of
the palace is a famous tourist attraction: a tower, often mistakenlv referred
to as 'Big Ben'. In fact, its actual name is the Clock Tower, or St. Stephen's
Tower, and Big Ben is the large bell hidden inside which rings every hour on
the hour.

1

2

3

4

5

6

21

[Ipoqumaùme
  moccm u 6bmo.mume aaÒt1H11H A14-A20, OÕ60Òf1
  Illitþpy 1, 2, 3 11.111 4,
 H0.uepy 6b1õPCIHH0?0 ea.M11
  gapuamna omaema.

Oliver glanced at his watch. There were ten minutes
left until the supermarket closed and he was rushing round, quickly dropping
things he needed for the weekend into his trolley. He hadn't been in his own
flat long and now his mother had invited herself for dinner the following day.
He really wanted to impress her with his ability to cope on his own, but he
knew that the usual critical comments would soon appear if everything wasn't
perfect. He hoped that the three days he'd spent cleaning the place from top to
bottom wouldn't be wasted, and he'd even gone so far as painting the front
door. His mother wouldn't notice that, though, of course. What she would notice
was the dust on top of the pictures, or the old sofa, or one of a thousand
other things that Oliver had forgotten about. Still, he was determined to give
her a good meal, and maybe that would put her in a slightly better mood than
usual.
He checked his shopping list again and bent over to
look through his trolley. He mentally ticked off the items and then realised
that he still needed eggs. As he straightened up to set off towards the dairy
section, there was an enormous collision, a clatter of tins and a loud shriek
of pain. When Oliver had recovered his balance, he saw an attractive woman of
about nineteen on her knees, putting tins and vegetables back into a handheld
basket.
'Why don't you watch where you're
going?' she snapped at him over her shoulder. 'Some people just have no
manners. Honestly .
'Er ... sorry,' stammered Oliver.
'Let me help you.' He began to pick tins up. 'It really wasn't my fault,
though, you know. I was just ... 'The girl grabbed a tin of tuna from his
hands.

'Never mind,' she said, her
basket now full, and she strode off down the aisle without looking back. Oliver
watched her go and sighed. He never seemed to have much luck with girls. Maybe
that was just what he needed to show his mother how grown up he was. He turned
back to his own trolley and began to push it. Maybe if she came to dinner and
he introduced her to an intelligent, charming young woman then she would stop
calling him every day to check he was okay. As Oliver thought about this
possibility, something caught his eye and he stopped his trolley. There was a
red leather purse on top of his shopping. It must have come out of the girl's
basket and landed in his trolley. Oliver quickly glanced around, looking for
the girl. She wouldn't be able to pay for her shopping. He picked up the purse,
left his trolley and sprinted towards the line of checkouts.
When he got there, he scanned the lines of customers
waiting to pay. There were about a dozen queues, but Oliver couldn't see the
girl in any of them. Thinking that she must still be shopping somewhere in the
supermarket, Oliver turned to go and find her when he suddenly heard a familiar
voice at the front of the queue next to him.
'I'm sure I had it here a minute ago. I want to speak
to the manager. I think it's been stolen. It must be someone in this
supermarket because I know .
She stopped as she realised that Oliver was standing
next to her, holding her purse out towards her.
'Lost something?' Oliver
asked.
The girl
smiled, then recognised Oliver and frowned, before her expression softened
again and she took the purse with a faint smile on her lips. 'Thanks,' she said
quietly.

A14    Oliver is anxious to prove to
his mother that he
l) has
learned a lot about cooking. 2) is capable of living independently.
3) knows she
looked after him very well. 4) has learned not to be so negative.
AIS When she visits his flat,
Oliver's mother will 1) appreciate the effort he has made.
2)
find something
she isn't happy about.
3)
help him do up
his flat.
4)
remind him to get
new furniture.
A16     The young woman drops her
shopping because I) she and Oliver bump into each other.
2)   her basket is too full.
3)   she is frightened by Oliver. 4) she
feels pain in her knees.
A17    When Oliver offers to help,
the young woman I) forgives him for what he has done.
2)
shows that
she doesn't trust him.
3)
thanks him
despite her anger.
4)
refuses to listen
to his explanation.
A18 Oliver thinks that his mother
might give him more independence if he 1) found a friend for her.
2)
had a girlfriend.
3)
told her to stop
phoning him. 4) had nicer friends.
A19 When he sees the purse, Oliver
realises that 1) he might be accused of theft.
2)   there's no money in it.
3)   he could get his revenge.
4)   it fell into his trolley by accident.
A20    Oliver manages to find the
girl because he
l) sees her standing in one of the queues.
2)
knows where she
is still shopping.
3)
recognises her
voice when she speaks. 4) joins the same queue as her.

no        B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE
  3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha
  B2, B3 u A14-A20  pa.3Hb1.r
  yacnlfl-r Õ.1ClHKa. B2, B3 pacnoaoyeHb1 6 Hid.YCHeÙ1 qacmu
  t;namca. flpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòaH11f1.r B2, B3 õYKBb1
  aanucbtea,tomcH õe.3 npoõeaoa u anc.'KOB npemŒaHtta.

                      Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa aeKCHKa

npoqumaùme moccm 3ano.mume
  nponycxu 6 npeòaoyeHllH.x not) H0,uepa.uu B4-B11 coonwemcmavwmgu.uu
  (þopataatll ('-106, HanettamaHHbLr  ÕYK6tlJtll
  cnpaga om KUYCÒOZO npeðaoyceH11f1.

          The Tomato

B4
B6
B8
B9
BIO
Bll

Do you like
  tomatoes? Although people generally think tomato as a vegetable, in fact it one. It's People in Central
  America  tomatoes for thousands of years.
However,
  it was not until the Spanish in early 1500s that tomatoes came to Europe.
Before that, no one in Europe  a tomato! When tomatoes appeared in Italy and many people
  were scared.
Tomatoes  by many people to be poisonous. They refused to eat  and grew tomatoes for decoration.
Since
  then, the tomato  extremely popular.
Can you
  imagine what food today would be like without

a fruit.          NOT
BE many EAT
                                                                                Mexico
in the        ARRIVE
EVER
SEE
                                                                                Britain,                       ONE

THINK only
as plants   THEY
BECOME it?

npoqumaùme npuaeòeHHb1ñ ,quyce meRt•m
  17peoõpa.3.vùme caoga, naneqamaHHble aaeaaßHbL8tu
  ÕVK6ŒUll nocae HO.uepoe B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHU
  epa-w„tamuqecR11 11 aeKCllqeCKU coomeemcm606aau coòepycamuo me,tccma.
  3ano.1Hume nponycvcu noavqeHHblJtU caoe,cutll. nponycyc coomeemcmayem
  omÒe.1bH0.uv aaðaH11'0 11.3 epynnbl B12-B18.

B12

Before the  of the hot air balloon, no human
  had ever successfully flown above the ground.

INVENT

B13       Two          brothers,
Josef and Etienne Montgolfier, were         FRANCE responsible for designing
the world's first hot air balloon.
      B14      The first successful                             was
in 1783, and the Montgolfier          FLY
      B15      brothers immediately
became                             throughout the world.            FAME
      B16       The design of hot air
balloons is based on the                             law that        SCIENCE
hot air rises. A burner
at the bottom of the balloon provides the
      B17                                  .
As the air inside the balloon gets hotter, the balloon            HOT
takes off. Its height
above the ground is determined by how hot the air
        B18 inside is and its                               of
travel depends on the wind.                      DIRECT

ETest2

[Ipoqumaùme mcwcm c nponycwa.uu,
  OÕO.3naZlCHHbL1tU no-ltepŒ'.tu Ä21-A28. 3mu H0Jtepa aaÒaHUfLU .421428, 6
  KOHIOPblX npeòcmaŒ1eHb1 603MOYHb1e tgapuamnbl omeemoe.
  ()õaeòume H0Mep BbtÓpaHHO?O               eapuawna
  omaema.

Carol Chadbond leant on
the counter by the till, chewing gum, and gazed at the customers in the shoe shop. There were only two: a
young girl and her mother. They had been A21 on shoes for twenty minutes,
unable to agree on anything. The girl wanted something expensive and
fashionable, A22 the mother wanted something cheap and practical. Carol watched
them argue and thought how bored she was.
She wished
she hadn't agreed to stand in for Julie on a Saturday morning. She could be out
with her friends now, drinking coffee and gossiping instead of waiting for
people to A23 their minds up. The mother came over with a shoe in her hand.

'I wonder if you have
this in a size 4,' she said. Carol took the shoe and smiled the automatic smile
she A24         for customers.
'I'll go and have a look.
Won't be a minute,' she said and went into the storeroom. She quickly found the
shoes, then sat on a stool, hoping to waste a few minutes by A25 to look for
the shoes. She thought about her plans for that evening. She was looking
forward to going to the cinema and seeing her favourite actor's latest film.
Realising that she hadn't invited Amy, she got out her mobile and quickly
dialled the number. It rang twice before Amy answered.
'Hi, it's me!' Carol
said. 'Guess what? I'm at work. Listen, what are you doing later?'
Soon, Amy was
telling Carol all about what had happened the night before and who had said what
to whom. Forgetting where she was, Carol got more and more A26 in the
conversation, crying 'Really?' and 'I don't believe it!' at the more
interesting moments in the story. A low cough came from the door of the
storeroom. Carol looked up to see the woman customer standing there with a very
annoyed A27 on her face. Even worse, the shop manager, Mrs Lewis, was standing
right behind her.
'Erm ... I'll call you
back,' Carol said into the phone, and hung A28 Somehow, she had the feeling
that she might not have to work the following Saturday morning.

A21

I) trying

2) wearing

3) getting

4) having

A22

1) however

2) despite

3) while

4) still

A23

1) put

2) make

3) decide

4) cross

A24

1) booked

2) reserved

3) held

4) stored

A25

1) acting

2) imitating

3) displaying

4) pretending

A26

l) involved

2) excited

3) included

4) concentrated

A27

l) view

2) look

3) sight

4) appearance

A28

1) off

2) out

3) up

4) down

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB Ml.'
ObPATMTE
  BHMMAIIME, qmo                Ha .3aÒaHllfl B4-B18 11 A21-Ä28
  pacnonapcuomcfl 6
PC13HblX qacmm• t5J1(1HKa. B4-B18 pacnoao.wellbl
  Hid.YCHeù qacmu t5aaHKa. Tlpu nept'Hoce omaemoe 6 aac)aHllfLV 134-1318
  õYK6b1 ,3anucb16ŒomcH õe,3 npoõeaoe u .3HCIK06
  npe/lllHaH1ffi.

Test
2
                                    Pa3aeJ1
     IIWCbMO

         HO                 Cl, C2    WIAHK OTBETOB x2.
TIPI/ 6bVIOJIHeH11U
  aaðŒuú CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HUMUHlle oõpamume Ha mo,
  uno eatuu omeembl õyòym moabK0 no aanucmt,           6
  R7AHKE OTBETOB E2. 1--111KClKlle aanucu qepnoeuxa He õyðvm   .9Kcnepmo.u.
111211 .3anoaneuuu WIAHKÄ OTBETOB ycaycume cnaqaaa
  HOMCP aaÒaHlffl CI, C2 .3ame.u aanutuume C60ù omaem Ecau
  OÒHOÙ cniOPOHbl HeòocmamotlH0, 6b/ .uo.yceme
  ucno.;1b.306anlb òpyeyo cmop0HY ÕaaHKa.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.
This is part
of a letter from Susie, your English pen friend.

...Guess
  what! My parents say / can have a pet for my birthday. Isn't that fantastic?
  I'm not sure what kbdofpet toget, though. Haveyayotapet? what Hoya think Do
  think are too mach trouble tv (00k after? Maybe /shuddyet a cat, or a
  hamster. Let me know whatyou think!

Write back to
Susie answering her questions.
Write 100-140
words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Some people believe that teenagers today are generally rude,
lazy and badly behaved. Other people, however, think that teenagers hare a bad
reputation for no reason.
Do you agree that
teenagers are often criticised unfairly?
Write
200-250 words. Use the following plan
1.  Introduction (State the problem).
2.
Express your
opinion and give reasons for it.
3.
Give other
people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.
4.  Conclusion.

                               Pa3aeJ1
       roBopeHHe

Bbl
  noayqume Rapmowcy, na Romopoù npeðcma6aeHb1 mpll aaòaH11f1      vcmno¿o
  omaema:
C3 — me,uamuqecxoe                                             6b1CKa.3b16aHUC',
C4 — ()uaaoe c            ot5.ut'Ha cþŒmuqecR0ù
  uucþop.ua«ueù, C5 — Òuaaoe c        oõM('Ha
  uucþopata«ueù.            6b1no.QHeHt1H          aaòamut
  onpeòea.qem .9K3Œue,qamop. Bo ape.'vtfl npoaeòC'H11f1            qacnlll
  .9R.3CL8WHa uòem nocn10HHHafi .3anucb Ha ayò1d0Kaccemy.

3aaaH11S1 3K3aMeHVeM01'O

STUDENT CARD
Task I (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on clothes.
Remember
to say:
•      how the weather affects what we wear
•      how men and women sometimes wear
different types of clothing
•      what you like and don't like wearing,
and why
•      how important being in fashion is to
you
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
Your school runs after-school clubs for the students and you are thinking
of joining one. You are only available for one night a week. You would like to
do something that isn't connected to schoolwork.
Before making
a decision, ask the teacher in charge of the clubs about:
•      clubs available
•      activities at the clubs
•      days the clubs meet
You begin the
conversation. The teacher will play the part of the teacher responsible for
after-school clubs.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on whether you are going to
join a club and, if so, which one
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You are planning a two-week holiday with your friend next
summer. You and your friend are discussing what kind of holiday you should go
on. You can:
•      go camping
•      stay in a hotel by the sea
•      go on a cruise
•      go on a cycling holiday
•      go to a language school in the UK The
teacher will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•      discuss all the options  take an active part in the
conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement

-tižUage—ñd

Section
1 Listening: third task
A
Look at the task
on page 31. Match each of the following statements to one of the situations
described in questions A7A13.
1
1 think you've
just been working too hard.
2
You can feel the
excitement in the spectators.
3
This Friday ...
we're bringing you the stories you never hear .
4
We actually spent
a lot of time in the hotel ...
5
1've already
brought the camera back to be replaced once ...
6
1 mean, the music
is pretty ordinary
7
There have been
quite a few burglaries around here .
B
For each
situation described in questions A7-A13, make a note of three words or phrases
you might expect to hear. Then compare your predictions with your partner's.
Al: police / robber / frightened'

AIO:
All:
A12:
A13:
Section 2 Reading: second task
C    Quickly read the text on page 33.
Each of the following sentences contains one mistake. Cross out the mistake and
write the correct word on the line.
1     The Romans controlled land in Europe,
the Middle East and north America.
2     The edge of the Roman Empire was the
north of France.
3     Hadrian's Wall went from Cardiff to
Newcastle. 4 The wall took sixty years to build.
5 Chesters
House is on the
         River Thames.
D   Find words in the text to match these
definitions.
1     groups of people who live together
2     very large
3     having an advanced culture — 4 gained, got something
5
things such as food,
equipment, etc
6      small castles
7
ordinary
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
second
task
E    Quickly read the text in the second
task on page 36 and answer these questions.
I
Where is Chessington World of Adventures?
2      What animals can you see there?
3      Which area will very young visitors
enjoy?
4      Which ride sounds like the most
         frightening?

verb

noun

adjective

attract
enjoy
excite

adventure

scare

F     Complete the table. Remember to
include negative forms where appropriate.
Section 4 Writing: second task
G   Complete these words and phrases.
Introducing examples
1      example
2instance

3
such
Introducing
your first point
4

To begin
5
First    all, .
Introducing further points
6  addition to that, 7 As well  this, .
Introducing contrast
8 On other hand, 9 In spitethis, .
Introducing your conclusion
10  conclusion,

Il To sum

Section 5 Speaking: third task
H
Choose the
correct word or phrase to complete these phrases.
1
Getting a book
would I should be a good idea because ...
2
One thing we
would I should remember is that .
3
 Personally, I suggest to get I getting a new pen because .
4
One advantage of
get I getting a briefcase is .
5
In my opinion, it
would I should be best to get a picture because ...
I
Imagine your
teacher is leaving the school. You have collected some money to buy him/her a
present. Choose one of the following presents to buy your teacher and explain
why you think it would be a good idea. Try to use the phrases from Exercise H.

a box of

a book

a new

chocolates

briefcase

a picture

a new pen

something

of the class

else

                                Pa3neJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl
  yc.lbltuume 5 6blCKa.3blßaHUÙ. YcmaH06ume coon16emcm61te
  .vteyòy 6btCKU.3blßdlHll}lJtU eoeopmqeeo 1 — 5 u
  vmeepycÒeH11fLMll, ()aHHbLUU 6 CtlUCKe A — F. Mcno,1b.3.vùme             õVKBV,
  oõoanaqcuougyo ymaepycðemte, movibK0 oÒun pa.3. B
  aaðanuu ecmb oðHO auuutee _ymeepowðemte. Bbl ycabltuume .3anucb
  ()6CIYÒb1. 3ð1Hecume cet)ll omeenlbl 6 maõauuy.

A.
I sometimes make
a little money from my hobby.
B.
I was introduced
to my hobby by a relative.
C.
My hobby's only
really fun if I do it with friends.
D My hobby
helps me meet new people.

Test 3 t

E. It
takes a long time to learn to do my hobby well. F. My hobby is only suitable
for people who are fit.

                  1

2

3

4

5

Bbl yc.Qb1tuume ðuaaop mypucma co
  cayqaùH01i npoxoyceù Ha yau«e. Onpeðeaume, Kú'KL1e
  11.3 'IPUßeÒëHHblX Al-A6 coomßemcmevwm
  coòep.ycamuo mtwcma (1 ), Kt1RUe He coomgemc•mewom (2) u o 6 muccme He
  cycaaano, mo ecnlb na ocnoecmuu meR•cma HeJ1b3fi ()anlb Hid noaoycumea1bH0?0,
  Hil omgema (3). Oõeeòume HO.uep ßblÓPaHHO?O casuu
  gapuamna omøema. Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb c)eaycÒb1.

Al        The tourist is studying
modern art.
                     l) BepHO                2)
HeBepH0                3) B ereKe-re He cxa3t1H0
A2       There is a mistake in the
tourist's guide book.
1)   BepH0               2) HeBepHO          3)
B •reKc•re He CKŽuaHO
A3       The woman recommends taking
a bus.
                     1) BepH0              2)
He13epHO               3) B •reKCTe He cwagaH0
A4     The tourist should
turn right at the park.
                     l) BepHO               2)
HeBepH0                 3) B -reKc-re He cxa3'dH0
A5       The man should catch the
number 21 bus to get to his destination.
                     1) BepH0                2)
HeBepH0                 3) B Tewre He cK't13aH0
A6      The Speedmaster card can be
used on any local bus for a week.
                    1) BepH0              2)
HeBepH0            3) B -rewre He CKt13t1HO

Test3

Bbl ycalbltuume 6b1CR•a.3b16aH11fi moòeù 6 ce.uu pa.11ut1Hb1.v
cumya«unr. Omaemwne Ha gonpocbl no coòepyaHLlR) 6btCKa.3b1BG'HUÙ,
Bbttîpae npeÒaoyceHHbLV gapuamnoe on16ema. B aaòaH11f1-r A
7413 oõaeòume I'llCþpy 1, 2 ILIII 3,
OÕ03Ha¼C11014VlO omeeng Komopblù ,zca.yemcfl
Hauõonee gePHblM. Bbl ycabltuume KaycÒoe 6blCKa.3b16CIHUe

A7

You will hear a woman talking about
  crime in her local area. How does she feel?
I) worried
2)
  hopeful
3)
  angry

A8

You will hear an advertisement for a radio programme.
  What is special about the programme?
I) It has interviews with ordinary people.
2)
  It has
  interviews with experts.
3)
  It has
  interviews with sportsmen.

A9

You will hear a man talking about
  his holiday. What was he disappointed by?
I) the hotel
2)
  the beaches
3)
  the weather

AIO

You will hear a doctor talking to a patient. What is the
  doctor's advice?
l) Rest and take a few days off work.
2) Get some fresh air and exercise. 3) Make sure you eat
  well.

All

You will hear a woman talking about
  the Eurovision Song Contest. How does she feel about it?
l) She likes to watch the performances.
2) She finds some of it predictable. 3) She thinks it is
  pointless.

A12

You will hear a sports commentator describing a match. Who
  does he criticise?
I) the umpire
2)
  the players
3)
  the spectators

A13

You will
  hear a man talking to a shop assistant. What does he want the shop assistant
  to do?

I) contact
the manager of the shop
2)   give him his money back
3)   replace a damaged item

no        Bl
  u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOÞf OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB             !
ObPATWE BHMMAHME,                 HO
                 m, Al-A13
'-tacnlfLV
  âqamca. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HUYCHŒ'Ú yacmu ÕaaHKCl.
  flpu nepeHoce omeemt)6 6 aaòaHuu BI õYRßb1 õe.3
  npot5e,706 u .3HClK06 npenuncmufl.

                                        Pa3neJ1        HrreH"e

YcmaH06ume coomeemcmeue me-if A — G
  meR•cma.8f I — 6. 3ClHecume coou omoenlbl 6 maõau«y.

A. UNUSUAL VIEWS B. EARLY
INVENTORS
c. SENSIBLE DECISIONS
D.
POPULAR ARTISTS
E.
COMMON MISTAKES
F.
FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS G. SCIENTIFIC VALUE

1
  Photography scientists can whether all Muybridge ground at the
2
  The ordinary people are be taking mail. The

has many uses. Most of
us use photographs to save special moments for the future, but also learn a lot
from them. In the nineteenth century, for example, people argued about of a
horse's legs left the ground at the same time when it ran. A man call Eadweard
took high-speed photographs of a horse and proved that all four legs were
indeed off the same moment.

camera that uses film seems to be a thing of the past. These days, more and
more digital cameras to capture those unforgettable moments. In ten years'
time, we'll all that we then put on our computers to print out or to send
around the world by ecameras will get better and cheaper, and the world of
photography will never be the same again!
3     Is
your album full of boring snapshots? Taking good photographs is a lot easier
than you might think. The secret is to find new ways of looking at an ordinary
scene. If vou're taking a picture of a building, what happens if you look up?
Or perhaps the back Of the building is more interesting than the front.
Photography is about surprises and discovering new points of view.
4     Before
buying a camera, it's important to decide what you're going to use it for. Do
vou want to take quick photos of your friends and family? In that case, you
should go for a cheap camera that you can keep in your bag or pocket, always
ready. Do you want to take artistic pictures? If so, you will probably want to
spend a bit more on a more expensive professional camera. A little thought now
can help you choose wisely.
5     Many
people hope to simply pick up a camera, point it and produce great pictures.
Photography is a lot easier than it used to be, but it's still easy to get it
wrong. Remember that you should have the sun behind you. Too many people take
photographs facing the sun and then are surprised when there's too much light!
Another thing to avoid is taking pictures of something far away in the dark.
Your flash won't help at a distance.
6     When
the Englishman William Henry Fox Talbot first pointed his camera at a window in
his home, Lacock Abbey, in 1835, he helped to start a revolution. This was the
moment he created the first photograph on paper. His ideas, together with those
of other pioneers, including the Frenchmen Daguerre and Niepce, changed things
forever. Today's world of full-colour images had its beginnings in their
experiments.

NY •reKCTa

TeMa

1

2

3

4

5

6

32

England was a part of the Roman Empire.
The wall went from one side of England to
  the other.
Building the
  wall helped to stop the soldiers from thinking about home.
  The wall
  showed how powerful the Roman people were.
55 None of the wall has survived to the
  present day.
 There is a large collection of Roman
  objects at Chesters House.

In 122 AD, the Roman Empire stretched across Europe, the Middle East and
  north Africa. In Britain, it reached to the far north of England. However,
  many Scottish tribes resisted the Romans. So, in that year, Emperor Hadrian
  decided to build a huge wall across the island to keep them out.
The wall ran all the way across England, from what is now
Carlisle in the west to Newcastle in the east — 73
  miles in total. It was built by Roman soldiers, and was a useful way of
  keeping them busy. Remember that in those days they were living on the edge
  of the civilised world. To stop them missing home too much, it was important
  to give them something to do, and building a ten-foot-thick wall certainly
  did that. Local people also benefited, since the soldiers and craftsmen
  working on the wall needed to buy supplies wherever they were. It took six
  years to build and was a very clear symbol of the strength of the Romans.
Today, this wall is known as Hadrian's Wall and, although
  most of it has disappeared, it is still possible to see parts Of it. The
  Romans built forts along the wall for the men to live in and some of these
  buildings have survived. The best example is the fort at Chesters House on
  the River Tyne, in an area which the Romans called Cilurnum. The soldiers
  living here did not just come from Rome. They also came from modern-day
  Germany and areas of central Europe, which at the time the wall was built
  were under Roman control. Visitors to the fort today can see a small number
  of everyday objects in the museum and get an idea of what life was like on
  the edge of the Roman world.

Ilpoqumañme ymeepycòeHllH I — 6 u
caeòyouguù aa HUMU mexcm YcmaH06ume coomeemcmeue .ueycðy
ymeepYÒeH1ffi.M11 u coòepYí1HueM moccma. Hanuužume 1
— ecau ymeep.ycòenue eepHoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecutu
ymcepycòeHue HeeepHoe. 3aHecume CBOU omeembl 6 maõ21110'.

1

3

4

5

6

Ilpoqumaùme
meyccm u 6b1h10JIHume aaòaH11fi A14-A20, oõ60òH
I'll(þpy 1, 2, 3 unu 4, coomcemcnlßyougyo H0Mepy
6blÕPClHH020 6Œvtu gapuanma omaema.

I looked out of the window again and then back at the
clock. 'Typical Helen!' I thought to myself, wondering what excuse she would
try this time. We had had this arrangement for a year now. We took it in turns
to drive to work, stopping along the way to pick the other up. It saved petrol
and was better for the environment, which was something that Helen claimed to
care about, although I had seen her empty her ashtray out of the car window
more than once. For me, the main advantage was the stress reduction. If I could
avoid battling the city centre traffic a few days a week, I'd put up with any
amount of meaningless gossip along the way.
A car horn sounded and I looked up to see Helen waving
from her car window and pointing at her watch as if to say, 'Hurry up'. I
deliberately sat down out of view and counted to thirty before picking up my
jacket and bag and heading towards the car, locking the front door behind me.
'Sorry, Vanessa!' Helen called. 'Justin just wouldn't
get ready for school this morning.' If Helen's excuses were to be believed,
then Justin was the most difficult child imaginable. He also seemed to be the
unluckiest, having suffered from half a dozen different minor illnesses in the
last month alone. It was strange that he never seemed to have any problems on
mornings when it was my turn to drive.
'Never mind,' I replied, fastening my seat belt. 'We
should be okay.' Helen set off and we joined the rush hour traffic.

'Did you read the report?' she
asked me after a minute and I nodded. 'What did you think?' I had been
expecting the question, but still I hesitated for a moment. I couldn't say what
I really thought, which was that Helen would be lucky to keep her job because
the report was very critical of her department. Helen glanced at me.
'I know,' she said. 'It's bad, isn't it? I knew that
Peterson was out to get me.'
Carl Peterson was the area manager. The report was the
result of a month-long study of the company and we had all been asked to read
it over the weekend. I understood why Helen didn't get on with him. Both were
determined to get to the top in the company. The difference was that where
Helen had no idea how to deal with other people and spent her time finding ways
of avoiding blame, Carl was a talented manager.
'I'm sure that's not the case,' I said. 'He's just
doing his job.' Helen's lips tightened.
'Hmm,' she said. After a moment, she continued. 'Look.
I know I'm not perfect, but it's not my fault. I
Just at that moment, a young child on
a bicycle pulled out into the road in front of us. I shouted 'Look out!' and
Helen slammed on the brakes and turned the wheel quickly. There was a crunch of
metal as we hit the back of the car in front, which had stopped at the traffic
lights. The boy glanced over his shoulder before quickly pedalling off. Steam
began to rise from under the bonnet. Helen hit the steering wheel in anger and
frustration.
'You okay?' I asked.
'Yes, fine,' she replied, and then I saw her
expression change from anger to shock and she let her head fall forward onto
the wheel. I followed where she had been looking and saw what she had seen. The
driver of the other car had got out and was standing by the car, looking at us
with a fixed expression. It was Carl Peterson.
A14      When Vanessa thinks 'Typical
Helen!' she implies that 1) she feels sorry for Helen.
2)
Helen is often
late.
3)
Helen will be in
a hurry.
4)
they will be late
for work.
AIS      Vanessa mentions Helen
emptying her ashtray to show 1) how much Helen's views on the environment have changed.
2)
how their
arrangement makes a big difference to pollution.
3)
that she thinks
their arrangement is a bad idea.
4)
that she doubts
that Helen really cares about the environment.
A16      Vanessa feels that the
driving arrangement 1) gives her and Helen a good chance to chat.
2)
makes getting to
work more relaxing.
3)
causes arguments
between her and Helen.
4)
helps to reduce
the amount of traffic on the road.
Al 7      Vanessa waits before
leaving the house to join Helen 1) to show that she won't allow Helen to hurry
her.
2)

to check that she has
everything she needs.
3)   because she knows they have plenty of
time.
4)   because she has to check that the
door is locked.
AIS Vanessa believes that Justin
1) gets ill more than other children
his age.
2)   is used as an excuse by his mother.
3)   is a difficult child to deal with.
4)   should learn to deal with his
problems himself.
      A19       Vanessa thinks that
Carl
1)   is jealous of Helen's success.
2)   wants Helen to do his job for him.
3)   is very good at his job.
4)   gives everyone too much work to do.
A20 In the final paragraph, Helen realises that 1) she and Vanessa will be late for
work.
2)   she is lucky to be alive.
3)   the boy is badly injured.
4)   she has made her situation worse.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo orngenlbl Ha aaÒaH1151132, B3 u
  A14-A20 pacnoaauuomcfl d pa,3HbLr qacnlH.r Õnawca. B2, B3
  pacnoao.yceHb1 a HUYCHeÚ qacmu t5aaH1v•a. Tlpu nepenoce omaemt)ß
  6 aar)ammx B2, B3 õYK6b1 aanucbtea,tomcfl õea npoõenoe u
  .3HüK0B npe/lllHaHlffi.

                       Pa3AeJ1        rpaMMaTMKa JleKCVIKa

Tlpoqumaùme
mewm 3a/10JIHume nponycK11 npeòaoyceHt1H-x• nor) HO.M('PCLMII B4-BI I
coomcemc,'11ßW01UIOt11 tþ0PMŒ8t11 caoe, HaneqamaHHbLt
.3aua6Hb1.uu ÕVK6ŒU11 cnpaaa om Kaycðoeo

William
Shakespeare
WRITE
RECEIVE
NOT PRODUCE
LATE
APPEAR
STAR
PERFORM
languages.

STUDY

npoqumaùme npugeòeHHb11i
  Hil.yce mexcm Tlpeoõpaavùme cat)6ú', Haneuamam•tbte
  3CIZIC16HbLVt11 ÕYK€avML1 nocae HOMC'POd B 12-1318 maK, qmoõbl
  OHU u .aæccuqecK11
  coomaemcmß06Œ1t1 coòepycamuo me,rccma. 3ano.1H11tne
  nponycxu nt)JtyqeHHbLU11 caoaa.uu. Ka.ycòblðf nponyt'K
  coomgemcmayem omòœ1bH0„uy .3aòaH1110 113 epvll/lbl
  B12-B18.

Chessington
World of Adventures is an  theme park, just EXCITE 12 miles from London.
There's
something for everyone at the park. Animal will LOVE enjoy the 'Trail of Kings', where you can
see gorillas, tigers and lions.
 is the 'Land of the Dragons', a ATTRACT
Very young children will
love 'Toytown', where you can go for an
flight
on the back of a Flying Jumbo, or drive one of the ENJOY visitors might try
'The Vampire'. On ADVEM'URE
'The
Vampire', you ride with your legs hanging down while it takes you high into the sky. If heights make
you'The Vampire' NERVE might not be for you. Riding fast high above the park
can be a experience!  SCARE

Tlpoqumaùme moccm c
  nponvuca.uu, OÕO.3uaqeHHblJfll HO.&tepaatU .421-A28. 3mu H0Mepa
  coomuemcme,yom aaðt1H11ft.8t A21-A28, 6 KomopbLr
  npeòc•mŒ16aeHb1 60.3.&to.YHb1e eapucmnlbl omaem06.
  Oõeeòume HO„uep  6aat11 eapuamna omaema.

Even up
  seasons.
A22 A
  plants that soon touch If
A24 walls You hot wisteria Those you're
A26 and a
  lot
A27 varieties keep plants

if you live in the heart of the city, there's no reason why you shouldn't
A21 gardening. We can't all afford a large garden, but we can all create a
space where we can follow the Whether it's a window box, a balcony or a tiny
yard, anyone can have the pleasure of looking plants,
window box is a small box of plants that
literally sits outside your window. Here, the choice of is what counts. You
want a splash of colour all year A23 , so choose flowers bloom at different
times of the year. Daffodils, for example, are beautiful spring flowers and
will have you looking forward to summer. Their bright colours will also attract
butterflies, bringing a of life.
you've got a balcony, you've got a
little more freedom. In this case, the key is to  maximum use of the space
you've got available. Put taller plants against the of the house, with
shorter plants and flowers along the A25  of the balcony.
can also add a water feature; a small
fountain creates interest and can have a cooling effect on a summer's day. If your neighbours'
balcony is next to yours, why not use a fast-growing plant like to form a natural barrier, giving you
more privacy?
of you who are lucky enough to have a
small yard can really go to town. Think about how going to use it. Do you want
to be able to sit and enjoy the sun? Or do you want to be  to entertain friends and have a
barbecue? Divide the yard into separate areas plan each one carefully. Garden
furniture is very important. A table that folds in half can give you of
flexibility, and chairs that fold away also allow you to change your garden to
your mood. As A28  as plants are concerned, choose that don't mind a bit Of shade, unless
your yard gets a lot of sun. Yards often have walls that the sun out for long
periods and you don't want your careful plans spoiled because a few of your

start to die.
A21                   I) take                      2)
set                      3) put                    4) make
A22                 1) on                       2) up                      3)
after                 4) down
A23                   I) round                   2)
over                   3) along                4) across
A24                  1) get                       2)
make                 3) have                  4) do
A25                 1) edge                    2) boundary          3)
rim                   4) frame
A26                 I) capable               2) possible            3)
able                 4) probable
A27     I)
fit    2) suit  3) copy            4) go A28       1) much           2) long 3)
few 4) far

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE
  3ABY2bTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !
ObPATWE BHMMAHME,                  Ha
               B4-B18 Il A21-A28   6
PCI.3HblX qacnlH.r ÕJIG'HKa.
  B4-B18 pacno.ao,yceHb1 6 Hil.YCHeñ1 yacmu t;.aamca. [Ipu nepeHoce
  omeen106 6 .3aÒaHllfLV B4-B18 Õ)'K6bt 3anucb16cuomcf1
  õe.3 npoõeJ106 11 .3h1UK06 npU111HüH11H.

                                          Pa3AeJ1
        Il"CbMO

WIAHK OTBETOB .Nþ2.
Tlpu Bblno.1HeH1žu
  aaòcmuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HILUCIH11e oõpamume Ha
  mo, qmo 6atuu omeemž,l

aanutuume C60ù omaenz ECJtu
  OÒHOÚ cmop0Hbl õaamca HeòocmamotlH0, 6bl *toyeme
  ucnoatb30aamb ()pveyo cmopoH.y õaamca.

You have
20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from
Sean, your English pen friend.

...I'm thinking ofstarting music lessons. Doyoup(ay any
  instruments? ever had lessons? I'm sure what instrument to cheese what
  suggest? / want to be awe
to playpop music, / think.

Write back
to Sean answering his questions.
Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have
40 minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Fast food is very popular and saves time for busy working people.
However, many experts say that it is not completely healthy.
What can you say for and
against fast food?
Write 200-250 words.
Use the following plan
I.
Introduction (State the problem).
2.  Arguments "for".
3.
Arguments
"against"
4.  Conclusion.

Pa3neJ1      1'0BopeHne

Bbl nonyqume Kapmowcy, Ha ycomopoù npeòcmaœWHb1 mpu
  aac)aH1iH ycmH0?0 ome,ema.• C3 — me-uamuuecxoe .UOHoa02uqecxoe
  Bblt•xa.3bwaHlte,
C4 — ()11Œ70? c IV./7bJ0
  oõMC'HC1 cþaycmuqeucoù uncþopua«ueÚ, C5 —
  òuaaoe c geab10 oõMC?Ha
01ßHowaoù1
  untþop.ua«ueú. OKOH¼UH11e 6bUIO„QHé'H11H
  Ka.ycòoeo aaòaH11f1 onpeòeanem 3K.3a.ueuamop. Bo
  ape.',ffi  ,Ðžnoù qacmu .9K.3Œuena uòem
  nocn10ft,LIHaf-1 aanucb na ayò110Kaccemy.

3aaaH1151  3K3aMeHVeMO"O

STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on holidays.
Remember
to say:
•      why people go on holiday
•      what people usually do on holiday
•      what different kinds of holiday
people go on
•      what kind of holiday you enjoy, and
why
You have to
talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then
he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in a
museum. You would like to look round an exhibition for half an hour. The museum
charges separately for each exhibition, and you can pay £5 only.

Before making a decision, ask
the museum assistant about:
•      exhibitions on at the moment
•      how long it takes to go round them
•      the cost
The teacher
will play the part of the museum assistant and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on which exhibition to look
round STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
Your teacher,
Mrs Williams, is leaving the school and your class has collected some money for a present. You and your
friend are discussing what present to get her. You can get her:
•      a new pen
•      a new briefcase
•      a picture of the class
•      a book
•      a box of chocolates
The teacher
will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•      discuss all the options
•      take an active part in the
conversation and be polite  come up with ideas
•      give good reasons • find out your
friend's attitudes and take them into account
•      invite vour friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement

iEkamiSkillS

 Test
                                                                Develó
mentF

Section
1 Listening: third task
A   Read questions A7-A13 in the task on
page 43. Write a word or phrase from the questions in each gap to complete the
sentences.
I (A?) If you give someone encouragement, you give them
2      (A8) If you have a  problem, your problem is to do with
money.
3      (A9) The  of something is how much people like
it.
4      (AIO) If you are  , you believe what other people say.
5      (All) A  is a period of time in which you do
something.
6
(Al 2) If something is  , it is normal and usual.
                 7 (A13) If things  you, they help you,
B    In pairs or as a group, discuss what
you think a life coach might be.
Section 2 Reading: third task
C   Quickly read the text on page 46 and
decide if these statements are True or False.
I     Angela is taking part in a game show
on TV.
2
Angela is in the final
with three other contestants.
3
Angela has the chance to
win
4      The task for the final round demands
a lot of physical skill.
5      Angela has to guess which door the
money is behind.
 6 When the presenter opens a door, Angela knows she's made a mistake.
7
Angela is
allowed to change her mind.
8
Angela changes her mind.
9
Angela believes she has
increased her chances of winning the money.
10
At the end of the story,
we know
          that Angela has lost.
D   Write a word from the box on the line
to replace the word in bold.
likelihood
• luck • opportunity
I     I wish I'd had the chance to go to
university.
2
There's not much
chance that she'll come to the party.
3
It was pure
chance that I met her in the street while shopping
         yesterday.
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
third
task
E    Read the text with gaps A21-A28 on
page 49 and answer the questions.
I     How was Jackson going to
A21  rid of Simon?
Jackson
wants Simon to:
a)    leave.
b)   stay.
2 'Could you put me +122 Jackson?'
Simon is asking Jackson
for:
a)    financial help.
b)   somewhere to stay.
3
there seemed
little evidence to suggest he was 1423  to leave.
The word that fits in the
gap probably means:
a)
creating.
b)   planning.

4
Simon
seemed to have -424Dear Sally, in so comfortablyWrite back soon!
This
suggests that Simon was treating the flat as if:Thanks foryour letter. It
wasgreat to hear
b) a) it he was was his a temporary
home. guest. We/(done VM passingyour exams! fromyou!
5
Jackson
knew he should +125  / thinkyou need to askyeursefone question:

       his feelings clear to Simon

what's more important — that argument or

Jackson knew he should:

yourfriendship? / remember when /
  asked

a) tell Simon exactly how he felt.

myselfthat it al/became dear. / rea/isedmy

b) change how he felt about Simon.

friendship with Chris was far more
  important.

F Circle the correct word to
  complete the

/ calledhint immediate/' andtowhim. 14/e becamefriends again

patterns.

immediately.
  Maybeyea shoulda/o the same thing. Let me know what

I charge someone with I for a crime
  2 condemn someone with I for (doing)

happens!Goodluck!

something

23 Pert/andStreet

3 blame someone with I for (doing)

Manchester

something

MN36YL

4 accuse someone for I of (doing)

24th September

something

1

Lots
  of(ove,

Section 4 Writing: first task

Section 5 Speaking: first task

G Put the parts of this letter in
  the correct order.

H Look at the Student Card for Task 1 on page 51 and make
  notes to complete the

      Part I                 Part 6

table.

What's your favourite subject?

Why?

What things do you do in a typical lesson?

What have you learnt so far by doing this subject?

Do you
  want to continue studying this subject in the future?

      Part 2                Part 7
Part 3Part 8 Part 4  Part 9
Part 5
Anyway, I'vegot togo MOW. Loads ofhomework (unfortunate(y!).
I'm SOD)' to hearyou 're hadan argument with your
bestfrt•eMdana/thatyoufre not speaking at the moment Yes, has happenedto me
too, andtvs awful isn't t??
Care(
                                   Pa3neJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycalbltuume 5 6btCKa.3b16CZHUñ.
Ycmcmogume coomaemcmaue Ateycòy ßb1C1caabteaH1151Jtu
Kaycòozo pogopqugeeo 1 — 5 u ymaepycòeH11H.M11, C)aHHbLMU 6
ChlUCKe A — F. Mcnoat.ayúme Kaycðyo õYK6.y, oõ03Hat1t110110'10
ymeep.ycc)eH1te, mŒ1bK0 oÒuH pa.3. B aaÒa1tuu ecnlb
oÒ1to auuutee ymgeporcòeuue. Bbl ycablžuume .3anuc•b
()gaycÒb1. 3cmecume Cß011 omgenlbl (3 maãauuy.

A.
His best friend's
sense of humour appeals to him.
B.
His relationship
with his best friend has changed recently. C. His best friend saved him when he
was in serious trouble. D. His best friend is also his next-door neighbour.
E.
Communication and
support are very important in their relationship.
F.

He and his best friend share
the same interests.

FOBOPSILLU1ñ

      1

2

3

4

5

YTBepxnemre

Bbl yc„lbltuume
  pa.32060p JteycÒy u nt»cynameaeu. Onpeòeaume,
  KtlKlte 11.3 npugeòëHHbLr ymgepycðeH11ù Al-A6
  coomaemcmayom coòepycaH11}0 meKcma (1 KClKUe He coomaemcmeyom (2) u o
  qëM 6 muccme He mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUll muccma Heat,.3H ()amb noaoycumeabH0?0,
  HI/ omeema (3). Oõ6eòume HO-MCP 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6t1M11
  gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycau,uuume aanucb ðeaycòbl.

      Al     The trousers were too
big for the customer's husband.
                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3)
B •reKcere He cxa•gaH0
      A2    The assistant tells the
customer how to get her money back.
                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepno             3)
B •rewre He cKt13',1H0
      A3     The assistant finally
agrees that the new trousers are a different colour.
                           l) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO              3) B •reKCTe He CKa3'dHO
      A4    The customer thinks her
husband looks good in grey clothes.
                           l) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO             3) B TeKCTe He CKa3Žu--lO
      A5     The customer's favourite
colour is green.
                          1) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO                3) B TeKCTe He cKtuaH0
      A6     The customer proves she
bought the trousers at one of their shops.
1)  BepH0         2) HeBepH0        3) B
-rewre He CKtuaHO

Bbl ycabltuume ltHtnep6bR) c 'ICU.XOJIO?O.U -
bJt.ÐP Teùaop. B aaÒaHUf1X A 7-A13 oõaeòume
Illitþpy 1, 2 ILQII 3, coomaemcmayougyo 6b1õpaHHo.uy 6a.uu
aapuanmy omaema. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanucb ()6ayÒbl.

      According to Blaire, life
coaches I) have busy schedules.

Test
  4

2)  often work in teams. 3) offer support
and advice.

 A8

As a life coach, Blaire
1)
  deals with many
  different kinds of problem.
2)
  specialises in
  helping people with their careers. 3) only deals with financial problems.

 A9

Blaire says that life coaches I) are
  often medically trained.
2)
  often want to
  help each other.
3)
  are increasing
  in popularity.

310

Life coaches try to make people I) be more trusting.
2)
  deal with
  strangers.
3)
  think about
  their life,

311

Blaire says that most people need I) a number of
  sessions.
2) a very
  long first session. 3) just one session.

A12

In a typical session, Blaire would ask if the client was
l) happy with her.
2) worried about the sessions. 3) having any problems.

A13

The example of the actor shows that
  1) we can all be successful if we work hard.
2)
  life coaches do
  benefit people.
3)
  Blaire knows a
  lot of famous people.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeenlbt Ha
  aaòamtst BI, Al-A13 pacnoaaecuomcR 6 Pa.3HblX

BI
  ÕVKßbl aanucbtgawmcžfl õea npoõeaoa u
  .3HCIKOB npenuncmu.q.

O
                                        Pa3aeJ1        I-ITeHne

YcmaH06ume coom€emcmaue me-u A — G
  meyçcma.u 1 — 6. 3t1Hecume CBOU omeenlbl Mcno.Qb3Yùme
  rca.ycòyo õycay moabK0 oÒtlH pa.3. B aaòanuu
  oÒHa me.'ta auuutfl51.

maâungy.

A.      EXPENSIVE
NEWSPAPERS
B.      SERIOUS
PROBLEM
C.      DIFFERENT
TOPICS
D.      WAYS
OF READING
E.       INSTANT
INFORMATION
F.       EASIER
READING
G.      FAMOUS
AUTHOR

I
2
3

There are two than tabloids, stories about
  the interested in news big headlines, There is an official documents,
  understand. They confusing, even now make sure
The Tolstoy family years. One of the
  Tolstoy, was born one of the greatest Anna Karenina,

main types of
newspaper: 'broadsheets' and 'tabloids'. Broadsheets are often larger and are
'serious' newspapers. They present the news in detail, and do not have many
private lives of famous people. Tabloids, on the other hand, are much more and
scandals involving stars than they are in serious news. They often have very
particularly on the front page, and have lots more photographs.

Test4\

organisation
in the UK called the Plain English Campaign. Their aim is to try to get such as
government leaflets, written in a style of English that is easy to say that a
lot of written English, particularly when it's talking about legal issues, is
to British people. They have had a lot of success, and many government
departments that the documents they produce are checked to make sure they're
understandable.
have contributed much to Russian society
and culture for many hundreds of most famous Tolstovs, Count Lev Nikolaevich,
better known to the world as Leo in 1828. He was a writer, politician and
philosopher, and is now considered to be novelists of the 19th century. Many of
his books, including and Peace and are still extremely popular todav. Leo
Tolstoy died in 1910.
4
If you're reading a newspaper and you want to find out what's on
TV at 8 0'clock tonight, you don't  read every word on the TV page. You
ignore all the programmes on earlier in the day, and just look at  the
information about programmes on at S pm. With a news report, however, you may
read the whole thing through quickly to get a general idea of what it's about.
If it looks interesting, you might decide to read it in more detail.
5
When we want to find a company's telephone number, we look in a
telephone directory. The
Internet, however, doesn't have a
directory of websites, so how can we find the website of a business we're
interested in? The answer is to use a 'search engine'. One Of the most popular
search engines at the moment is Google. Let's say you want to find a company
called Haymarket. You do a quick search on Google, and all the websites which
have the word Haymarket in them appear in a list.
6
Many people suffer from some form of dvslexia. This means
that their reading or writing ability is not as good as you would expect from
their level of intelligence. There are actually manv different types of
dyslexia. If you have 'scotopic sensitivity syndrome', for example, you find it
difficult to read black print on white paper. Other colours, however, are much
easier to read.

Ne •reKCTa

1

2

3

4

5

6

I IV[' knou for certain where and zehcn chess teas
invented.
2      Will
never know for sure why the game is called 'chess'.
3      It
is possible that the rules of the game Will change in the future.
4      A
man called Charles Darrozt' invented Monopoly.
5      Darroct'
's family helped him make the board game.
6      Parker
Brothers also made a version of the game for the UK.

Test 4

[Ipoqumaùme  1 — 6 u caeðyougue aa HII.UU
  moccmbl. Ycmcmouume coome,emcmaue .ueycòy yme,epycòO111fLM11 u
  coòepyanue.u me,tccmoo. Hanutuume tgucþpy 1 — ec.lll
  vmoepycòeptue oepnoe, 11 Igucþpy O — eccll/ ymeep.ycòeH11e
  neeepnoe. Jemecume cooti onwenžbl o maõautgy.

The two-player game chess is one of the most popular board games in the
world. It is also one of the oldest, although there is uncertainty regarding
where and when chess originated. Several countries claim to have invented the
game.
One possibility is that chess was invented in India about 1,500 years ago.
Another theory, however, says that the Chinese were playing a form of chess
over 800 years before that. We shall probably never know for sure, but we do
know where the word 'chess' comes from. It comes from the Persian word
shàh, which means 'king'.
The rules for chess have
changed several times during the centuries. Many of the modern rules were
introduced in the 1 5th century, and minor changes to the game were also made
in the 19th century. An international organisation called FIDE (Fédération
Internationale des Echecs) is now responsible for making any further changes to
the rules.

1

2

3

4

5

6

The
enormously successful board game Monopoly has an interesting historv. Although
many people believe that Charles Darrow created the game, it is now known that
he did not. In the 1920s, there were a number of home-made games in the USA
called Monopoly, all very similar to the game we play today. Charles Darrow
played one of these games, enjoyed it, and decided to make his own version. He,
his wife and his son made the sets by hand and he began to sell them. The
game's popularity grew and, in 1935, Darrow sold the game to the American
companv Parker Brothers. The UK version of the game, with London street names,
was produced by Waddington Games in 1936. In a short space of time, there were
versions for cities and countries all round the world. It has been estimated
that since 1935 more than 500 million people have played Monopoly.

[Ipoqumaùme moccm u 6b1110AH1žme A14-A20, gucþpy
1, 2, 3 unu 4, coomgemcmoyouçy'/0 H0Jtepy 6blÕPaHHO?O
ßŒuu oapuanma omuema.

You've won the car, you've won the
  holiday for two in the Caribbean, to the final for a chance to win one
  million pounds!' even the screaming and clapping of the audience wouldn't be
  able to drown beating heart. She couldn't believe it — the first time she'd
  ever taken part in she was in a potentially life-changing situation. to
  herself. 'Don't lose control now.' the presenter. 'Now, skill has got you
  this far but, as you know, there's chance in the final and this week is no
  exception.' Angela nodded. She'd and knew what every round entailed. 'So
  let's have a look at how you pounds!' board descended from the ceiling of the
  studio. On the board were three large one of these doors is one million
  pounds. Pick the right one, and you're millionaire. Pick the wrong one and
  you're going home with... 'The audience Bob's catchphrase for him:
Even Angela mouthed it, she knew it so well.
don't want that, do we? So pick a
  door, Angela, and may luck be with you!' before answering. 'The middle door
  please, Bob,' she said finally.
repeated Bob. 'Okav! But before we have a look, I'm going to
  open a door that choose. He opened the door on the far left, revealing a
  picture of a bus cheered. Angela's heart started beating faster.
'We're going to be nice to you. You've got another choice
  to make. You your original choice — the middle door — or you can change your
  decision and right-hand side. Xhat's it to be?'

'Congratulations,
Angela! and now you're through Angela was sure that out the sound of her a game
show and here 'Stay calm,' she thought 'Okay, Angela,' said Bob, always an
element of never missed an episode could win one million A brightly-coloured
doors. 'Angela, behind going home today a didn't hesitate to complete
. just your bus fare!'
'That's right! And we

Angela thought carefully 'The
middle door!' you were wise not to ticket. The audience 'Now, Angela,' said
Bob. can either stick with opt for the door on the
As a mathematician, Angela had come across the very same
problem at university. Now, here she was, facing it in real life. She couldn't
believe her luck. She knew what not many people know, a fact that seemed to
contradict all reason and common sense. She did the maths in her head one more
time just to make sure she wasn't mistaken. She wasn't. When she'd picked the
first door, she had a one in three chance of being right. Looking at it the
other way round, she had a two in three chance of being wrong. Those were not
good odds. But one of the wrong doors had now been eliminated, so if she
changed her choice to the other possibility, she would double her chances of
being right, of winning the million. It seemed impossible, but she knew it was
true. 'What are you going to do Angela? Stick with your original choice or
switch to the other door?' 'Bob, I'd like to switch, please.'
'Angela's
going to switch! Let's get this right, Angela. You now believe — you now hope —
the million pounds is behind the right-hand door. Is that correct?' 'The
right-hand door, yes,' said Angela weakly.
'Not the middle door?'
'No, not
the middle door.'
'What are you going to do
if it is actually behind the middle door?' asked Bob.
'Cry, probably!' said
Angela. The audience laughed.
'I'm going to open the
door you chose, Angela — the right-hand door. Let's hope there isn't a bus
ticket behind it. Here we go!'
Time seemed
to stand still as Bob outstretched his arm and began to open the door. Angela
had never known a feeling like this. Surrounded by so many people, she felt
like the only person in the universe. Here was the moment of truth, and she was
not sure she could face the consequences, whatever they were.

Test 4

A14      When she got through to the
final, Angela couldn't believe that 1) her heart was beating so loudly.
2)   she'd never taken part in a game show
before.
3)   the audience were supporting her so
much.
4)   her life might be about to change
completely.
AIS    The presenter tells Angela
that
I) she will need some luck to win the money.
2)   he won't make an exception for her.
3)   her skill will increase the chances
of her winning. 4) there is a small chance her skills will be useful.
A16    When the presenter doesn't
finish a sentence, it's clear that 1) the audience has already been told what
to say.
2)   the presenter is unsure exactly what
to say.
3)   the presenter is well known for
saying something. 4) Angela had to complete a well-known saying.
A17    When the presenter opens the
first door, I) he knows that Angela has won the money.
2)
he doesn't know
which door the money is behind.
3)
he knows which
door the money is behind. 4) he thinks she has made a bad choice.
A18        Angela 'couldn't believe
her luck' that
1)
her education
would help her with this decision.
2)
the presenter was
giving her an extra chance.
3)
she'd been in the
same situation at university. 4) she knew far more facts than most people.
A19       Angela was absolutely
certain that
l) the money was behind the right-hand door.
2)   she could increase her chances of
winning.
3)   she had an impossible decision to
make.
4)   she had to analyse the problem in a
different way.
A20      As Bob began to open the
right-hand door, Angela felt 1) there were too many people around her.
2)
knowing the truth
was the most important thing.
3)
worried by what
the future would bring. 4) annoyed by Bob being so slow.

ObPATJ4TE
  BHMMAHME, Ltmo omeenlbt Ha aaÒaHUH B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaaecuomcH 6
  pa.3HblX qacmm• ÕACIHKU. B2, B3 pacnoaoyeHbl 6 HUYHeÚ qacmu
  õaawca. 17pu nepeHoce omaemoa 6      B2, B3 ÕVK6bl
  aanucbtßŒomcH õe.3 npoõeaoe u .3HŒC06
  npt'h111HaHllH.

                            Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTHKa JleKC1,fKa

Tlpoqumaùme mocc•m 3an0JIHume nponycwu 6
npeònoyceHllfLV not) H0Mepa.uu B4-BI 1 coonzeemcmeyougu.uu
cþop.uŒuu cat)6, HaneqamaHHbtx aa¿ta6HbL1tu õycaavuu
cnpaea om Kaycòoeo npec)J10yceH11f1.

flpoqumaùme
PIPIteeC)eHHblli Hil.ye [Ipeoõpaavùme caoea, HaneqamaHHbte
aaaaa6HblMU nocae Ho.uepoe B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHU zpa.wuamuqecwu u
nexcuqecycu coomaemcmgoeaau coòep.ycamuo meyccma. 3ano.1Hume nponycycu
noayqeHHbL8t11 caoga.Mll. Ka.ycÒblÙ nponyc»c coomeemcmeyem
omòeJ1bH0,uy aaòamuo 11.3 epynnbl B12-B18.

B12      Many
of our TV and film stars also perform in plays in    FAVOUR the theatre from
time to time.
B13      They
often see it as an opportunity to do some 'real'         ACT despite the fact
that theatre work is not usually well paid.
              B14      Giving a live                               is
quite different to performing on film, and PERFORM
BIS in
many ways is more and risky. DANGER B16 In the theatre, an actor cannot stop
and ask the if they DIRECT can do the scene again. The show must go on whatever
happens!
B17
Also, the and response of the audience can affect how the BEHAVE actor feels
and performs.
However, a major problem
for theatre actors is that doing the same show
                 BIS night after
night can become                               after a while.                            BORE

Test 4

npoqumaùme mŒccm c
nponycwa•tu, OÕ03HaqeHHb1.MU Ho-uepavuu A21-A28. 3mu Ho-uepa
coomeemcnwyom aac)aH11HJf A21-A28, 6 KOmOPbLV npeòcmaŒWHb1
60,3.bto.YHb1e eapucmnlbl omaemoe. Oõoeòume Ho-uep
BblÕPCIHH020 oa.uu gapuawna omaema.

How was Jackson going to A21  rid of Simon? That was the
  question that had kept him awake for the previous three nights, and which he
  pondered as he now walked home from work. It had all started so innocently,
  as a favour to a friend.
'Could you
  put me A22  , Jackson?' Simon had asked. 'Just for a couple of
  nights.'
Jackson of course had said yes, thinking that it would be
  just for two nights. How wrong he had been.
Now, more than four months on, Simon was still in
  the flat and there seemed little evidence to suggest he was A23  to leave. The evidence, in fact,
  pointed to quite the opposite conclusion. Simon seemed to have A24  in so comfortably, Jackson
  wondered sometimes if it was actually Simon's flat, and he, Jackson, was the
  one staving there as the guest. Jackson knew he should A25 his feelings clear
  to Simon — that he valued his own privacy, that he didn't want to live with
  someone else on a permanent basis, that he felt Simon was abusing his
  hospitality — but the truth was he was scared. Not scared of how Simon would
  react physically, but scared that Simon would take offence, and would A26 him
  of being selfish and not caring about a friend who was in trouble. And Simon
  was in trouble. With no job, no money and nowhere else to stay, where would
  Simon go if Jackson A27 him out?
'Mavbe I am being selfish,' Jackson thought, 'but the
  situation just can't go on like this.'
He made the decision to bring the subject up sometime that evening. 'I
  won't ask him to leave immediately,' he reasoned. 'That would be unfair, and
  would put him in a difficult
A28   But I'll explain that the
  whole arrangement was meant to be temporary, has gone on for a very long time
  now, and that, while it's been nice having Simon as a flatmate, it just can't
  go on indefinitely.'
For the rest of the walk home, he rehearsed exactly what he
  was going to say.

A21                   I) have                     2)
get                     3) take                   4) set
A22                  I) in                         2) out                    3)
over                 4) up
A23                  1) intending             2)
assuming           3) devising            4) conceiving
A24                   l) settled                  2)
established         3) launched          4) relaxed
A25                  1) convey                 2)
express              3) make                 4) tell
A26                  l) charge                 2) condemn          3)
blame              4) accuse
A27                  1) let                        2)
sent                    3) threw                4) did
A28                   l) location                 2)
position            3) point                 4) site

pa3Hb1.v
  yacž11H.r õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb1 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu
  ÕJICIHKa. TIPI/ nepeHoce omeemoa 6 aaðcmunx B4-B18
  õYKßb1 aanucbtea»omcR õe.3 npoõeaoe u
  .3HCIKOß npen11HaH11H.

                                          Pa3neJ1
       IIHCbMO

omeemoa Ha 3aÒaHllH CI, C2 ucno.lbayúme WIAHK
  OTBETOB M2.
õyðym 01ßHueamt.cfl niOJ1bKO no aanucnu,
  CÒe:1UHHb1Jt e WIÄHKE OTBETOB M2. HUKŒcue aanucu
  qePH0611,rca He õvòvm .vqumblßanlbt'fl .9Kcnepn10M.

aamuuume C60ù omeem Ecvlll
  OÒHOÙ cmop0Hbt Õaamca ueòocmamoquo, 6b/ *toyeme
  ucno.lbaoaanlb òpypyo cmop0HY ã1ClHKa.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

../can 't wait to come andstay
  withyou next month. We'regoing £0 have such a lot offun./ what   think
  the weather     like? what kind afdothes should/ briny with me? How much
  money / need? Haveyou     interesting things for us to do? Let know! Hope to
  hearfromyou seen!
Love,

Write back to Alex
answering his questions.
Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many people enjoy watching television. However, some people believe it
can be harmful.
What can you say for and
against watching television?
         Write 200-250 words.                                                Use
the following plan
1.
Introduction
(State the problem).
2.   Arguments "for".
3.   Arguments "against".
4.   Conclusion.

Bbl non.vuume                                 Komopoù
  npeòcmaŒWHb1 mpu aaÒaH11f1 ()151 ycn1H020 omeema.•
C3 — me-Itamuqecwoe                                             (3b1c,tca3b1dauue,
C4 — ()IIŒQOP c lge.1b/0
  oõ.ueHí1 cþt1K•muqecK0ù umþop.ua«ueù,
  C5 — c)uav10? c ICJ1b10 ot1Mt'HG' otßHot1HOÙ
  uncþop.uatgueñl. OKOHtlClHlte (3btnoaHeH11.q KayÒOPO
  aaðt1H11f1 onpeòeastem BK.3Œuenamop. Bo OPC'Mfl
  npooeòeHllf1 omoÙ1 qacmu .9K.3a.Mt'HC1 Idòem nocmomqnafl
  aanucb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

Test 4

                                 Pa3aeJ1        1'0BopeH11e
3aaamaq
3K3aMeHVeMOro
The teacher
will play the part of the shop

STUDENT CARD
Task I
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on your favourite subject at school.
Remember
to say:
•      why it is your favourite subject
•      what things you do in a typical
lesson in this subject
•      what you have learnt by doing this
subject
•      whether you want to continue studying
this subject in the future, and why
You have to
talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then
he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in a bookshop.
You want to buy a book for a friend of yours who is keen on horses. His/her
birthday is next week. Your friend already has lots of books about horses, so
you want one that's only recently been published. You have only £15 to spend.
Before making a decision,
ask the shop assistant about:
•
books about
horses available
•
when they were
published
•
the price
assistant and will speak first. Remember to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need  make a decision
STUDENT CARD
Task 3 (3—4
minutes)
It's Saturday afternoon.
You and your friend are discussing how to spend the evening. You can:
•
watch a DVD or
video at home  go to a café
•
go ice skating
•
play computer
games
•
listen to music
and chat
The teacher
will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•
discuss all the
options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement
Section 1 Listening: first task
A   Look at the task on page 54. You will
hear an extract from what each woman says. As you listen, match each
speaker to a job.

Speaker I

a saleswoman

Speaker 2

b secretary

Speaker 3

c journalist

Speaker 4

d shopkeeper

Speaker 5

e website designer

B   As a class, discuss what you think
each woman's working life is like. Decide which job you would rather do and
explain why.
Section
2 Reading: first task
C Match each of the phrases below to another phrase that means something
similar.

1 simple meals

a famous chefs

2 popular cooks

b latest fact

3 safe cooking

c hard work

4 new discovery

d tasty food

5 difficult job

e different routine

6 delicious snacks

f easy dishes

7 changing habits

g hygienic food

Text 4  chefs teach viewers and readers how
to cook.
Text 5
You
should choose something that is  to prepare for a dinner party.
Text 6
Today, more people  while they

eat.
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
first task
E
Read the first text on page 60. For each gap in the text B4-B11, decide if
these statements are True (T) or False (F).
1    (134) We need the passive voice.         TI
F
2    (B5) We need the past progressive to
express a fact about the past.   TIF
3    (B6) We need the simple past because
this is an action in the past. TIF
4    (B7) We need a comparative form using
-er.   TIF
5    (B8) This is the future in the past,
so we need to use would. TIF
6    (B9) We need the past simple to go
with since.           TIF
7    (BI O) We need a comparative form
using -cr.            TIF
8    (Bll) We need a verb in the plural
because cars is plural.        TIF

D
Read the six texts on page 56. Complete each of the following sentences with
a word or phrase from the text.
Text 1
Researchers  there are actually five tastes.
Text 2
You have to cook meat to
kill all the

Text 3
Being a head chef is a
real

F Choose the correct word or phrase to complete each sentence. Use the
words in bold to help you.
1
Since the start
of the 20th century, cars very popular.
A  became B have become C were becoming
2
Cars now
are muchthan they used to be.
A  quick B quicker C quickest
3
In 1900, Mr
Daimler said that in the future evervonea car.

A  drove B will drive C would drive
4
Driving fast near
schools more chance of an accident.
A  mean B means C is meaning
Section
4 Writing: first task
G  Look at the first task on page 62.
Imagine you are going to write an answer to Sheryl. Write notes to complete
this table. Remember that you don't have to tell the truth.

Do you ever argue with your parents about clothes?
How often?

Is it
  important to you to be fashionable? Why?
What sort
  of clothes do you like wearing? Why?

Should Sheryl wear what her parents tell her to? Why/ why not?
\That other advice do you have for Sheryl?

H

Decide if the following is a
good idea when you are writing an informal letter and circle either 'Do' or
'Don't'.
1
Put your address
in the top right corner.    Do 1 Don't
2
Start with Dear
Sir or
         Madam,.                                   Do 1 Don't
3
Use short forms
(I've, it's, etc) in your writing.     Do 1 Don't
4
Use a friendly
tone of voice. Do 1 Don't 5 Finish with Yours sincerely,. Do 1 Don't
6
Finish with Love, or Best wishes,. Do / Don't
7
Write your full
name at the end. Do 1 Don't
Section
5 Speaking: second task
I Look at the Student Card for Task 2
on page 63. Read this extract from a dialogue and find five mistakes. Underline
them and write the correct form above the line.

Shop assistant: Good morning. Can I
help you?
Student:
Good morning. Yes, I hope so. I'd like buy a computer game for my brother. What computer games you
have at the moment?
Shop assistant: Well, we've got one called

Fantasy
Island.
Student:
I see. My brother's nine years old. What Fantasy Island is like?
Shop assistant: It's an adventure game. You

have to solve easy
puzzles to find treasure.
Student: Oh,
right. He might like that.
And how much it is?
Shop assistant: It's £25.
Student: Oh. I only have £20.
What computer games other do you have?

Test 5

                                      Pa3aea        AYAMI)0BaHue

Bbl yc.Qb11uume 5
  6blCKC13b16CIHUÙ. Ycmauoaume coon16emcn16ue .ueycðy
  6b1CKa.3b1ßt1HUfLJtu Kaycðoeo 2060Pflt«eeo I — 5 u
  yrnaep.ycòehtumtu, ()aHHbLUU 6 cnucvce A — F. Mcno.1b3Yùme
  Ka.ycðyo õYK6Y, ymæp.ycòehllte, ntW1bKO
  oat"' pa.3. B Jar)ar-tuu ecntb oðrto atttU1tee
  ytneepyòe,'tue. Bbl yc-lbltuume aanucb ðeayòbl. 3anecume
  C60U omaembl B maãQ1d10'.

A.
Her job gives her
the chance to meet people.
B.
She thinks she
should be paid more for the work she does. C. Her job doesn't leave her with
much free time.
D.      She's thinking of trying to find a
completely different job.
E.       She doesn't have a good relationship
with the people she works with.
F.       She has to travel a lot for her job.

IòBopqLIÅMf1

1

                 2                   3                    4

5

YTBepxneHJ1e

Bbl
  ycalbltuume pa.3zoaop noauueùc»coeo co ceuðemeae.u npecmynaeHlffl.
  Onpeòeaume, Kcocue 11.3 npuaeòëHHbLt
  ymgepycòektuù Al-A6 coomeemcmeyom coòepycamuo merccma (I
  ), RC11CUe He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o         6 meKcme He cya.3CIHO, mo ec•mb
  Ha ocwoaanuu maccma HC'Ab3fl
c)amb Hil noaoycumeulb,qoeo,            omeema (3).
  C)õ6eòume HOMep 6blÕPCIHHOZO aa.M11 eapuawna omaema. Bbl
  ycvlblluume .3anucb Òga.ycÒb1.

        Al    The crime
took place at 4 pm.
                               l)
BepHO                2) HeBepH0               3) B •reKCTe He CKa3ŽlHO
        A2    The witness called the
police on her mobile.
                               1)
BepH0               2) HeBepHO                 3) B -reKc-re He cKagaH0
        A3     The witness tried to
stop the thief from escaping.
                                l)
BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKc-re He cKt13t1H0
        A4    The witness knew who
the thief was.
                              1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3)
B -reKcere He cKagaH0
        AS     The thief was carrying
a torch.
                                1)
BePHO                 2) HeBepH0                 3) B TC'KCTe He Ck•a3žlHO
        A6  The police
arrived a quarter of an hour after the crime was committed.
                               1)
BepHO               2) HeBepH0               3) B TeKCTe He CKt13aHO

Test 5 a

Bbl ycalbltuume
  6btCKa3b16t1H11$1 -woðeùl 6 ce.uu paaaut1Hbtx cumvtll!llfl-r.
  Omeemwne Ha eonpocbl no coòep,ycamno BblCR•a3b1ßCIHUÙ,
  Bblõpaa oò11H 113 npeòA0Yt'HHbtr Bapuawno,g omeema. B
A7-A13 oõaeðume Igucþpy I, 2 3, omeeng KOHIOPblÙ 6Œ'vt
  Kaycemcfl Hauõoaee Bbl yc.lblluume KaycÒoe
  6blCxa,3b16ú'HUC' Ò6aycÒbl.

    You will hear a man talking about
mobile phones. How does he feel about them?
1)   He thinks they are unnecessary.
2)   He thinks they are annoying.

A8

You will hear a man talking about a magazine. Why does he
  like it?
I) It often has interesting interviews.
2) It explains how to do things. 3)
  It comes with a free CD.
You will hear a woman talking about
  a wedding. What went wrong?
1)
  Some of the
  guests got lost.
2)
  Some guests
  didn't receive invitations.
3)
  Some people
  arrived who hadn't been invited.

AIO

You will hear a girl talking about learning to drive. How
  does she feel about it?
1)
  She is nervous
  about taking the driving test.
2)
  She has problems
  remembering where to go. 3) She finds some things very confusrng.

All

You will hear an advertisement for a new game. How do you
  win?
1)
  by answering
  questions correctly
2)
  by making other
  people laugh
3)
  by collecting
  the most cards

A12

You will
  hear a woman talking about her brother. What does she say about him?
1)
  He never comes
  to visit her.
2)
  He never
  listens to her.
3)
  He never
  invites her to stay.

A13

You will hear a woman talking about her local park. How
  does she feel about it?

3)   He thinks they cause accidents.
1)
She thinks it is
attractive.
2)
She thinks it is
untidy.
3)
She thinks it is
dangerous.

110 Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTn CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  teno omeembl Ita aac)aH11H BI, Al-A13 pacnoaaewomcfl 6 pa.3Hb1.r qacmqx
  t5J1aH}€a. BI pacnono.yceH0 6 HilYCHeÙ qacmu õ.nawca. flpu
  nepeHoce ome,emoe 6 aaòaH1411 BI õYK6bl aanucb16ŒomcH
  õea npoõeJ106 u .3HCIK06 npet111HüH1ffl.

                                         Pa3neJ1          LITeHne

ycmaH06ume
coomeemcmeue me-M A — G meR•cmaM 1 — 6. 3aHecume ceou omeembl 6
maõ.au«y. Mcnoabayùme Kaycðyo õYKßY mŒ1bKO
oðuH pa.3. B aaðaHuu oma me.ua JIUUIHSISI.

A. SIMPLE MEALS B. POPULAR COOKS
c. SAFE COOKING D. NEW DISCOVERY
E.      DIFFICULT JOB
F.       DELICIOUS
SNACKS G. CHANGING HABITS

Tesla

2

3

              4

6

I
2
3
4

We're
  all used to the lemons), salty (like salt, tongue react to a fifth sauce,
  mushrooms and One thing you have to with white meats like fork to test
  whether the careful when preparing is that we don't want killed when we cook
Running
  a busy restaurant businessman. With so chef has to make sure great food
  without can do it.
Walk into any
  bookshop cooking and for teaching from the very friendly

idea that there are simply four
tastes. Our food can be sweet (like sugar), sour (like of course) and bitter
(like olives). Now scientists have found that parts of the taste, which they
call 'umami'. Umami is quite a rich taste, found in red meat, soy hard cheese,
such as Parmesan. "lhe word •umami' comes from Japanese.
remember
is that meat can contain bacteria. You have to be particularly careful chicken
and pork, Make sure that you cook them properly. Use a metal skewer or a meat
is done or not. The juices from the meat should be clear. You should also be
food. Use separate chopping boards for meat and vegetables. The reason for this
any bacteria from the meat to find their way onto our vegetables. They might
not be the vegetables.
is a real challenge. A head chef has
to be part army officer, part artist and part many people working in a busy
kitchen, it's not easv to keep control and a head that everyone does their job
properly. At the same time, he or she has to create wasting ingredients. It
takes years of training to become a head chef and not everyone
or turn on your TV and you can't avoid
celebrity chefs. They are famous for the nation how to cook. They each have
their own style and their own fans, style of Jamie Oliver to the more formal
style of Delia Smith. However, they all have one thing in common: they are all
very good at communicating their enthusiasm for food and for

5
6

cooking.
The thought of cooking
  for friends at home makes most of us a little nervous. It needn't be such a
  nightmare, though. The secret is planning. If you keep your menu simple and
  stick to dishes you know well, your dinner party will be a success. Give your
  guests something that is easy to prepare and that doesn't mean you have to be
  in the kitchen all the time. That way, you can enjoy the occasion too!
Traditionally, eating was something
  that we all did together as families. In the past, most parents insisted that
  the whole family sat around the dining table at a certain time. All that has
  changed. These days, we're more likely to watch TV while we eat, or to eat at
  different times from the other members of our family. In a world where it's
  so easy to cook a microwave meal in seconds and both parents go out to work,
  it's very rare for families to share their news over a good meal.

Tlpoqumaùme
ymßepycòeHllH 1 — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILUU meyccmbl.
YcmaH06tune coomeemcmgue .ueycòy ymaepycòeHlfflM11 u
coðepycaHue,vt meccmoe. Hanutuume tgucþpy 1 — ecau
yn16epycðeHlŒ eepnoe, u tgutþpy O — ecau ymeepycòeHue
Iteaepnoe. .3cmecume ['6011 omeembl e maauucv.

I
2
3
  silent
4
  Stan for
5
  Stan both
6

Chaplin 's first performance teas in America.
Chaplin made the first full-length comedy film.
Chaplin
stopped making films in the late
1920„
Laurel
was famous appearing with Charlie Chaplin.
Laurel's
Parents appeared on stage.
Laurel and Hardy became
famous for acting together in the early 1920s.
Charlie
Chaplin was the greatest comedian of his generation, and probably of all time.
He was born in 1889 in England, where he first appeared on stage at the age of five. He travelled to
America in 1912 and stayed to work for the Kevstone Film Company. Films in
those days were silent, so actors had to find characters that could be
recognised immediately on the screen. Chaplin's great character was the little
tramp, who appeared in around 70 short films, as well as a number of
feature-length comedies. In fact, Chaplin was the first comedian to make a
full-length comedy, Tillie's Punctured Romance (1914).
Talking films began to appear in the late 1920s, but Chaplin continued to
make silent films until the mid 30s. He was unusual because he not only starred
in his films but also wrote, directed and produced them. He even wrote the
music for some of his later films. He will long be remembered for bringing
enjoyment to millions throughout the world.
Xhen Charlie
Chaplin went over to America, there was another comedian on the same boat —
Stan Laurel, who was to become famous as one half of Laurel and Hardy. Stan was
born in 1890. His mother was an actress, while his father managed a number of
theatres. His family moved around during his childhood and he spent some time
living with his grandparents. He learned a lot from watching the comedians who
performed at the theatres run by his father.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Stan first appeared in
a film with Oliver Hardy in 1921, but their fame as a double act didn't begin
until 1927. They starred together in dozens of films over the next 30 years
until Oliver's death in 1957. Even today, their films bring pleasure to young and
old alike.

Ilpoqumaùme macc:m u
6btn0JlHume ,3aÒaHllfl A14-A20, oõ60Òfl Igucþpy 1,
2, 3 unu 4, coomgemcmeyougyo HOJtepv 6blt5pctHHO?O (3Œ1tu eapuamna omaema.

quite as Lazlo had expected. He'd been in London for six
  months had almost disappeared. None of the galleries were interested

Things weren't working out now and all his early optimism in his paintings
and he was tired of carrying the same pictures from one buyer to the next. The
response was always the same: a shake of the head, some comment about portraits
not being fashionable these days and a suggestion to try somewhere else,
usually somewhere he had already tried. He was beginning to lose hope and was thinking
of going back home. It would be difficult, and he would have to face his
parents saying 'I told you so', but at least he could find a steady job.

He was sitting on a bench in a
park one day considering this when he noticed a newspaper beside him. He
glanced at it and the word 'artist' caught his eye. He picked the paper up and
read more closely. It was a job advertisement. An advertising company was
looking for a portrait artist to work on a new advertising campaign. Lazlo
ripped the advertisement out of the paper and started to look for a public
phone. 'I won't be able to choose my subjects,' Lazlo thought to himself, 'but
at least I'll be able to pay the rent, and that's a bit more important right
now.' He spotted a phone, put a few coins in and dialled. After a few moments,
a female voice answered. Lazlo explained who he was and that he was applying
for the job. They arranged for him to go to their office the next day with some
of his work. He went home excited and nervous.
That night,
he chose three paintings from the dozens in his flat that he thought showed
what he was capable of. He selected a self-portrait he had done a few years
before; he thought it showed a thoughtful side to his work. He also chose a
portrait of an old man that he had met in a café. It was simple but
clear, and Lazlo thought that maybe that was the style they would want for an
advertising campaign. The third one was a painting of his mother. It had always
seemed to him that that picture captured a lot of feeling that was difficult to
put into words. A lot of people thought it was the best portrait he had ever
done, and Lazlo knew that if anything was going to impress them, that painting
would.
The next morning, he woke early and got ready. He rolled the pictures up,
placed them in a large tube so that they wouldn't get damaged and set off
towards the bus stop. There was a lot of traffic, but he arrived on time. When
he got to the office, he saw that another four people were waiting, each with a
large tube of paintings just like his. The secretary asked him to take a seat.
Lazlo
sat and waited for his name to be called. He knew that a lot depended on the
next half an hour or so. With a job, he could begin to sort out his life, maybe
doing his art in his spare time. He knew he would never completely give up on
his dream, but he had also come to realise that he had to live in the real
world, and talent doesn't pay bills. Without a job, he wouldn't survive the
month; he had just about enough for the ticket home. The secretary picked up
the phone and had a short, quiet conversation. She turned to Lazlo. 'You can go
in now,' she said, smiling.

A14

When Lazlo first arrives
  in London, he I) immediately loses his job.
2)
  is confident of
  success.
3)
  doesn't expect
  to stay for six months.
4)
  knows that he
  will have to work hard.

A15

The people at the art galleries
  Lazlo visits I) are very impressed by his work.
2)
  often give him
  helpful advice.
3)
  ask him to come
  back with different paintings. 4) tell him that his work is old-fashioned.

A16

It seems that Lazlo's parents
I) disapprove of his choice of career.
2)
  forced Lazlo
  into becoming an artist.
3)
  will be happy
  to welcome him home.
4)
  can help him to
  achieve his ambitions.

Al 7

Lazlo thinks the job will
1)
  give him more
  artistic freedom.
2)
  provide him
  with a salary.
3)
  mean that he
  has to move house. 4) stop him from studying.

AIS

Lazlo chooses to take the portrait
  of his mother because 1) it was the third one he thought of.
2)
  it was used in
  an advertisement before.
3)
  the people at
  the company ask to see it. 4) it expresses emotion well.

A19

At the office, Lazlo realises that
1)
  his paintings
  are the same as everyone else's.
2)
  he isn't the
  only person interested in the job.
3)
  he should have
  chosen different paintings. 4) he has come at the wrong time.

A20

One of the things Lazlo's
  experience has taught him is that
I) he needs money to live.

2)
art is
more important than money.

Test
  5

3)
following your
dream is a waste of time. 4) he has no artistic talent.

ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, 'Imo omeembt Ha aaòaH11f1
  B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaapcuomcH 6 pae3Hb1X qacmnr ÕaaHKa. B2, B3
  pacnoao.yceHb1 6 HUYCHeÚ qacmu õaamca. [Ipu nepeHoce omaemoo

                         Pa3aeJ1          rpaMMaT1dKa
JleKC11Ka

Ilpoqumaùme mt'Kcm 3anov1H11me nponycxu 6
  npeðaoycenuzr noò HO-vtepauu B4-B11  cþop.$ta.ltll
  ca10ß, naneqamaHHb1.r aaua6Hb1.uu cnpaea om KaycÒoeo
  npeòaoycenua.

Test
  5

The Automobile

Cars are a common sight on roads today, but that wasn't
  always true.

B4

Back in the days before the car         , the only personal
  means of transport were the horse and the bicycle.

INVENT

The first cars their power from steam and gas, and had a maximum speed
  of around nine miles an hour.

GET

In Britain, there was a law     cars from going over two
  miles an hour in towns.
At the end of the nineteenth century, cars started to use
  petrol and

STOP

became much                             than
  they had been.

FAST

B8

Very few
  people at that time said that cars the world in the future.
That is exactly what has happened, though, and since then

CHANGE

B9

we                             close
  to eighteen million miles of roads on the Earth.

BUILD

BIO

Perhaps the     sign of
  the success of the car is the fact that there are over 800 million of them in
  the world.

BIG

Bll

However,
  having more cars on the road more pollution, and that's a major worry for
  many people.

MEAN

[Ipoqumaùme
npugeÒeHHblñ Hityce meKcm [Ipeoõpaayùme
calt)ßtl, HaneqamaHHb1e .3C1&1ClßHbLUll Õ_YK6a.Mll nocae
HOMePOß B12-B18 maK, qmoõbt OHU epa-u.uamuqecwu 11 nelCCUqeCKU
coomgemcmeogaau coòepycaH1110 maccma. 3anoaHume nponycK11
no./1VtWHHbLU11 caoea.uu. Kaycòblù nponycK coomaemcmeyem
omðea1bH0Jty      113 epynnbl 1312-1318.

Llpoqumaùme meRcm c nponycKŒuu, OÕ03HatWHHbLU11
HO.uepa.uu A21-Ä28. 3mu H0Mepa coomøemcme,yom .gar)anumt A21-A28, 6
KOHIOPbL'C npeðcmaeaeHbt 60.3MOYCHbte capuamnbl on16emot3.
Oõeeòume Ho-Mep 6blÕpaHHO?0 6Œuu 6apuamna omoema.

Advertisers and others Interested in the make-up of society
  occasionally use the term 'Generation to describe a certain section of the
  population. There is no strict definition for the term, but it A21  to those people born between 1964
  and 1981. This is the generation parents were born at the end of or A22  the Second World War.
In America and Europe, the 1960s was a decade of big dreams. People
  believed that they could change the world for the better and that global
  problems could be solved through understanding belief in peace. However,
  during the 1970s many people began to realise that things were much
  complicated than that. Children A23  up in the 70s and 80s saw that
  their ideals had failed. Divorce rates rose rapidly and many Generation Xers
  experienced the splitting their family. They blamed their parents for
  industrial, social and economic problems and had no of their own to rely on.
Of course,
  this image of a Generation Xer is a stereotype. Not all people born into that
  generation the same. However, it does seem possible to pick out a few
  characteristics that people born between those years might A24  One is a certain A25  to work. Generation Xers are
  likely to have spent some time doing a low-paid job, such as working in a
  food restaurant, and may have had a number of different jobs. They probably
  prefer to work on own from home or take a risk and A26  up their own business, rather than
  a large company.
They are
  more likely to A27  divorced, although they are also more likely to that they
  A28  marriage seriously. Generation Xers are likely to be
  cynical comes to politics. Generation X is
  also the generation that has seen technology become a big part their lives
  and they are likely to be quite comfortable with using computers and the
  Internet.

X'
usually whose
and a more parents' up of ideals
are

fast their work for
say it of
                       1) discusses             2)
refers                 3) mentions           4) means
                        1) during                 2) between            3)
while                 4) whenever
                       1) growing               2)
turning               3) bringing           4) getting
                       1) own                     2)
belong               3) share                 4) do
                       1) behaviour            2)
attitude              3) mood                4) impression
                       1) put                       2)
do                      3) make                 4) set
                       1) turn                    2)
come                 3) get                    4) go
                       1) have                     2)
take                    3) bring                 4) hold

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE
  3AbYAbTE 17EPEHECTn CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, timo omeembl Ha
  3aÒaH11f1 B4-B18 u B
PCI.3HbLr Ltacmqr
  õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb16 HltYCHeð1 qucmu ÕacžHKa.
  TIPI/ nepeHoce ont6em06 6     B4-B18 õYK6bt .3anucb16Œomcn
  õea npoõe.106 u ,3HZIK06 npen11HaH11f1.

J-l.aa omcemoe Ha aar)tlH1151 CT,
  C2 ucno.lb.3yñyne Fx7AHK OTBETOB .Nþ2.
Tlpu ßb1noanenuu
  aaòauuù CI u C2 ocoõoe OHIL',tanue oõpamume HO'
  mo, timo ($CIIUU omaembl õvðym moabK0 no aanucnu,
  CðeACIHHbLU e WIAHKE OTBETOB aanucu qepH061Œa He
  õvòvm yqunlbloanu.cn .9Kcnepmo.u.
aanutuume caoù omoem Ec„lll
  OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1     HeÒocmamotlH0, Bbl vuoyeme
  ucnoab306amb ()pveyo cmopouy õaamca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.
This is part
of a letter from Sheryl, your English pen friend.

Test

Write
100-140 words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many students go on school trips. Some people say they are interesting
and educational. Other people say that they are a waste of time and children
should learn in the classroom.
What can you say for and
against school trips? Use the following plan
Write 200-250 words.                                                I.
Introduction (State the problem).
2.
Arguments
"for".
3.
Arguments
"against".
4.
Conclusion.

Pa3aeJ1      1'0BopeHne

Bbl
  noayqume Kapmoqrcy, Ha ycomopoù npeòcmaeaeHbl mpu
  3CIÒaHt1f1  ycmH0?0 omaema:
C3 — me-Itamuqecvcoe  (3b1Cxa3b1ßanue,
C4 — ()11Œ10? c lge.Rb'0 oõ.ueHa
  cþcncmuqecyoú llHCþop.§tažgueÚ, C5 — c)uaaoz c
  lge.lb10
OIVHOLIHOÙ
  LIHCþopJta«ueù. ()K0Hqcmue 61.1/10JIHeHUf1 KaycÒO?0
  3aÒaH11f1 onpeòeanem .9Raa.ueHamop. Bo 6PeMfl
  npooeòeHllfl .ynoù qacmu .9R•aa.ueHa llòem nocmOHHHCIH
  aanucb Ha ayòuc»caccemy.

3aaaHH¶
STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on sport. Remember to say:
•      which sports are popular in your
country
•      which sport is your favourite to
watch, and why
•      who your favourite sportsmen/women
are
•      which sports you enjoy playing, and
why
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you
have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in a computer shop. You would like to buy a computer
game for your younger brother, who is nine years old. You can pay £20 only.
Before making
a decision, ask the shop assistant about:
•
computer games on
sale at the moment
•
what the games
are like  the cost

Test 5

3K3aMeHveMoro
The teacher
will play the part of the shop assistant and will speak first. Remember to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need
•
decide on the
computer game to buy
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You have a
friend called Peter and it is his birthday soon. You and another friend are
planning a surprise evening out for his birthdav. You can go:
•
to a fast food
restaurant  to a swimming pool
•
to a funfair
•
to watch a
football match
•
to a concert
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
 discuss all the options
•
take an active
part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons
•
find out your
friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement
O
Section 1
Listening: second task
A    Listen to these extracts from the
second task on page 66 and circle the
phrase
you hear.
1 £95 / £9.50 2 £7.50 £75
3
4       11 am / I l pm
5       14th
/ 4th
6
B     Listen again and match each extract
to a word or phrase.
6       LONGER HOLIDAYS
fun,
7       FOOD
INCLUDED meal,

D In pairs or as a group,
discuss the words and phrases you wrote down. If someone makes a sensible
suggestion that you haven't already got, add it to the list above.
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
first task

     1                                 a
  per night

     2                                 b
  per hour

       I (B4) Can we say:        .
  a parrot on him

     3                               c
  double room

         shoulder'?                                       yes
  I no

     4                                d
  floor

2 (B5) What tense is 'doesn't he'?

     5                                e
  breakfast

present simple I past simple

     6                                 f
  single room

3 (B6) Which tense often comes before 'for'
+ a period of time?
present simple I present perfect

Section 2 Reading: first task

4 (B7) Which tense do we need here?

C Look at these headings for
  different

present simple generally) I

texts. For each heading, write two or

present
  progressive at the moment)

three words and phrases that you
  would text.

5 (B8) Is 'carry' the main verb of the

E Read the first task on page 72 and
answer these questions for each item B4-B11.

expect
to appear in the
1     LIGHTER
SUITCASES
bays,
2     BUYING
TICKETS money,
3     FAST-MOVING TRANSPORT
    sentence?                                        yes
I no
6
(139) Can we say:
'steal them bags and
    money .                                          yes
I no
7
(BIO) What do we
need here?

active voice I
passive voice
8 (BII) Which tense often
comes before 'in

journey, recent
years'?
4     TRANSPORT
CHOICES
past simple I present perfect bus,
5     AEROPLANE EXERCISES
flight,

Section 4 Writing: second task

3

Animals should have the right to
  live where they want.

F Look at the second task on page
  74.

4

It's cruel to take an animal off
  the streets

Decide if the following is a point for (F) or against (A)
  allowing stray animals to

and then possibly put it down.

live on the streets. Write F or A on the

5

There are lots of people who would
  be

line provided.

glad to give a stray animal a home.

1 Stray dogs sometimes bite people.

6

People's pets might be taken by
  mistake and that could be a tragedy.

2 Cats and dogs can receive medical

treatment if they are taken    G
Discuss which of the statements above off the streets.
you agree or disagree with. Explain why.
Section 5 Speaking: third task
H Look at the Student Card for Task 3
on page 75 and make notes to complete the information.

PET

reasons for choosing this pet

reasons for not choosing this pet

cat

cats are
  veyy warm andfriendly

dog
hamster
rabbit

goldfish

O

                                      Pa3neJ1        AYAH1)0BaHne

Bbl
ycabltuume 5 6blCKa.3bl(3CIHUÙ. YcmaH06ume coomoemcnwue .ueycðy
6b1CKa3bldClHU$LUU Kayòoeo eoaopnugeeo I — 5 u ymaepycðeuunuu,
()CIHHbLUU 6 cnucxe A — F. Mcnoabayùme lc•aycðyo t5YK6Y,
oõoauattapougy,'0 .vmaepycðeuue, oðu,'t paa. B aaòauuu
ecntb oðuo auzunee ymaep.w•ðenue. Bbl ycablluume aanucb
c)oa.wòbl. .3aHecume ('601/ on16en1b1 6 matîautgy.

A. She would
like to get less homework. B. She enjoys taking tests.
C. She has
recently moved to a new school. D. She thinks some lessons are too long. E.
She's had several tests today at school. F. She wants to be a teacher.

                          1

2

3

4

5

Y'1'Bepx;teH11e

Bbl yc.,Qb1tuume paaeoeop
  aòuuuucmpamopa c npuõbldtueù 6 omealb eocmbeù.
  Onpeòeaume, KCIKUC' 11.3 npugeòëHHbtr
  ymaepycòeH11ù Al-A6 coon16emcmeyom coòepyamuo mexcma (I
  KCIK11e He coomeemcmayom (2) u o         6 meKt•me He cyaaauo, mo ecmb Ha
  OCH06aH11U meKcma neat..3f1 ()amb HI/ noaoycumeAbHO?O, Hll omputgameab,qopo
  omaema (3). Oõaeòume H0.uep aa.$fll aapuawna
  omeema. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb ()eayðbl.

          Al     Mrs Torino's husband
is on business abroad.
                                 I)
BepHO                  2) HeBepH0                  3) B "reK'CTe He
Ck'a3ŽiHO
         A2    Mrs Torino can have a
single room for the three nights.
                                 I)
BepH0               2) HeBepHO                3) B rreKc-re He
CKagaHO
         A3    A double room is
£20 more expensive per night than a single room.
                                I)
BepHO                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKc•re He cK'd3'dH0
         A4    Mrs Torino will move
into her new room tomorrow evening.
                                 I)
BepH0               2) HCBepHO               3) B •reKCTe He CKti3aH0
         A5    Mrs Torino is
expecting an e-mail from her husband.
                                1)
BepH0             2) HeBepH0           3) B TeKCTe He CK'd3ttHO
         A6    Mrs Torino decides to
go to an Internet café instead.
                                 I)
BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKa3tiHO
66
Test
6

Bbl
yc:lbltuume paaeoaop peyuccepa c epynnoú cm-mep06. B  .4 7-A13
oõ6eòume I'lltþpy 1, 2 ILQII 3, coomeemcmgyoucyo
6b1ÕPCIHHOMY ea.M11 eapuawny omeema. Bbl ycabltuume KG'YÒoe
6b1CKa.3b1ßUH1te ðaaycÒb1.

A7       The director says they are
going to
I) decide what part each
actor will play.
2)   hand out the scripts.
3)   read through the play.
A8          There will be
I) regular rehearsals at the weekend.
2) rehearsals
on one weekend only. 3) no rehearsals at the weekend.
A9     The director will call or e-mail actors to tell them I) they are
not needed for rehearsals.
2)
which actor is in
which scene.
3)   what time each rehearsal starts.
9810    The director hopes rehearsals
will finish
l) before 10 pm.
2)
after 10 pm.
3)   at 10.30 pm.
Before making or buying a costume, the director wants the actors to
l) talk to the costume designer. 2) decide exactly what they
want. 3) discuss their ideas with her.
!A12    The director encourages the
actors to
1)  spend their own money on buying a
costume.
2)
stay within the
budget that he has given them. 3) find a way to increase the small budget.
IA13
Brian, the actor, says that
I) the
actors should share their budgets.
2) all the
actors should make their own costumes. 3) none of the costumes will cost anything.

110                                                      Bl
  u Al-A13 HE 34bYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM
OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB
ObPATMTE BHMMAIIME,
  teno omaembl Ha aac)aH1ffi BI, Al-A13 pacnonaecuomcn pa.3HbLr qacm.nr
  ãaamca. BI pacnoaoyceno 6 Hil.YCHeÙ qacmu tîaawca. Tlpu
  nepeHoce 0/11601106 6 3CIÒaHUU
BI
  õYK6bl aanucblowomcfl õea npoõeaoe u 3,qaK06

67

                                           Pa3neJ1        Llrrerme

   Ycmtmoaume
  coomaemc:moue         A — G mcwcma.u I — 6. 3auecume
Mcn0J1b3.vùme
  RZ1.ycÒV/0 õYRßV mŒ1bK0 oòun paa. B
  .3aÒanuu oÒna me.ua

omeembl (3
  maõau«y.

A.
LIGHTER SUITCASES
B.
BUYING TICKETS
C.
FAST-MOVING TRANSPORT
D.
TRANSPORT CHOICES
E.
AEROPLANE EXERCISES
F.
LONGER HOLIDAYS G. FOOD INCLUDED

I Package holidays, which include flights and hotel
accommodation in the same booking, have been popular for several decades.
Recently, however, a new type of package holiday has been introduced: the
'all-inclusive' package. Manv holidavmakers, particularly those with families
or those on a limited budget, are attracted bv all-inclusive holidays. This is
because all meals, drinks and snacks such as ice creams, as well as flights and
accommodation, are included in the price.
2      The
Isles of Scilly, off the south-west coast of Cornwall in the UK, are a popular
tourist destination. Many of the visitors to the islands arrive in their own
boats, either from Cornwall or from the north coast of France. Those without a
boat have a range of options for getting there. There are daily flights from
Plymouth and Newquay airports, and a helicopter flies several times a day from
Penzance. The ferry Scillonian 111 is also based in Penzance, sailing to the
islands once a day, and twice on Sundays.
3      If
you're going on a trip and are unsure what and how much to pack, follow this
simple rule. Get everything that you could possibly want to take with you
ready. Then, when you've made a big pile, put half of it back. Be strict with
yourselfl People always take too much with them when they travel — clothes they
won't wear, toiletries they won't use. Carrying heavy bags is never fun, so
don't take too much with you!
4      Bicycles
are not just used for recreation. In Britain, thousands of postmen and women
deliver the mail each dav bv bike as it's much quicker than walking. In towns
and cities with traffic problems, such as Los Angeles in the USA, a bike is
often the quickest way for a police officer to move around. In India, bicycles
are often used to deliver lunch to shop and office workers. At large airports
in Germany, it's quite common to see airport workers riding around on bikes.
5      On
long flights, it's important not to sit still for too long, as this can be bad
for your health. A good exercise for your hands is to squeeze a tennis ball — or
even a pair of socks if you haven't got a tennis ball — ten or fifteen times.
For vour feet, take your shoes off and put your feet on the floor. Raise your
toes as high as possible and hold them there for about five seconds. Repeat the
exercise until your toes get tired.
6      Not
long ago, if you wanted to book a plane ticket or a package holiday, you had no
choice — you had to go to a travel agent's. The Internet has changed that,
however, and now flights and trips can be booked in the comfort of your own home.
It's often cheaper, quicker and more convenient to book tickets online, but you
do need a credit card. If you want to pay by cash or cheque, you still have to
make that visit to the high street.

rrewra
TeMa

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test 6

Ilpoqumaúme ymaepycòeH11f1 1 — 6 u
  caeòyougue aa HUMU moccmbl. Ycmt1H0611me
Mt'9/còy
  .vmeepyòenumtll u coòep.ycauue„u mewmoo. Hanutuume
  Illitþpy 1 — ecuttl .vnlßepycòeuue eepuoe, u «ucþpy
  O — ecau .vmeepycðeuue Heeepnoe. 3auecume ce,ou  matluugy.

1
  The hamburger got its name from one of its ingredients.
2
  Roast pork sandwiches were eaten in Hamburg for the first time
  a hundred years ago.
3
  Charlie Nagreen changed the shape of the meatballs to make them
  more popular.
4     know why Charlie Nagreen decided to call them
  'hamburgers'.
5
  Many people believe that eating sushi means eating raw fish.
6
  Modern-day sushi was introduced approximately two hundred years
  ago.

Hamburgers are one of the most
popular kinds of fast food in the world todav. The name, however, can be
misleading, as the burger in a hamburger is not made of ham. It is beef.
Although the
name 'hamburger' almost certainly comes from the town Hamburg in Germany, the
history of the hamburger is unclear.
There was a popular dish in Hamburg several hundred years ago
which was basically a roast pork sandwich. It is possible that, in time, that
became the hamburger as we know it today.
However, the town of Seymour in Wisconsin in the USA is just one of several other places that claim
to have created the     hamburger. Their story goes back to 1885, when a man called Charlie Nagreen tried to sell
meatballs at a county fair. They weren't popular, though, as customers had
difficulty eating them while walking. Nagreen came up with the idea of
flattening out the meatballs and putting them in a bread roll.
He called this
meat sandwich a 'hamburger'. Why he chose that name is unclear, and it seems
likely that he was not actually the first to use it.
Many large towns and cities in Europe and the USA have at
least one sushi restaurant, but what exactly is sushi? A widelyheld belief is
that it is a type of Japanese cuisine that involves raw fish. Certainly, if you
go to a sushi restaurant, you are likely to eat some raw fish.
In fact,
however, sushi is a number of different dishes all made with a certain type of rice.
The rice has a topping or filling with it which may be raw fish, but could also
be cooked fish, vegetables or egg.
Food similar to
sushi has been eaten in Japan for centuries, but sushi as it's eaten today was
developed bv Hanaya Yohei in Tokyo, Japan in the early 1800s. It was designed
to be a type of fast food that could be eaten at the theatre or in the street.

1

2

3

4

5

6

69

Test
6

Tlpoqumaùme
moccm u 61.1/10-uume ,3aòaH11f1 A14-Ä20,         Igucþpy 1,
2, 3 ILIU 4, coonwemcnl(ñ'lotqyo no.vtepy 6blÕPCIHHO?O aa-UU
gapuanma omeema.

Sean had never felt so
  nervous before in his life. Sitting alone outside the closed door, he
  suddenly realised he was physically shaking, 'This is ridiculous,' he thought
  to himself. 'Pull yourself together. You've got to stay calm.'
This was easier said than done, and when a middle-aged woman
  in a smart business suit opened the door and asked, 'Sean Perkins?', there
  was a definite tremor of fear and weakness in his voice as he answered that
  that was indeed him. 'Hello, I'm Katie Sutherland. Do come in.'
Sean was invited into a comfortable
  and spacious office. The walk from the door to the chair he was to sit on
  seemed to last a lifetime, and Sean was terrified with each step that he'd
  suddenly trip or stumble. How could something so simple as walking and sitting
  down be so difficult?
As the interview progressed,
  however, Sean slowly began to relax. If he'd had time to think about it, he
  would have realised he was answering the questions put to him quite well. He
  was giving clear, full answers without saying too much or anvthing
  irrelevant. Then came a question which, at first, he was uncertain how to
  answer.
'So, tell
  me, why do you want to leave your current job?'
Sean hesitated. Should he
  tell her the truth? This was, of course, that he didn't feel respected. His
  boss, Mr Dominguez, took him for granted, overworked him, was often rude,
  patronising and unpleasant and made him dread going in to work each morning.
  Sean decided a more positive response was called for.
'Well,' he said, 'I've been with
  Brookes Brothers for over four years now, and although I've learned a lot
  there, and I'm very grateful for the opportunities they've given me, I think
  it's time for some new challenges, and this seems the ideal company to provide
  them. From what I've seen, Fisher & Fisher is an extremely dynamic
  company, and I'd like to be a part of that. I really think I could help
  contribute to the company's future success.'
Sean was pleased with his answer and knew he'd been right not to
  criticise his current employer. From Katie Sutherland's expression, it seemed
  she was satisfied with his answer too. Her next question prompted Sean to
  smile. 'What would you say were your biggest weaknesses, Sean?'
He'd thought he might be asked this,
  and so had already rehearsed an answer. He didn't want it to sound rehearsed,
  though, so he purposefully hesitated slightly before answering. 'That's a
  tricky question, isn't it?' he said. 'In fact, I think we both know it's a
  bit of a trick question too, because if I give a list of serious weaknesses,
  you won't think I'm suitable for the job, and if I say I haven't got any,
  you'll think I'm arrogant and over-confident. So, in answer to your question,
  I'd have to say that one of my biggest weaknesses is not bemg able to talk
  about mvself in too negative a light, even when I know I'm not perfect. For
  any other weaknesses I've got, you might be better off asking my current
  employer, Mr Dominguez.'
His answer was a risk, but he knew
  that if he said it in a fairly light-hearted manner, he could probably get
  awav with it. From Katie's response, it was clear that he had. 'Yes,' she
  said, 'it is a bit of a silly question, isn't it? You'd be amazed what some
  people say when I ask it, though.

It can tell
me a lot. I'm glad you didn't fall into that trap.'
This was the first clearly positive comment that Katie had made on his
interview so far, and filled Sean both with joy and hope. Perhaps he really was
in with a chance of getting this job. Perhaps he would be able to put Mr
Dominguez and Brookes Brothers behind him once and for all.

Test 6

A14    Waiting outside for the
interview, Sean realises that
1)   his shaking must look totally
ridiculous.
2)   staying calm is not difficult to do.
3)   he has to take control of his
emotions.
4) it's the first time he's ever been
nervous.
When Sean enters the office, he
1)
wishes the chair
he has to sit on is nearer the door.
2)
takes too long to
walk from the door to the chair.
3)
almost trips over
the chair he is supposed to sit on.
4)
tries to get to
the chair without doing anything foolish.
316 The answers Sean gives to the questions he is asked
l) do not contain unnecessary information.
2)   show he knows he is doing quite well.
3)   are a little longer than they should
be. 4) show he is often unsure what to say.
'317    Sean feels that the question
about why he wants to leave his current job
1)   deserves a totally truthful answer.
2)   should not be answered in a negative
way.
3)   was not asked in a respectful way.
4)   is an impossible question to answer.
'318    Sean's answer to the question
about why he wants to leave his current job implies that
I) he is not at all happy with the way he is treated
at Brookes Brothers.
2)
Fisher &
Fisher will be more successful in the future than Brookes Brothers.
3)
both he and
Fisher & Fisher could benefit from him joining the company.
4)
the work at
Fisher & Fisher will be much more difficult than his current work.
Á19    Sean is careful to hide
from Katie Sutherland the fact that he
l) has
practised giving an answer. 2) has a lot of serious weaknesses.
3) thinks he
doesn't have any weaknesses. 4) knows she is trying to trick him.
320 Katie suggests that she asks the 'silly question' because
l) she's always amazed by the answers she gets. 2) she wants the people answering to
feel trapped.
3)  people usually give long answers to
that question.
4)  the answers people give can reveal
things about them.

no OKOHqaHUU B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM
  CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Ha
  B2, B3 u A14-A20 paaHbLr uacmax tî1ClH}ca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHbl 6
  Hil.YHeñ qacmu t;aamca. nepenoce onwemoe 6 aaòammx B2, B3
  õYK6b1 aanucblßcuomcn õea npoõeaoe u 3+-1'1R06
  npe/lll}fflHllH.

                        Pa3neJ1
         rpaMMaTMKa neKCUKa

Ilpoqumaùme meKcm 3ano.QHume
  nponycwu 6 npeòaoyceH11fLr not) H0.uepŒuu B4-B11
  coon16emcn16Yh01UIlJtu caog, HaneqamaHHbLx .ga¿qaBHb1Jt1d
  ÕYKßŒM11 c:npa6a om KaycÒozo

Pirates

B6
B7
B8
BIO
Bil

of a
He
Most In
Using guns, They money, What Police there

When you think of a pirate,
what do you think of? Most people think man with a beard, a patch over one eye
and a parrot on shoulder.      HE often         a wooden leg, too, doesn't he? HAVE
people also think that pirates for hundreds of years. NOT EXIST fact, there are
still many pirates on the seas, although they the same kinds of clothes that
they used to.      NOT WEAR speedboats rather than sailing ships, and often          CARRY
pirates today still attack ships.
frighten the people on the ship and steal           bags and          THEY
often also taking the contents of the ship to sell.
pirates do  'piracy' and it is, of course, a
serious crime, CALL officers to catch a lot of pirates in recent years, but
MANAGE are still many more out there.

Ilpoqumaùme npueeòeHHb11i
  HilYce moccm [Ipeoõpaayúme caoaa, HuneqamuHHbte ÕVKßŒUU
  nocae HO-uepoe B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHU ppa-u»tamutteocu u JWKc•uqeCKU
  coon16emcn1606Œau coòepycamuo meKcma. 3ano,1H1tme nponycK11
  110.,1VtWHHb1.MU CJIOBŒMU. Kaycðblù nponycK coomeemcmevem omòeJ1bHtL$ty
  aaòamuo 11.3 epvnnbl B12-B18.

Ilpoqumaùme mt'R•cm c nponycwa,$tll,
OÕO.3HaqeHHbtatt1 no.uepaatll A21-A28. 3mu H0Mepa coomaemcmawom
3aòaH11f1*t A21-A28, 6 Romopbtr npeòcma6aeHbl ß03JtOYHble
aaputlHn1bl omeemoe. Oõeeðume H0.uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?O ea.uu
eapuamna omeema.

Some card tricks, the magician, can card trick that
  put the rest of the
A23 be a good idea to Ask the person must
  pick up the pack. Don't shuffle this, however. row, etc. XXhen card is in now. with their
  card in exactly the same final time, hold turn over the cards following phrase:
over the first card, you turn it over.

particularly ones which are based on
maths rather than any real skill on the part of be extremely impressive without
A21 a lot of practice. Here's a anyone can do. Take a normal pack of cards. Lav
out three columns of seven cards and pack to one A22 . You won't be using it
for this trick. Now, ask a of the audience to pick one card without telling you
which one it is. It might turn your back so they can show the card to everyone
else.
which column the card is in. Whichever column thev A24to, you cards column
by column so that the column with their card in is in the middle of the the cards, but deal them out again
into three columns. Be very careful how you do deal them column by column. Deal
the first row of each column, then the second have the three columns laid out, ask
the person to tell you which column their
Once again, A25  sure, when you pick the cards up,
that the column is the middle column you pick up. Go through the procedure one
more time in
A26 . Then, when you have picked up the cards for the third and pack so
that the backs of the cards are A27 upwards. Slowly one by one. For each of the
first ten cards you turn over, say one letter of the
                              'This
is your ...'. So, A28                             example, you'll say 'T' when
you turn

Test

6

z

'H' when you turn over the second, and so on. For the eleventh card, say
'card!' as It will be the card they picked!
A21                 1) requesting          2) requiring          3)
acquiring        4) inquiring
A22                  I) side                     2) edge                  3)
boundary        4) border
A23                  l) being                   2) character          3)
person             4) member
A24 1) show 2) direct 3) point 4) demonstrate A25 I) let 2) do 3)
make 4) take
A26                 I) way                     2) route                 3)
method           4) system
A27                  1) heading                2)
regarding           3) looking             4) facing
A28                  1) with                     2)
for                      3) by                     4) as

no       B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYUbTE
  TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB    !
ObPAT11TE BHMMAHME.   HO       B4-B18 u A21-A28         pa.3Hb1wr
  qacmnx tîaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHb1 HUNCHC'Ú qacmu t5J1(lHKa.
  [Ipu nepeHoce omøemoa 6 aaðaH11+Lr 134-1318 ÕVRdb1
  aculldCb16cuomCH õe.3 npoõe:106 u 3HUK06 npenu+ta}lllfl.

73
                                                  Pa3ne.T1
        IIWCbMO

                Ha
                   Cl, C2 WIA1-1K OTBETOB
TIPI/ Bbl'10.ueHUU aaÒaHllñ CI u C2 ocoõoe
  BHU.MCIHIW oõpamume Ha mo, Limo gatuu omeenlbt õyòym
  01ßH116an1bc•n moatbRO no aanucxu, CÒeJICIHHb1.u 8 FAAHKE
  OTBETOB .NE2. 1-111RŒcue aanucu qePH0611KCl He õyòvm
  yqumb16arnbc•a .9Kcnepmo.M.
TIPII
  aan0AHeH1i11 WIAHKA OTBETOB .Nþ2 yçaycume ('Haqaaa H0.uep
  saòaH11H CI, C2 .3ameM aanuuuune C60ú omaem Ecau
  OÒHOÙ Cmt)POHbl aaamca HeòocmamoqH0, Bbl Moyceme
  ucno.u.aoeamb ()pyeyo cmopony ÕaaHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.

Test 6

This is part of a letter
from Maxine, your English pen friend.

Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have 40 minutes to do
this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Some people believe that animals without owners should have the right to
live on the streets in cities.
Others say that they could be dangerous and should be collected and found
new homes, or even put down.
Do you think that
stray animals should be        Use the following plan allowed to live on the streets?    I.
Introduction (State the problem).
         Write 200-250 words.                                                   2.
Express your opinion and give reasons for it.
3.  Give other people's arguments and
explain why they are wrong.
4.  Conclusion.
                                 Pa3aeJ1
       roBopeHne

Bbl
  noayqume Kapmowy, Ha KomopoÙ npeòcma6aeHbl mpu aaðaHllfl          ycnmozo
  omeema: C3 — me,uamuqeocoe MOHOJlO?ULteCKOe 6blCKa.3btŒ3aHlže,
C4 —
  C)IICIJIO? c tge.1b'0 ot5.ueHa tþŒcmuqecK01ž
  uncþop.uagueú, C5 — c)uaaoe c lgeJlbR) oõJteHa
OlßHOtlHOÙ 1Œcþop.uauueÙ.
  OKOHqaH1te BblnO,1HeHllH KayÒ020 aaðaHllfl 3K.3ŒueHamop. Bo ape-un
  npoeeðeH11fi 9moú qacmu .9Kaa.uena llòem
  nocm0HHHí1fi .3anucb Ha avðuoycaccemy.

saaaHV1fl
STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on your favourite film.
Remember
to say:
• what
kind of film it is
• who stars in it
•     what happens in the film
•     why you like it
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in a
café. You want a hot chicken dish for lunch. You don't want to spend
more than £3.50.
Before making a decision,
ask the waiter/ waitress about:
•     chicken dishes available
•     whether they are hot
•     the cost

Test 6

The teacher will play the
part of of the waiter}waitress and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•     be active and polite
•     get all the information you need
•     decide on what to order for lunch
3K3aMe1--1VeMOro
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
Your parents
have said you can have a pet. You and your brother sister are discussing which
pet to get. You can have a:
•     cat
•     dog
• hamster • rabbit
•
goldfish
The teacher
will play the part of your brother/sister.
Remember
to:

75

•
discuss all the
options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons find out your brother's/sister's
attitudes and take them into account  invite your brother sister to come
up with suggestions  come to an agreement
Section
1 Listening: third task
A Look at the task on page 79. Match
each of the following statements to one of the situations described in
questions A7A13.
I I won't give it away, but the characters aren't what they
seem.
2
1 was driving
along and suddenly the car started making a funnv noise ... A
3
And the road
signs just here aren't very
clear, so that's how it happened. A
4
1'm very
disappointed with you, young man.
5
It's a good way
to get children involved in the news, I think.
6
1 saw it in a
magazine and it looked gorgeous!
7
Well, I was
furious because it's not the first time she's done it.
Section 2 Reading: second task
B
Quickly read the
texts in the task on page 81 and match the books to the authors. There is one
author you don't need to use.
1     My Trip and Other Mistakes
2     Squaring the Ii•iangle
3     Not One Before Another
4     Introducing Myself
5     Shooting Animals
6     Past Lives: The Book 7 Fishing
Essentials

a Carol Masterton b Karen Wilde
c Henry Bannerman d Greg King e William Shakespeare f Nick McDonald g Vivian
Norris h Ian Clarke
C
Find words or
phrases in the texts to match these definitions.
1     travel with someone
2     useful
3     rejects something because it is not
correct
4     possible explanations
5     newest
6     easy to like 7 make better
8
people who like
something
9
starting to do
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: first task
D
Quickly read the
first text on page 84. Decide if these statements are True (T)or False (F).

I

Charlie's mum believes him when

he savs there are aliens outside.

TIF

2

She says that she wants to see his

homework.

TIF

3

Charlie's father thinks Charlie is

lying about the aliens.

TIF

4

Charlie and his father go outside

and see aliens in the garden.

TIF

5 There are aliens in the living room when Charlie and his
father return. TI F

E
Complete
the table.

present
  simple

present progressive

past simple

past
  progressive

present
  perfect simple

past
  perfect simple

present participle

fly hear begin
sit

flying

wasr,vere

hashave

flying

Section
4 Writing: second task
F      Look
at the second task on page 86. Read the following paragraph and answer the
question.

G
Complete
the table using the phrases in the box.
Consequently
• Despite this • Even given that • In consequence • In spite of this In summary
• That may be true, but To conclude • To sum up

Phrases
  like 'In conclusion'

Phrases like 'However'

Phrases
  like 'As a result'

Section
5 Speaking: first task
H Complete the notes. Use the words and
phrases in the box to help you.
 thriller
• romance • children's book biography • adventure • plot • ending •
hero/heroine

What's
  your favourite book?

What
  kind of book is it?

Who
  are the main characters in it?

What
  happens in the book?

Why
  do you like it?

                                       Pa3neJ1        Aynnp0BaHÞ1e

Bbl ycabuuume 5
  6b1CKC13b16CIHUÚ. YcmaH0611žne coomeemcmeue .ueyòy
  6blCKU3b16aHUfLUU eoeopmgeeo 1 — 5 u _vmaepycòeHt1*1.uu, C)aHHbL8tU 6
  cnuc,tce A — F. Mcno-lb3Yùme Kaycòyo t5YK6V,
  oõoa,qaqcvoucvwž ymeep.ycðeuue, ma,1bK0 omm paa. B
  aaÒa,quu ecmb oðuo auuutee ymeepycðertue. Bbl ycalbtzuume
  .3anucb ÒgaycÒbt. 3aHecume c6011 omeenlbt 6 maõat110'.

A.
His character has
changed since he was a child.

Test T

B.
He is moving to
the place where he spent his childhood. C. His family moved around a lot when
he was a child. D. He spent a lot of his childhood with his grandparents. E.
The place where he grew up is now completely different. F. He wanted to live somewhere else
when he was a child.

roBopH11V11i

1

2

3

4

5

YTBep>KneH11e

Bbl ycalbltuume pa,32060p
ÒOMOX03HÚKU c KOJLHU60H.yePOM. Onpeòeaume, KCIKUe ua
npueeÒëHHb1X
.vmcepYòeHt1ù
Al-A6 coomaemcmøyom coòepycamuo muccma (I ),       He
coomeemcmay,rom (2) u O  6 meKcme He cycaaano, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU mewcma
Heelb.3fi c)anlb Hil nonoycumevtbH020, Hil omputgameabktoeo omgema (3).
()õ6eòume 1-10,uep 6b1ÓpaH11020 ga•tll eapuamna omeema.
Bbl ycJ1blžuume .3anucb ÒeaYCÒbl.

           Al     The woman mistakes
the salesman for someone else.
1)
BepHO           2)
HeBePHO          3) B TeKCTe He CKagaHO
          A2    The salesman wants
the woman to buy a vacuum cleaner.
                                   l) BepH0              2)
HeBepH0           3) B -reKCTe He CKa3ŽlHO
          A3    The woman enjoys
doing housework.
                                   1)
BepH0               2) HeBepHO               3) B -reKc•re He CKt13aHO
          A4    The most expensive
product costs £30.
                                   l)
BepHO               2) HeBepHO               3) B TeKCTe He CKa3ŽiHO
A5 The salesman offers to show the woman how to use a product. I) BepH0
2) HeBepH0 3) B •re•KCTe He cK',B'dH0
          A6     The woman buys the
salesman's cheapest product.
                                   l) BepH0              2)
HeBepH0              3) B                He CKagaH0

Bbl yc.lblluume
  6b1CKa3þ1ßCIHUf1 Ji10òeù 6 ce.uu pa.Mut1HbLV
  cumya«uax. Omaemwne Ha aonpocbl no coðepyaH11+0 6b1CKa3b16CIHUÚ,
  6b1Õpat3 oð11H 11.3 npeòaoyceHHbLV eapuamnoa omeema. B
A7-A13 oõgeÒume 1114tþpy 1, 2 uau 3,
  oõo.3HaqaŒot«yo omae,'ï4 Komopblñ Kaycemcfl
  Hautîoaee gePHbLM. Bbl yc.lbltuume KUYÒOe 6blCKU3b1BCIH1že
  Ò6ClYÒbl.

You will hear a woman telling her son off. What has he done wrong?
1)   He didn't tell her he was going to be
late.
2)
He went out
without her permission.
3)   He forgot to buy something on his
way.
You
will hear a man describing a film. What did he like about it?
I) the
ending 2) the characters
3) the
action
BA9 You
will hear a girl talking to a hairdresser. What style does the girl want?
l)
shoulder-length, and all one colour 2) long, with a pink fringe
3) short,
with some lighter parts
'AIO   You will hear a man talking
about a recent experience. How did he feel?
I) annoyed
2) helpless
3) frightened
LAI 1 You will hear a girl talking
about her sister. Why was the girl angry?
1)  Her sister asked her for money to go
out.
2)  Her sister came into her room without
permission. 3) She wasn't invited to go out with her sister.
'A12  You will hear a man talking to
a policeman. What is the man's excuse?
I) He
didn't know it was a one-way street.
2)   He was in a hurry to get somewhere.
3)   He hasn't been driving long,
A13    You will hear a boy talking about a TV programme he saw. What does
he say about it?
I) It lets children
choose what news stories appear.
2)   It is a news programme presented by
children.
3)   It interviews children around the
country about their lives.

no Bl Il Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHHE,    Ha        m, Al-A13 qacmftx
  ÕaaHKa. BI pacnoao.yceH0 6 HU.YCHeÙ qacmu t5aawca. [Ipu
  nepeHoce om6en106 6 aaÒŒuu BI õYKßb1 ganucblgcuomc•n
  õea npoõeaoe u 3HClK06 npen11HaH1ifl.

79
                                            Pa3aeJ1        LIrreHne

YcmaH0B1tme
  coomøemcmaue me,vt A — G meKt•ma.M 1 — 6. 3cmecume CßOU omeentbt
  6 maõau«y. Ucnoalbayùme KC1.ycÒyo õycay
  mœ1bR0 oòun paa. B aaòanuu oòna me.ua

A.
UNEXPLAINED EVENTS
B.
SPACE TOURISTS
c. DISTANT WORLD
D.
ANCIENT SCIENCE
E.
FAILED HOPES
F.
SPECTACULAR SIGHT
G.
SERIOUS RISKS
1

When Neil Armstrong first set foot on the Moon in July 1969, many people around
the world thought that it was the beginning of mankind's journey to the stars.
They expected to see people living on the Moon in special bases. However, it
wasn't to be. Getting to the Moon was expensive and of limited scientific
value. Those who were expecting a golden age Of space exploration were
disappointed.
2
Astronauts face many dangers in space. The take-off and landing
are dangerous, and there's always a chance that a meteor is going to hit your
spacecraft. Other threats come from something you can't see: radiation. X-rays
and other forms of radiation can cause health problems for astronauts above the
protection of Earth's atmosphere.
3
For the first time, it's possible to buy yourself a ticket to
space — that's if you've got $20 million to spend. Dennis Tito, an American
businessman, and Mark Shuttleworth, a businessman from South Africa, have both
visited the International Space Station. They were taken up on Russian Soyuz
rockets and enjoyed a week of weightlessness before returning to Earth.
4
Look up into the sky at the right time and the right direction
and you'll see Saturn. It will look like a bright star, but a pair of
binoculars or a small telescope will give you an amazing view. Saturn has rings
around it, giving it a beautiful appearance unlike anything else in the night
sky. No wonder Saturn has been called the 'Jewel of the Solar System'.
5
Discovered in 1930, the planet Pluto circles the Sun at a
distance of approximately six billion kilometres. That's about 40 times further
away from the Sun than the Earth is! At that distance, the Sun looks just like
a bright star and provides very little heat. A spacecraft launched from the
Earth would take twelve or thirteen years to get to Pluto, so don't expect to
see close-up photographs any time soon!

America. The famous
  the movements of the

6
We're used to the idea of modern telescopes giving us views of
the universe and astronauts flying to the space station and back again. But did
you know that the roots of astronomy go back thousands of years? The Egyptians
studied the night sky, as did the original people of North circle of stones at
Stonehenge in Britain shows that people there knew about Sun and the Moon at
least 2,500 vears before Christ was born.

TeKC"ra

1

2

3

4

5                6

Ilpoqumaðune
  60/1POCbl I — 6 u peKaa.uy KHU.YCHb1X H06UHOK A — G. YcmaH0611žne
  coomeemcmeue Meycðv eonpocauu u Pezqa.UHbLUU OÕ7-,HŒWHUflM11.
  B ycaycðo.u meyccme Bbl Haùòeme omeem

coomaemcm6youey'+0 meKcmy, 6 KOnlOPOM BŒuu
  HaùðeH omeem B aaðauuu oðllH mer-ccm JIUIUHUÙ.

As you
  accompany author Nick McDonald on his journey through France, you'll feel
  like you're really there with him. My Trip And Other Mistakes isn't just the
  usual collection of local people and landscapes. With real practical
  tips on where to stay and where to eat, it's a must for every
  tourist.

B       Squaring
  the Triangle, from Vivian Norris, is one of those rare books that gives you a
  new understanding of an old subject. Everyone knows that planes and ships
  have disappeared in the part of the Atlantic known as the Bermuda Triangle,
  but no one knows why. Norris discounts all previous ideas and comes up with
  one or two interesting theories of her own to solve the problem.

C       Crime
  writer Carol Masterton has done it again. In her latest work Not One Before
  Another, she creates a mystery that will have you scratching your head. The
  unusual name for the book comes from the last words of Shakespeare's
  well-known play A Comedy Of Errors, and like that work, this book involves a
  lot of confusion over who's who.

D      After
  the success of the hardback version last year, it was only a matter of time
  before Introducing Myself appeared in paperback. Now everyone can enjoy Henry
  Bannerman's stories of his travels round London as a taxi driver. It's only
  £3.99, compared to £15 for the hardback, so there's no excuse for
  not getting to know this lovable character.

E       Beginners
  will find it too difficult, but expert photographers will love Shooting
  Animals by Ian Clarke. Clarke shows you in great detail how to catch those
  moments when animals are at their best. If you want to improve your pictures
  of wildlife, then this is the book for you.

F
  For years now Karen Wilde has been recreating history on ourTV
  screens in Past Lives. Finally, fans
Of the show can
  buy her book that shows exactly how our great-grandparents lived. Past Lives:
  The Book is the result of three years of research and it gives you a very
  accurate idea of what it was like to be a child back then.

G
  This is the perfect book for those of you who are thinking of
  taking up a new pastime. The author, Greg King, certainly knows his stuff,
  and Fishing Essentials tells you everything you need to know to start
  catching the big fish. Simple techniques are explained for beginners with the
  aid of detailed colour photographs.

O

The ticket
inspector handed the ticket back to Dora with a nod of his head and continued
on his way down the train. He was a handsome young man, Dora thought, and he
reminded her a little of her husband when he had been the same age. She smiled
a little at the thought as she watched the countryside roll past the window of
the train. She was now eightv-four and although she regularly forgot things
that other people found so easy to remember, like where she had put her
glasses, that March day when she and Ralph had got married stood out clearly in
her mind. They hadn't known each other long, and relatives had tried to advise
Dora against it, but they had both known that it was the right thing to do.
They quickly found a house to buy and the wedding was organised in a couple of
days. Dora was grateful for the fortv happy years they had had together.
The sound of
someone sniffing brought Dora's attention back to her surroundings. Sitting
opposite her in the carriage was a woman, who Dora estimated to be in her early
thirties. She looked up at Dora, who realised that the woman would welcome
conversation. Dora pulled a tissue from her bag and passed it over.
'What's his name?' Dora
asked with a friendly smile. The woman wiped her eyes with the tissue.
'Michael. He's just got a
new job ' the woman began, then laughed a little. 'How did you know?'

Ilpoqumaùme maccm u
  6b1/10JIHume aaÒaH11fi A 14420, OÕBOÒH 14114)py 1, 2, 3
  coomeemcmeyougyo H0Jtepy 6blÕPClHHO?O (3CLUU gapuawna omaema.

4,

Test
  7

'I wasn't
always old, you know,' Dora said and looked more closely at the woman. She was
smartly dressed, although her clothes weren't new. Clearly she had had money in
the past but now couldn't afford luxuries. Dora noticed that she had brought
her own sandwiches on the journey, rather than spend money on the train. She
had the air of someone who is educated but who has never had much luck at
turning that education into money. Dora knew what it was like to keep up
appearances on a small income and her heart went out to her fellow traveller.
'Tell me
about it,' she said. For the next half an hour, the woman, whose name turned
out to be Sandra, told her story. Dora listened. The details of the
relationship escaped her and Sandra mentioned people without explaining who
they were, but Dora knew it wasn't important. Sandra wasn't looking for
solutions from Dora. The only thing that mattered was that she gave Sandra a
shoulder to cry on and a sympathetic ear. She nodded in all the right places
and by the time the train pulled in at the next station, Sandra seemed a lot
happier. Sandra looked up and cried, 'Oh, this is my stop!' She grabbed her
bags, thanked Dora for listening and hurried off the train.
Dora sat back and closed her eyes. A feeling of sadness came over her for
a moment. Listening to Sandra talk had been what she imagined being a
grandmother was like. It would have been nice to have had children and watch
their children grow up. Still, it wasn't to be and she and Ralph had spent many
happy years travelling the world. She opened her eyes and looked out onto the
platform as the train pulled away. Sandra was looking up at the train window
and waving at her. Dora waved back and smiled, watching over her shoulder as
the train station got smaller and smaller. She turned back to see a teenage
girl standing beside her seat. She had a suitcase in one hand and the make-up
around her eves had run as if she had been crying. She looked exhausted.
'Excuse me,'
she said in a quiet voice. 'Is anyone sitting here?' She pointed to the seat
where Sandra had been sitting.
'No, my dear.
Sit down,' said Dora, and began to reach into her bag for a tissue. It's going
to be one of those days, she thought to herself.

314

Dora has problems remembering
I) how long she was married to Ralph.
2)
  simple,
  everyday things.
3)
  where her
  husband had gone.
4)
  what her
  wedding day was like.

OX15

Before getting married, Dora and her
  husband 1) waited until they knew each other well.
2)
  asked their
  families for advice.
3)
  arranged
  everything very carefully.
4)
  made sure they
  had somewhere to live.

iA16

Dora
  thinks the young woman 1) would like to chat.
2)
  wants to ask
  her for a tissue.
3)
  looks younger
  than she really is.
4)
  is looking at
  her in a strange way.

LAI 7

The young woman seems to
l) be poorer than she once was.
2)
  like only
  home-made food.
3)
  have problems
  finding a job.
4)   be careless about her clothes.
While Sandra talks about her life,
  Dora 1) gives her some useful advice.
2)
  tries to focus
  on the important details.
3)
  asks her to
  explain things more clearly.
4)
  acts as if she
  understands everything.

319

When Sandra leaves, Dora feels
  unhappy for a moment because she 1) misses her husband.
2)
  never had
  children.
3)
  feels sorry for
  Sandra.
4)
  doesn't see her
  grandchildren often.

A20

Dora thinks it's going to be 'one
  of those days' because I) she would prefer the girl to sit somewhere else. 2) she
  can't find the tissues in her bag.

3) the girl seems to have the same
problems as Sandra. 4) the girl doesn't realise that Dora is exhausted.

no
  OKOHLICIHUU B2, B3 u Ä14-A20 HE 3ABYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK
  OTBETOB
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  B2, 133 u A14-A20  d Pa.3HblX qacmnr
  õaamca. B2, 133 pacnoao.yceHb1 6 Hid.ycHeù qacmu õaaHKa.
  npu nepeHoce 0171601106 B aaòaH11H.r B2, B3 QVK6b1 aanucb1BŒomcH
  õea npoõeaoe u .3HClK06

83
                   Pa3aeJ1         rpaMMaTÞIKa JleKC11Ka

Tlpoqumaùme moccm
3anovquume nponycçu 6 npeò.aoycenuqx not) H0Jtepa.M11 B4-B11
coomeemcn16YH)11'1LM11 cþop.ua.M11 CJ106, HaneqamaHHbLr
aa¿aa6Hb1Af11 ÕVK6Œ1f11 cnpaea om KaycÒ020
npeòaoyceHllfl.

B4

'Aliens                           over
  our back garden, right now!'

FLY

B5

His mother
  laughed. She anything so silly. 'Really, Charlie,' she said. 'You know there
  are no aliens. Now, have you finished your homework? I want to see it.'

NEVER HEAR

'It's true!' Charlie cried. 'There are aliens outside, for a place to
  land their spaceship!' Charlie's father looked up from his newspaper.

LOOK

'Now, Charlie. What's all this? 1 you so many times
  before not to tell lies. There are no aliens and they certainly don't fly
  down Acacia
Avenue.'

TELL

B8

'Okav,'                           Charlie.
  'Come and look. If there's nothing there,

SAY

Visitors from outer space
Charlie ran downstairs
and burst into the living room. 'Aliens!' he shouted.
I promise
I'll just do my homework.'
Charlie's father sighed and put his newspaper down. 'Okav, Charlie. I'll
come B9 outside with you and see if there are any aliens in garden.' They went
into the garden, but there was nothing there. 'But ... but ...

BIO they were ... ' Charlie to
say. His father took his arm and BEGIN led him back inside.
They walked back into the
living room and suddenly stopped. There were two
Bll large green creatures on the sofa next to Charlie's mum, who SIT
looked very nervous. 'Hello, dear. I think we've got visitors,' she said,
weakly.

Ilpoqumaùme
  npueeòeHHb1ù Hil.yce meçcm 17peoõpaayùme
  caoea, HaneqamaHHb1e aaZQC16Hbl.Ull õYK6Œuu nocae HO.uep06
  B12-B18 max, gmoõbl OHU epa,wtamuqecxu u at'KCU¼C'CKU
  coomeemcmeoaaelll coc)ep.ycaH1d10 maccma. 3ano.uume nponycxu nonyqeHHb1-uu
  CJ106CIMll. Ka.yðblù nponycK coomaemcmavem omòe.tbH0MY apynnbl
  B 12-B18.

B12
Imagine what life used to be like before people had    food. FREEZE Everything
had to be bought fresh and fresh meat lasted only a few days.
B13 That all changed in 1916 when an                                    called
Clarence              EXPLORE
Birdseye went on an
expedition to Canada with his family. They were
B14 to get fresh vegetables, so Clarence used ice to make
their ABLE food last longer. After a lot of hard work, he finally found a way
of
B15                                   freezing
food. He returned to the USA, started a business SUCCESS
B16       and became                              Clarence
Birdseye is famous for finally           WEALTH
B17      finding
the     to a problem that people had been trying to  SOLVE solve for thousands
of years. Even today, you will find Bird's Eye products
B18 on                                  in
supermarkets all over the world.                                    SELL

Test 7

Tlpoqumaùme
meKcm c nponycxa.uu, OÕoanaqeHHbtJt11 HO.UePa.8tu A21-A28. 3mu H0Jtepa
coome,emcmeyom 3CIÒt1H11fL$t ,421-A28, 6 Komopbl-r npeòcmaaaeHb1
60.1Uo.YCHbte gapuamnbl omæmoe. ()õeeòume H0.uep BblÕPG'HHO?0
6Œuu eapuamna omeema.

Mr and Mrs Atkinson sat at the
  breakfast table. The toast was in its usual place, to the left of the teapot.
  And Mr Atkinson, as usual, wasn't in a A21 news on TV as he chewed a piece of
  toast. Mrs Atkinson tried to cheer him A22 as she did every morning, usually
  without much success.
'1 A23  a very strange dream last night,'
  she said. 'You won the lottery.'
'Hmm?' Mr
  Atkinson responded, without taking his eyes from the TV screen.
'Yes,' his wife continued. 'You won millions of
  pounds and bought us a lovely house in the country.' 'No chance of that while
  I'm working for Simpson's,' he said. His wife A24  no attention to his negative
  comment.
'Wouldn't it be wonderful, though, to live in the
  countryside, instead of in this flat?' Mr Atkinson smiled at the thought.
'Yes, it
  would be nice,' he said, before he frowned once more. 'But we'll never be
  able to
A25  it.' He stood up and went to collect his coat and
  briefcase. Mrs Atkinson sighed. Every week she bought a lottery ticket, and
  every week she checked the numbers. Of course, every week she was
  disappointed. She thought that maybe it was time to A26 and just accept that
  this was her life. She sighed again. The TV news was A27 an end.

      and finally, here are this week's
  winning lottery numbers .. , 17, 28, 29, 37, 40 and 42.'
Mrs
  Atkinson went white. She A28  her breath for a moment, then walked over to her desk. She
  opened a drawer and, very calmly, pulled out a small piece of paper. It was a
  lottery ticket. Mr Atkinson came back into the room.
'Right. I'm off. I shouldn't be too
  late, so ... Wendy, are you all right?' Mrs Atkinson handed him the lottery
  ticket and then very slowly sat down. She buttered a slice of toast and
  chewed thoughtfully.

                         1) high                     2)
good                  3) strong               4) light
                         I) round                  2) out                    3)
off                    4) up

A23

1) had        2) got  3) saw 4) took
A24   1) paid           2) put 3) gave           4) made
A25                  1) cost                      2)
charge                3) afford                4) invest
A26                  I) give                      2)
stop                    3) turn                   4) hang
                          I) going                   2)
bringing            3) moving             4) coming

A28

                          1) kept                    2) paused               3)
held                  4) saved

no OKOH¼CIHUU B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE
  HEPEHECTM CBOJ4 OTBETb1 B FAAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE
  BWIMAHME, qmo                   Ha .3aòaHllH B4-B18 u A21-A28
Pat3HbLV qac•mfLr
  õ.'1üHRa. B4-B18 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HUYHeðl qacmu
  ã1d1HKí1. 171211 nepeHoce 0111607106 6                B4-B18
  õYKBbl aanuc•bldŒomcH õe.3 npoõeaoe u .3HdlK06
  npenlUfflHUfl.

85
                                        Pa3neJ1
      TIMCbMO

       omaemoe Ha              CI, C2 ucn0J1b3yùme
  K'7AHK OTBETOB M2.
õyòym out'H116amb('H
  moat,K0 no aanucnu, CÒeaCIHHbLU d WIAHKE OTBETOB Y2. HURUKUe aanucu
  qepH0611Ka He õvðym vqun1b16an1bt'H .9Kcnepmo.u.
Ilpu aano-QHt"--tuu WIAHKA
  OTBETOB Y2 yca.yume cHaqaaa H').uep        CI, C2 .3ameM aanutuume
  caoù omaenz Ecau oòH01i cmop0Hb1 rîaawca
  HeòocmamotlH0, 6bt .uoyceme ucnoalbaoaanu, ()pyeyo cmopony
  âQCIHKC1.

You have
20 minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from
Andy, your English pen friend.

Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have
40 minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Some people think that
pupils should be involved in decisions about their school and should have a say
in how things are run. Other people think that pupils are too young to take
part in such important decisions.
What
can you say for and against pupils being Use the following plan involved in
running their school?     1. Introduction (State the problem).
     Write 200-250 words.                                              2.
Arguments "for".
3.
Arguments
"against"
4.
Conclusion.
                                Pa3neJ1
       1'0BopeHwe

Bbl
  nonyuume Kapmowcy, Ha Komopoù npeÒcmagaeHb1 mpu aaðaHllfl omeema:
C3 — meatamuqecycoe MOHOJIOUlLWCKOe
  6blCKa.3bteauue,
C4 —
  Òuaaoe c lge.lb,LO oãue}-ta       C5 —
  òuaaoe c ue.lb,zo OÕ.MC'HCI ogeuot1HOÙ
  uncþop.ua«ueù. OROHt1CIHUe 6blYiOJ1}-œHUfl ycu.yòoeo
  aaðaH11f1 onpeòeaHem 3K.3Œue,qamop. Bo gpe.',ffl
  npoeeðeHllH »moil ttacmu  uðem nocmomman aanucb Ha
  ayòuoycaccemy.

                                                   3aaaH11¶
          3K3aMeHveMoro

 STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a 2-minute talk on
your favourite book.
Remember
to say:
• what kind of book it is • who
the main characters are and whether you like them
•     what happens in the book
•     why it is your favourite
You
have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are on holiday in
England. You would like to go on a boat trip in the next hour with two friends.
It is quite a cool day. You only have two hours for the trip.

Before making a decision, ask
the trip operator about:
•      trips available at the moment
•      activities offered on each trip
•      the time each trip takes
•      places left on each trip
The
teacher will play the part of the trip operator and will speak first.
Remember to:  be active and polite  get all the information you need
•      decide on the boat trip to take
 STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and a friend are at the Olvmpic Games. You are discussing
what sport you would like to buy tickets for. You can see:
•      a football match
•      a tennis match
•
the marathon
•      a swimming race
• a judo match
The teacher
will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

anguage and Exam Skills Development'

Section 1 Listening: third task
A Look at questions A7-A13 on page 91 and find words and
phrases that have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.
1    main actors 2 not completely
3       asked
4       very
5       a lot
6       unimportant
7       not much
8       reason for
9       in the right way
B  Read through the questions again.
Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F) according to the
questions.
1    Alan will talk about where Battle of the Giants was filmed.
2    Alan placed the advertisement in a
newspaper.
3    Alan applied to the film production
company for a job.
4    Alan had an interview.
5    In the end, Alan decided against
working on the film.
Section 2 Reading:
second task
c Read the three texts on page 93.
Decide which text each of these ideas is mentioned in. Write 'A' for the first
text, 'B' for the second text and 'C' for the third text.
1       You must be a certain age.
2       This is how much money you will make.
3       The job involves serving customers.
4       Phone us if you are interested.
5       You must have a car or van, etc.
O
6       You don't need experience.
7       You won't do any driving.
8       You'll work on Saturday mornings
only.
9       You must be available on three
evenings each week.
10 You'll stay in and go out.
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
third
task
Write a word from the box in each gap to complete the sentences.
achieve
• handle • manage • succeed
1
I really hope you in
persuading Alice to come with us tomorrow.
2
I really hope youto persuade Alice to come with us
tomorrow.
3
I don't know what
you're trying to
, but you won't succeed!
4
I think you're going to the situation really well

o'clock
so we should be there by lunchtime.
6
Are you going to off for a picnic during the journey?
7
Why don't you  your jacket off if you're too hot?
8
They'll  off the phone if you don't pay your
bill.

             appear • arrive • get • reach

9
What time did you
 to the airport?
10
What time did you
 the airport?
11
What time did you
 at the airport?
12
As soon as they  , we can check in.
Section
4 Writing: first task
E
Read Task CI on
page 98. Imagine you are the person replying to Jackie and make notes to answer
these questions. Use your imagination!

I Have you ever been on holiday just with your friends?

yes I no

2 If yes, did you have to persuade your parents to let you?
  Give as much information as possible.

3 If no, have you ever asked your
  parents if you could? What happened? Give as much information as possible.

4 Do you think Jackie is old enough to go on holiday with
  her friends? Why / why not?

5 Do you think Jackie should try to
  persuade her parents? If yes, how?

6 Do you have any other advice for
  Jackie?

F
Make a detailed
paragraph plan for
your letter. Use your notes from Exercise E.

Your address

The date

Greeting
(Dear + first name,)

First paragraph

Second paragraph

Third paragraph

Closing expressions

Your first name

Section 5 Speaking: second task
C Look at the Student Card for Task 2
on page 99. Each of these questions contains a grammatical mistake. Rewrite them correctly.
I What time the film starts?

2
What kind of film
it is?

3
It is a comedy?

4
It starts within
the next half an hour?

5
When it starts?

89

Test 8

                                Pa3neJ1       AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl _ycnbltuume 5
  (3b1CK(13b1gaH11Ù. coomgerncrneue Me.ycòy 6b1CK(13b1ßCIHIULUU
  RaycÒoeo
POBOPHtgeeo 1 — 5 u yrngep.YðeH14fLM1d,
  ÒCIHHbLUU B cnucvce A — F. Mcn0J1b3yùme Kaycðyo
  õYlC6_y, yrngep.ycòeHue, moulbK0
  oÒE111 paa. B .3aÒmtuu ecmb oÒ110 auumee
  ymeepmcÒenue.
Bbl
  ycau,uuume aanucb                 3aHecume C60U on16enlbL maÕnugy,

A.
Making a lot of money is the most important thing for me. B. I will probably do
the same job as one of my relatives.
C. I want to continue with my
education for a long time. D. I'm hoping I can travel a lot in my career, E.
Being famous really appeals to me.
F. I am planning to work
with children when I'm older.

FOBOPH1uM1i

1

2

3

4

5

Yl'Bep>KJlc11Me

Bbl _ycnbltuume paaeogop õuõauornel€apfl u
  qurnarnen,fl, Onpeòeaurne, ICŒcue 143 npueeÒëHHbLr
_ymæpyòewuù Al-Ab coomgemcmesytom melccma
  (1), ICCIKUe He coomgemcme,yom (2) u O qëM melccme He cycaaaHO, mo
  ec/ìlb Ha OCH06aHUU muccma ()amb Hid nonoycumeJ1bH0?0, Hid
  ompugameJtbH0?0 ome,ema (3). ()õgeòume HOMep
  ßb1ÕpaHHOPO 6tlMU gapuawna onwema, Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb
  c)6ayÒb1.

Al

The woman has used this library before.
l) Bepuo                   2)
  IleBep110                3) B TCKCTC Ile cka3a110

A2

The woman usually carries her passport with her, I) Bep110 2) 11cBep110
  3) B •rewre Ile cKa3a110

A3

The woman has something with her
  that can be used as identification.
I) Bep110                2)
  11cBep110                  3) B •rewre Ile cKa3a110

A4

You have to pay if you keep a book for more than two weeks.
l) Bep110                 2)
  Ilei3ep110                  3) B •rewre He cka3a110

A5

The library only has books.
l) Bep110                 2)
  Ilei3ep110                  3) B •rewré He cka3a110

A6

You can borrow a maximum of six
  things at the same time.

                     l) Bep110               2)
IleBep110               3) B TCKCTC Ile cKa3a110

Bbl ycalbltuume umnep6bR) C AMHOM AOCOHOM, KomoPb1Ù
  mt)JtbKO timo CHA,ICR B cþualb.ue. B aaÒG'HURX A7-Ä13
  oõaeòume gutþpy 1, 2 WII/ 3, coomaemcmgyotgyo
  dblÕPCIHHOMY aa.uu gapuamny omaema. Bbl ycutbltuume

Alan says that
1)  he probably won't be in the finished
film.
2)  people might not see him in the film.
3) he's one of the stars of the film.
 The film Battle of the Giants was 1)
completely made in Hollywood.
2)
not made in
Hollywood at all.
3)   partly made in Alan's local area.
A9 The advertisement which Alan saw called for people I) who were
particularly good-looking.
2)   with plenty of acting experience.
3)   who wanted a minor role in a film.
    AIO    Before the film, Alan had
I) never
done any acting at all.
2)
only done a small amount of acting. 3) done a large amount of acting.
All Alan heard from the film production company I) one day
after he had applied.
2)   one week after he had applied.

Test
  8

3)   three months after he had applied.
A12 Alan thinks the purpose of the interview was to 1) test
how good at acting he was.
2) see if he
really wanted to be in the film. 3) measure him for some clothes.
A13 Most of the work Alan did on the film involved 1)
standing in a crowd of people.
2) learning
how to act properly. 3) running away from the giants.

no Bl u Al-A13 IIE 3AbYUbTE TIEPEIIECTÞI CBOU OTBETb1 B WIÄHK
  OTBETOB !
ObPATUTE BIIMMAIIME,
  qmo Ha m, Al-A13 qacrnnr ãqawca. BI pacnoaunceH0
  B HU.YCHeÙ qacmu õ.aawca. Tlpu nepeHoce orne,ernog 6
  aaÒ(1Huu BI õYKBbl õea npoõenoe u 3M(11C06
  npen14H0H1dfl.

O

                                     Pa3neJ1        LITeHne

YcrnaH06urne
  coorngerncrngue me.M A — G rnexcrna,u 1 — 6. 3aHecurne cgou orngeržlbl 6
  rnaãauuy.

A. SLOW SUCCESS B. FILM MUSICIAN
c. LONG HISTORY
D.     SEA
SOUNDS
E.      GREAT
CHANGES
F.       WONDERFUL
PLAYER G. LIVE PERFORMANCES

I While the electric guitar was
  invented quite recently (in 1931, by Adolf Rickenbacker), the guitar itself
  has been around in various forms for an incredibly long time. Musical
  instruments remarkably similar to the guitar have been played for at least the
  last five thousand years. The instrument which million of teenagers today
  dream of playing in a rock band started its life in Persia (now called Iran),
  in Central Asia.
2
  Humans have only been able to record sounds to listen to later
  since the middle of the 1800s. Since then, however, technology has developed
  at an enormous speed. Records, cassettes and CDs have all allowed people to
  listen to recorded music in their own home. These days, more and more music
  is becoming 'digital'. We can save pieces of music as files on our computer,
  and can carry thousands of songs around on personal MP3 players.
3
  Everyone knows that the British group the Beatles was the most
  successful pop group of all time. In the early 1960s, John Lennon, Paul
  McCartney, George Harrison and Ringo Starr changed popular music forever.
  Things weren't easy for the band at the beginning, though. Lennon and
  McCartney started making music together in 1957. By 1962, almost every single
  record company in Britain had rejected them, saying they would never achieve
  anything. Finally, one record company decided to take a risk with them. By
  1964, they were the most popular band in the world.
4
  Before pop groups and singers go on tour, they have to make a
  decision regarding their music. They probably want to play the songs from
  their latest album in their concerts, but the question is: should the songs
  sound as similar as possible to the sound created on the album, or should the
  audience hear a new version of the song? Madonna, for example, is always keen
  to Sing her songs in a different way at concerts. Other singers choose to
  sing their songs as they sang them on the album.
5
  Jerry Goldsmith spent much of his career writing the music for
  Hollywood movies. From the early
1950s until 2003, Goldsmith wrote the soundtracks
  for several hundred hit movies, including the Star Trek and Rambo series of
  films. He often worked on as many as sixmajor movies in one year. If that
  wasn't enough, he also found the time to come up with the theme tunes for a
  large number of American and radio shows.
6
  Dolphins and whales can hear much better than humans can. They
  can also hear much better than they can see, This does not cause them many
  problems, however, as sound travels through water much better than light
  does. They often use sounds to locate things such as rocks and food. Male
  humpback whales make noises that sound like they're singing. One whale can
  hear another Whale's 'song' hundreds of miles away.

N2 •rewra

1

2

3

4

5

6

Texqa

coom„emcrneue
//anutuume guq5py
  1— ec•au _ymaepyðe+tue eepnoe, u gucþpy O — ecau ymgepYðeH1te
  ueeepnoe. 3Œecume         omeembl maõnugy.

The person doing this         Part-time
  sales job will only work on 1 one day each week.       We're looking for a
  part-time busy city centre bookshop on 2 The bookshop will only I      trustworthy,
  approachable be consider trained sales 1 public. NO experience is
given. The position would be
  assistants for this job.        but anyone with a love of
Write to Mrs J. Smythe at
Street, Stratford and explain

Do you like looking
3
  This job will
  continue
1   when the
  children go         we're looking for someone aged back to school.       1
  three children during the summer
and
  Caroline (l l) are three brighc
need
  to be kept busy! You would
4
  The successful 6 pm. Occasionally, we Will need applicant might
  have to 1 games With the kids at home, and work at the weekend 1 (No driving
  required.) Good rate sometimes. 1 Experience preferred. Please call
5
  The band plays
  all over I Drummer wanted to join the country. at weddings and parties in the
  weekend. You should be an play a wide range of music
6
  The successful
  blues and soul). You must have applicant must be aged 1 own transport. You
  must be between 45 and 55. Saturday and Sunday evening, evening. You can
  expect to
1
  two-hour
  performance. You band are aged 45-55.

them on day trips too.
pay for the successful applicant
between 6 pm and 9 pm.
your own drum kit and your 1 for
  performances every I for rehearsals every Friday I approximately
  £70 for every I1 be any age, but the rest of the 1

                                                                        assistant
wanted          1
sales assistant to work in our Saturday mornings. You must and enjoy
working with the necessary as full training will be
1 ideal for a
university student books can apply.
Smythe's Books, 25 Candon why you want to work with us!

Test 8

after children?
1 between 18 and 25 to look after our holidays.Adam (aged     (9)          1 friendly
and energetic children who 1 work Monday to Friday, 8 am to         1 you on
Saturdays too.you'll be playing 1 taking of
5757
successful local experienced (including
available and
earn can

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test 8

17poqumaùme
rncwcrn u 6b1no„mume aaòL'H1dfl A14-A20, OÕ60Òfl
I'll(þpy 1, 2, 3 unu 4, Coom6emcmgyotgyo H0Mepy 6b1ÕPaHHOU) ea.uu
gapuawna onwema.

'I want everyone to be absolutely clear how
  seriously I'm taking this,' said Mrs Lowry. The twelve children stared at her
  silently and intently, their frightened expressions demonstrating that they
  did Indeed recognise the gravity of the situation.
'We will not tolerate
  stealing in this school. It's quite simple. Whoever has taken Julie's purse
  must return it to me during the lunch break. If you do that, we won't say
  anything more about it. I shan't punish you, and I won't tell the head
  teacher or your parents. But if Julie's purse hasn't been returned by the end
  of lunch, then I'm afraid I'll have no choice but to go to Mr Jenkins, and
  you know what he'll do. There's a school policy for situations like this and
  there's no getting out of it. That's right — he'll bring the police in.
  They'll come this afternoon, and they'll interview you all. They'll find out
  who took the purse, I'm sure of it, and whoever it is will be in very, very
  serious trouble. So, please, for your own good, if you took Julie's purse,
  bring it to me during the lunch break. I'll be in here, on my own, the whole
  time. Does everyone understand?'
'Yes, Mrs Lowry,' said the group Of
  nine-year-olds in chorus.
Lunch break came and went with no one handing in the purse
  to Mrs Lowry.
'This is a great shame,' said Mrs
  Lowry sadly. 'Before I go and talk to Mr Jenkins, I'm just going to ask you,
  Julie, one more tune: are you absolutely one hundred per cent sure you
  brought your purse to school this morning?' 'Yes, Mrs Lowry.'
'And when did you last see it?'
'During the break, at eleven
  o'clock. Just as I told you. took out a pound coin to go and buy a can of
  Coke. When I came back with the change, it had gone.'
'And Elizabeth, you saw Julie take the pound coin out of
  her purse, did you?'
'Yes, Mrs Lowry,' said the girl sitting next to
  Julie. 'Julie's telling the truth. We went to the drinks machine together and
  when we came back, Julie's purse wasn't in her bag anymore. That's when we
  came to find you.'
'I'll ask you all one more time. Does anyone know anything
  about the whereabouts of Julie's purse?'
There was absolute silence in the
  classroom. 'Then I shall go and get Mr Jenkins now.'
Mrs Lowry had
  already opened the door and stepped into the corridor when a voice shouted:
  'Mrs Lowry! '
She immediately turned and came back into the room. 'What
  is it?' she asked.
David, sitting right at the back of
  the class, was pomting excitedly at the radiator on the wall next to him.
  'Look, Mrs Lowry! Behind the radiator! I think it's Julie's purse!'
There did seem to be something
  colourful behind the radiator. Mrs Lowry ran to the wall, bent down and
  picked it up. 'Is this your purse, Julie?' 'Yes!' said Julie.
'Remind me how much was in it.'
'A five-pound note.'
Mrs Lowry opened the purse. 'Thank
  goodness for that,' she said. 'Julie, here you are. David, I'd like to talk
  to you outside, please. The rest of you just sit quietly until I return.
Mrs Lowry and David stood
  silently outside the door. She looked at him sadly. 'I'm waiting, David,' she
  said eventually. 'What for, Mrs Lowry?'
'For an explanation.'
'What do you mean?' Tears were
  already beginning to well up in his eyes.
'I'm not stupid, David. Don't think
  I am. I want you to tell me exactly what you did and why you did it. If you
  do that, it'll go no further, I promise.'
'I didn't do anything! I saw the purse and I called you
  in.'
'I don't
  think your parents are going to believe that, are they? Do you want them to
  know you're a thief?'
'I'm not a thiefl I'm not!' He wiped
  his eyes with his sleeve. 'How can I make you believe me?'

Test 8

A14

The children's faces showed that
  they 1) were going to remain silent for a long time.
2)
  were scared of
  having things stolen.
3)
  knew exactly
  what Mrs Lowry would do.
4)
  were aware how
  serious the theft was.

AIS

Mrs Lowry said that, if the purse wasn't returned,
  she would have to 1) punish all of the children.
2)
  tell their
  parents.
3)
  tell the head
  teacher.
4)
  inform the
  police.

A16

Mrs Lowry was confident that
1) the purse would be
  returned during the lunch break, 2) she knew who had taken Julie's purse.
3) the police would be able to solve the crime. 4) the thief was really a good
  person.

Ali

After lunch, Mrs Lowry wanted to
  make certain that 1) Julie's purse had been stolen.
2)
  Julie's purse
  was still missing.
3)
  Elizabeth
  hadn't taken the purse.
4)
  Julie's purse
  did have money in it,

A18

Mrs Lowry showed she was relieved that 1) it was actually Julie's purse,
2)
  Julie's money
  was still in the purse.
3)
  it was David
  who had found the purse.
4)
  Julie hadn't
  had more money in the purse.

A19

In the corridor with David, Mrs Lowry
1)
  asked David to
  explain why he was crying.
2)
  realised how
  sad he was about what had happened.
3)
  felt very sorry
  that David had to experience this.
4)
  was hoping that
  David would confess to the crime.

A20

Mrs Lowry made it clear to David that

1)
she'd
definitely tell his parents he was a thief.
2)
she knew why he
had stolen Julie's purse.
3)
she would not
tell anyone if he confessed.
4)
his crying would
not change anything,

no        132, 133 u A14-A20 IIE
  3AbYAbTE TIEPE/IECTU CBOU OTBETb1 B WIÄHK OTBETOB    !
ObPATUTE B/IUMAIIUE, qrno Ha B2, m
  u A14-A20 pa.3Hl,Lr qacrnax õaamca.
  132, B3 pacnonoyceHbl 6 HILYCHeÙ qacrnu ÕMHICí1. Ilpu
  nepeHoce orngerž10B 6 aaÒaHURX B2, B3 õYKBbl
  aanucbleawrncfl ("ea npoõenog u npen1dHí1H11fl.

Test
  8

                      Pa3neJ1         rpaMwaT11K'a
n JleKCWKa

Ilpoqumaùme
  mezcm. 3an0JtHume nponycxu npeònoyceptu.qx- noò Ht).uepaauu
  B4-B11 coomgemcmayotgu.uu cþop.ua.uu (.7106, HanettamaHHb1.r
  aaaqadHb1auu õycaaauu cnpaaa om Icayðopo

136
138
B9
BIO
Bli

The Moon
Would you like to go to the Moon? The Moon is about
  385,000 kilometres away from  here on Earth.
It's much  than the Earth, and is not really
  a planet.
It's a
  'satellite' of Earth. This means it  round the Earth.
Before 1969, humans  able to get to the Moon. Then, on
  July 20th, the spacecraft Apollo 1 1 on the Earth's only satellite.
The world watched with excitement
  as the first humans on the Moon's surface.
In total,
  twelve people  the Moon so far.
However, the
  last time anyone  on the surface of the Moon was in 1972.

WE
SMALL
GO
NEVER BE
WALK
  usrr
STAND

Ilpoqumaùme
  PIPUßeÒeHHblÙ HidYce moccm [IpeoÕpa3Yùme
  caoaa, HaneqamaHHble õyct$avuu noc.ne B12-B18 malC, urnoõbl
  0/411 epaM„uarnuttecK1d u aelœuqecxu coomaemcrnaoaa.au
  coòep.ycamuo melcrma. 3ano.,murne nponycxu ntmyqeHHbLUU c.aoaa.uu.
  Ka.ycòblù nponycK coornaerncnusyern ornðeJ1bH0„uy aac)amuo
  143 epynnbl 1312-1318.

B12
B13
B14
B15 B16 B17
B18

The Russian
  writer Anton Chekhovs who was born in 1860 and died in 1904, has made an
  enormous  to modern literature. His success was a remarkable , and came despite the fact that
  Chekhov's family lived in severe poverty for much of his
Chekhov's works have had a great
  influence on 20th century literature in many ways, particularly in terms of expression, plot

and
  narrative structure, and character
Even today, more than a hundred years after his
Chekhov's stories are extremely
  popular all over the world and major new  of his plays are frequently
  mounted, to great success.

CONTRIBUTE
ACHIEVE
CHILD
EMOTION
DEVELOP DEAD
PRODUCE

Tlpoqumaüme me}ccm c nponycraauu,
  OÕ03HaqeHHbLUU Htwepaauu A21-A28. 3mu H0Mepa
  coornßemcmßyom gat)aH1ffiM 1421-A28, IcomopbLY  603MO.H'Hb1e
  gapuawnbl omgem06. OÕ6eòume H0.uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?0 6W„tU
  6apuawna omgema.

I had only been at
  university for a few hours when the enormity of it finally dawned on me: I
  was now independent. Having lived at home with my parents all my life up
  until that day, I had often dreamed of the freedom that living A21  yourself gives you. There's no one
  to tell you when to go to bed, when to get up, what to do, what not to do.
  Now, though, I felt the responsibility weighing down on me. True, there was
  no one giving me rules to obey, but there was also no one to
A22      on but myself If I didn't remember
  to go to the supermarket, there wouldn't be any food in the flat. If I didn't
  budget correctly, there wouldn't be Mum or Dad nearby to lend me

some money. If I didn't pay the bills on time, the electricity or water
  would be A23 off. It was a frightening feeling, and
  I prayed I would be able to deal with adult life in a A24  enough
  way.
Over the next days and weeks, I began to realise how much I
  still had to learn, How could I have
A25  to the age of eighteen without ever having ironed my own
  shirt? Was that laziness on my part ('Mum, can you iron a shirt for me? S),
  or had my parents and teachers failed to provide me with the skills I now
  needed? Whichever it was, I quickly had to learn. And learn I did partly
  through trial and error, and partly A26  to the help of the new friends I
  was making. Many of them were in a similar situation, but we each had
  different skills to share. I could show them how to cook a tasty spaghetti
  Bolognese — a A27  every student should be able to prepare — and they could
  teach me how to light a gas oven or defrost a fridge.

When I went home for Christmas, I sensed that my parents
  were a little surprised that I had
A28  to survive so well. I didn't admit
  it, but I felt extremely proud of all I'd accomplished so far.

     A21                  1) or                         2)
by                      3) with                  4) on
                               1)
follow                 2) believe               3) rely                    4)
trust
     A23                  1) cut                      2)
taken                 3) set                    4) stopped
      A24                           1)
grown2) developed                   3) mature              4) ripe
     A25                  1) reached               2)
got                    3) arrived            4) appeared
     A26                   1)
recognition          2) praise                 3) credit                4)
thanks
                              1) dish                     2)
plate                  3) portion            4) serving
     A28                   1)
managed               2) succeeded        3) achieved            4)
handled

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 IIE
  3AbYUbTE IIEPEIIECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB    !
ObPATMTE BIIMMAIIME,
  qmo omgenlbl Ha aaÒaHlÆH B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacno.n.apawmcH e
  pa.3HbLX yacmqx (mamca. B4-B18 pacnonoye+-lbl B HUYCHeÙ qacmu
  Õaawca. flpu nepew»ce on16en106 .gaðaHldflx B4-B18
  õYKßb1 aanucblßcuorncq õe.3 U .3HG','C06
  npe,VlllHaHlffl.

                                    Pa3neJ1       11MCbMO

Ha                  Cl, C2 WIAHK OTBETOB
Ilpu Bbl"lOJIHeHUld aac)aHuÚ CI u C2 ocoõoe
  "HILM(IHUC' oõpamume Ha mo, grno 6CUUU omgenlbl
  õyòym no aanucmt, CC)ea1CIHHbLM 6 WIAHKE OTBETOB v,W2. IllUCCUCUe
  aanucu qepH061uca He õyòym ygumb16an1bcH .9Kcnepn10M.
17pu
  aanomw,quu WIAHKA OTBETOB vMg2 y,rcayume cwaqa-qa HOMep CI, C2 aameM gamuuume
  C60ù omgem Ecnu OÒHOÙ cmopow-,l Heðocmam0¼H0,
  6b1 Jtoyceme ucn0J1b30ßanlb ()pypyo cmop0HY ÕJtaHICa.

You have 40 minutes to do
this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
The car has become the most popular means
of transport in the history of the world. However, some people say that the
world would be better off without cars.
What can you say for and against the use of cars?            Use
the following plan
Write 200-250 words.                                                            1.
Introduction (State the problem).
2.   Arguments "for".
3.   Arguments "against".
4.   Conclusion.
                                     Pa3neJ1
       IR)BopeHne

Bbl no.ayqurne Rapmowcy, Ha
  Romopoù  rnpu              ().ŒH ycmuoeo
  omaema.•
C3 — meauamuqecycoe MOHOJIO?UUC'CICOC' dblCKa.3b16t1HUC',
C4 —
  c)UWtop C 1'C'Jtb,tO  cþG'KmuqecK0ù
  1Œcþop.,uagueù, C5 — ðuanop C 1ßJtbW)
OIÇ'H(BIHOÙ
  11H(þopauatgueù. ()KOHqaHue dblnOJIHC'HUH       aac)t1H1dfl
  onpeòe„uwrn 9K.gaaueHamop. Bo ept'Mfl  .9,vnoù qacmu :-ycaaauew.'
  llòem nocm0flHH0'fl aanucb Ha ayòut»caccemy.

3anaunq  3K3aMenyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task 1 (3—3.5
minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on the weekend. Remember to say:
•      what you usually do at the weekend
•      whether there's anything you don't
like about the weekend
•      which people you like to spend time
with at the weekend, and why
•      what your 'perfect weekend' is like
You have to
talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then
he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD

Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
It's early evening. You are
at the cinema. You want to see a film that starts within the next half an hour
but you don't like love stories.

Before making a decision, ask
the ticket salesperson about:
•      films on this evening
•      what kind of films they are
•      what time they start
The teacher
will play the part of the ticket salesperson and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on a film to see
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and your friend want to
spend next Sunday at an adventure park doing a sport you've never done before.
You are discussing which sport to do. Whichever sport you choose, all equipment will be
provided and trained experts will make sure you are not in danger. You can go:
canoeing
•      rock climbing
•      mountain biking
•      horse riding
•      sailing
The teacher
will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•      discuss all the options  take an active part in the
conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with
suggestions
•come to an agreement

Test
  9

-Tñèñt

anguageandiEžamSkillS
eVélö
Section 1 Listening: first task
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary: third task

A Look at the first task on page 102.
Match the statements A-F to the following   C speakers.

1 Xhat is the name of the group?

1    'It's very important to them that I
do well at school.'       Statement

2
  What instrument
  does Ashley play?
3      What instrument does Yasmin plav?
4
  Who wrote the
  band's new song?
5
  What instrument
  does Mike play?
6
  How does Mike
  get to

2    'They'd like me to be a doctor, but I
want to be a teacher.'         Statement
3    'They always seem to be busy and
never have time to listen.' Statement
4    'They think they can tell me who I
can spend time with.'       Statement
5    'They've got experience and they're
happy to give me advice.'          Statement
6    'I can't decide things for myself,
and it's not fair!'       Statement
Section 2 Reading: third task

Quickly read the text on page
109, ignoring the gaps. Write a word or short phrase to answer each question.
the
practice session?
D Read these sentences from the text
and
B Quickly read the text on page 106. choose
the correct answer. Look at the Decide if these statements are True (T)        text
again and the options given in the or False (F).         task if necessary.
1
Ben is the writer's brother. TIF I Ashley Gray unlocked
the door to the garage, swung it open and
2
The
Sharpes lived next door to the ,421the lights on. writer in the past. TIF
A The
garage is dark and Ashley makes 3 The writer's mother works as a it light.
lawyer. TIF B The garage is light and Ashley makes 4 The writer is outside when
the new it dark.
         neighbours arrive.                                TIF        2
It had been expensive and he was

5
The new
neighbours arrive in a green car.      TIF
6
The writer
introduces herself to
Ben.    TIF
,422  of the fact that he had earned the money to buy it himself without any help from his parents.
A    He feels good about buying it with
his own money.
B     He feels bad about buying it with his
own money.
3 'I printed out the song
and
A23  at it briefly. Seems okay.'
A
He looked at the
song for a short time.
B
He looked at the
song for a long time.

Section 4 Writing: first task

E Read the first task on page
110 and write notes to complete the table for yourself.  Then interview a partner.

You

Your partner

How long
    have you been learning English?

Do you enjoy it? Why?

How do you learn new vocabulary?

watch TV / films in
    English find an English pen friend read books in English keep a diary in
    English read the dictionary every day go to an English-speaking country
read web pages in English on the Internet chat to your
    friends in English your own idea.'

watch TV / films in English find an
    English pen friend read books in English keep a diary in English read the
    dictionary every day go to an English-speaking country read web pages in
    English on the Internet chat to yourfriends in English your   idea:

What do
    you think are the best ways of learning English? Choose two.

Section 5 Speaking: third task
F
Complete the
phrases using the words in the box.

1 1m  I don't agree because ... 5 Yes, 1 agree with you. 2 I agree up to a , but ... 6 Well, I agree to a  extent, but ...
3 That's a  point, and . 7 You right, and 4 1  to disagree with you.
G
Write each phrase
in Exercise F in the correct column in the table.

agree

partly agree, partly disagree

disagree

                                       Pa3aeJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycabltuume 5
  6b1CKa.3b1gauuÙ. Ycmanoaume coonwemcmeue Jteycòy
  BblCKC13b16aH11HJfU KWiCÒOU) 20601'Htueeo I — 5 u
  ymeepycòehlllfi.uu, ÒCIHHbLMU 6 cnucwe A — F. Kaycðyo õycay,
  ot503Haqwot10'1(' ymaepycòeHue, mo.'1bK0 oðtut pa.3. B aaðarauu
  ecntb oðHO autunee ymeep.wðeuue. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb
  ÒgaorÒb1. 3anecume coot' omaembl 6 maõaugy.

A. My parents
don't give me a lot of freedom. B. I would like to spend more time with my
parents. C. My parents put a lot of pressure on me to work hard. D. I have
learned a lot from talking to my parents.

Test 9

E. My parents don't agree with
my future plans. F. My parents try to choose my friends for me.

roBop¶11A111't

1

2                        3

4

5

Bbl yc.,qbltuume paaeoaop XO.3f1ÙKU òo.ua c
paõotlll-u-cmpoumeae.u. Onpeòenume, KClKUe 11.3
npueeÒëHHblX ymoepYòeH11ð1 Al-A6 coomaemcmoyom
coòepyamuo mt'Kt•ma (I ),         He coomeemcmayom (2) u o       6
meKcme He cwaaaH0, mo ecmb Ha OCH06ClHUU meyccma He.Qb3fl ()amb HI'
nono.yumeJlbH020, Hil ompuuameJtbH0?0 omaema (3). Oõ6eÒume
Ht).uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?O ea.uu gapuawna omeema. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanuctb
ÒBCIYòb1.

           Al     There is a large
garden at the back of the house.
                                   l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKœre He cw,13tlH0
          A2     Recent bad weather
has caused the problem.
                                   l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO              3) B •rek'CTe He CKt13t1HO
A3 The builder says the work will take
a long time. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B •reKCTe He CKa3t1H0
          A4    The home-owner is
planning to build a new house.
                                   l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKcre He CKagaHO
          A5     The builder suggests
that the home-owner put her ideas on paper.
                                    l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO               3) B TeKCTe He CKa3tiHO
          A6    The home-owner knows
a good architect.
1)
BepHO          2)
He13epH0          3) B TeKCTe He cKagaH0

Bbl ycabltuume BblCKa3b16UHUS1 :uoðeú e
CCUII pau111¼HbLr cumya«unr. (_)moenwne Ha gonpocbl no coòepyamuo
6btcya.3b1aanuñ1, dblõpaa npeòaoyceH11bLM gapuaumoe
omeema. B aaòaH11fLr Ä7-Ä13 oõeeòume
I'll(þpy 1, 2 uau 3, oÕ03Haqayou0'h0 omeem, KO'110PblÙ
ßŒu Kaycemcfl Hauóoaee eePHbL',t. Bbl ycatbtluume
Kaycòoe 6blCKa.3bleaH1te ðeaycòbl.

You will hear a woman talking about a sport she is involved in. Why is
the sport not more popular?
1)   The media tend to ignore it.
2)
Her team rarely
wins any matches.

Test
  9

3)

Young people aren't interested
in it.

AS

You will hear a radio commercial
  for a hotel. What is special about it?
I) The rooms are very cheap.
2)
  The food is
  very good.
3)
  The facilities
  are very impressive.

A9

You will hear a man talking about a
  decision by his local town council. How does the man feel about it?
1)
  He disapproves
  of it.
2)
  He is
  indifferent to it. 3) He approves of it.

AIO

You will hear a woman talking to a
  colleague. What is the problem with his work?
1)
  He often
  arrives late.
2)
  He often leaves
  early.
3)
  He takes long
  breaks during the day.

All

You will hear a man talking about his hobby. What does he
  enjoy about it?
I) creating something beautiful
2)
  spending time
  on his own
3)
  displaying his
  things in galleries

A12

You will hear a woman talking about a recent accident. What
  was unexpected?
1)
  the other
  driver's reaction
2)
  the policeman's
  reaction
3)
  her own
  reaction

A13

You will hear a man's opinion on whether 16-year-olds
  should be allowed to vote. What does he think about it?

l) He disapproves of the
idea.
2)   He supports the idea.
3)   He is uncertain about it.

no Bl Il Al-A13 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CB01f OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB
ObPATLITE BHMMAHME, qmo omeenlbl nu aaòaH11f1 131, Al-A13
  pacnoaaeŒomcH 6 pa,3HbLr qacmnr ã1ClHK•a. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6
  HidYHeñ1 qacmu rî7é1HKa. TIPI/ nepe,qoce omgemoe 6
  3ClÒaHUll Bl tîYK6b1 aanucbtgatomc•H õet3
  npoõeaot$ u 3HüK06 npenuyumu.q.

                                             Pa3aeJ1          I-ITe1-me

YcmaH06ume
  coomaemcmaue me,vt A — G moccma.u I — 6. 3anecume c6011 omeembl e
  maõaugy.

A. EASY PICTURES B. EXPENSIVE MISTAKES
c. FUTURE POSSIBILITIES
D.     DREAM
PAINTER
E.      ANIMAL
ARTIST
F.       SHOCKING
STYLE

           3                     4

6

and
a
art
years' artists

Test 9 á

G.

STOLEN PAINTINGS

I
2
3
4
5

It was the kind of
  event that every museum has nightmares about. In 2004, two robbers threatened
  guards at the Munch Museum in Norway and took two Of Edvard Munch's pictures:
  The Scream Madonna. Munch was Norway's best-known artist and the two works
  are worth about $19 million together.
Congo's art is bought and sold by
  collectors. His paintings have been sold at auction for around $8,000 each.
  It doesn't sound out of the ordinary, until you hear that Congo was actually
  a chimpanzee. He produced abstract paintings in the late 1950s and a number
  of collectors are interested in his bright colours and bold splashes of
  paint. Congo died in 1964.
Jackson Pollock
  was famous for his action pictures, although many people say that it didn't
  take much artistic skill to produce them. Pollock would hang a bucket of
  paint on the end of a piece of rope over a canvas. As the bucket swung over
  the canvas, paint would fall through a hole, creating painting without
  Pollock having to do anything.
When buying a work of art, it's very
  important to be sure that it is genuine. Buying a fake work Of can cost you a
  lot of money that you will probably never get back. Some people make a living
  from copying famous works and selling them to unsuspecting collectors. To
  make sure that never happens to you, always have paintings you are thinking
  of buving checked out by an expert.
In these days of rapid change, it's
  not easy to predict what kind of art we will be enjoying in 50

time. Of course, traditional art and
abstract art will still be around. However, we may find that prefer to
work with computers more and more because of the control it gives them. We may
even discover that computers are capable of
creating art on their own.
6 In 19th century
France, a group of artists appeared who are known as the Impressionists. Their
art was very new and many people were shocked by their paintings when they
first appeared. They were full of light, energy and ordinary life while the art
world was used to formal paintings. Not everyone welcomed this new view of art
at the time, although Impressionists such as Monet and Cézanne are very
popular today.

Tlpoqumaùme
vmaep.ycòeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeòyouguðl .3t1 HtLMU me,tccm
Ycmcmoaume coomaemcmaue ate.ycðy ymaep.ycÒeH11f1.M11 u
coòepyccmue.u meKcma. Hanutuume Igucþpy 1 — ec:lll
ymaepycòeuue oepuoe, u tgucþpy O — ecatl ymoepycðeuue
neoepltoe. 3aHecume ('6011 omaembl d maõautcy.

I People lived in Machu Picchu from 1440 to 1911.
2
  The Incan Empire included the cehole of modern-day Chile.
3
  The Incas lived in a simple society and only had basic skills.
4      IVE
  know Why the Incas disappeared.
5
  Pizzarro
  persuaded Atahualpa to join his army.
6
  The Spanish beat the Incas because they had better weapons.

High in the mountains of Peru can be found the ruins of the city of
  Machu Picchu, Built in around 1440, it was inhabited for nearly a hundred
  years and then was forgotten until it rediscovered in 1911. What is the story
  behind this amazing 'lost city'?
It was once lived in by a people called the Incas. The Incas started as
  a small group of people in the twelfth century AD, who built a city called
  Qosqo. From the middle of the fifteenth century onwards, the Incas began to
  take control of other They built a large empire, which included the
  modern-day countries of Peru, Ecuador and Bolivia and parts of Argentina,
  Chile and Colombia. They had a very developed society and were expert
  builders, engineers, artists and farmers. There one reason why they never
  grew further as a civilisation and why they disappeared: the Spanish arrived
  in South America
1532,
Francisco Pizzarro, a Spanish
  explorer, landed in Peru with hundred men, not nearly enough to beat the
  Incas. However, invited the ruler of the Incas, Atahualpa, to a meeting and
  captured him, later killing him and many members of the family. More people
  joined Pizzarro's army and the Incas gradually defeated. They lasted for
  approximately 40 years fought back against the Spanish, but the Incas were no
  match for European technology. Thev had never seen guns and cannons before
  and had nothing similar. The last Inca leader, Tupac Amaru, was finally
  killed in 1472.
When the Incas left Machu Picchu,
  nobody else knew it was there. In 1911, an American historian named Hiram
  Bingham was led to the site by people living in the area. Today, so many
  tourists visit Machu Picchu each year that there is a real that this amazing
  place could be damaged.

was

1

2

Test 9

[Ipoqumaùme
meKcm 11 6b1/10AHume aaòaH11H A14-A20, otî60Òfi
I'll(þpy 1, 2, 3 11,111 4, coomeemcmayouovo H0Jtepy 6btÕpaHHO?0
tsa•tu dapuanma omaema.

The first time I
saw Ben was when his family moved in next door. It was a hot, sunny day and
we'd heard that the new neighbours were arriving that day. Our old neighbours,
the Sharpes, had moved out a couple of months before and, to be honest, we had
not been sorry to see them go. They were an argumentative couple and once a
month there would be one or other of them at the door, going on about noise, or
our cat, or where Dad parked his car. We were all hoping that whoever moved in
next would make a bit more of an effort to get on.

That morning, Mum and Dad were
both busy on various projects of their own. With Mum, it was her ongoing
attempt to turn herself into her idea of a traditional housewife, at least for
a weekend. She was going through a baking phase so she spent hours in the
kitchen making biscuits that were either too hard or too sweet for even my
young taste. She had a successful career as a lawyer so she didn't take her
domestic failure too badly. Dad was decorating one of the bedrooms. I was cycling
up and down the street, looking for the removal van every time I reached the
corner and turned back. I wanted to be the first to see it so that I could then
be the one to dash inside with the news. Finally, a large green van with the
words 'Baxter's Removals' in gold lettermg on the side turned into our street,
followed by a blue car. I can't say that that was the moment when I first saw
Ben, although I suppose I registered that there were people in the car. I was
too busy dropping my bicycle by the side of the road and running into the house
shouting, 'They're here! They're here!'
Mum wiped her hands
on a towel and said, 'Yes, Katv. Let them settle in, though. We'll give them a
few hours before we start bothering them, shall we?' I felt disappointed that
her reaction wasn't more like my own. I ran back outside and down our garden
path to the front gate. I stood on the gate, watching. By this time, the
removal van and the car had both pulled up next door and two large workmen had
begun to open up the back of the van. Inside were neatly packed items of
furniture. The family had also got out of the car and were looking up at the
house as if they'd never seen it before, although Dad said he'd seen them
looking round when they were thinking of buying it. The man was tall and
dark-skinned, while the woman was very beautiful and looked younger than my own
mum. They were clearly enjoying the moment of arriving at a new place. A boy of
about my own age stood between them, looking at me. He didn't smile.
They unlocked the
door and went inside, the workmen following with the first of their belongings.
I watched for a while as they came back and forth with boxes, banging them down
noisily, occasionally pointing to tell each other where to put things. I had an
odd feeling of being watched and something made me look up. At one of the
windows stood the boy, looking down at me. I smiled and he disappeared into the
room. I had had such high hopes, and now it seemed that it was going to take a
lot of hard work to make friends. I sighed and watched the workmen a little
longer. Just as I was thinking of going inside to see how Dad was getting on, I
heard a small voice behind me.
'I'm Ben. Hello.'
I turned to see the
boy standing behind me.

Test 9

A14

According to the writer,
  the Sharpes I) were very noisy neighbours.
2)
  often found
  things to complain about.
3)
  were sad to
  leave the street.
4)
  came round with
    advice.

-AIS

The writer says her mother
I) is annoyed that she has to work so much.
2)
  doesn't know
  what her child likes to eat.
3)
  tries to do
  something she isn't very good at.
4)
  thinks that
  more women should have careers.

uA16

Judging from the text, the word 'dash' in paragraph 2
  probably means
l) run very quickly. 2) write something down.
3)
  make up a
  story.
4)
  become excited.

Al 7

When the van finally arrives, the writer 1) is eager to
  tell her family what is happening.
2)
  tries to follow
  it on her bicycle.
3)
  sees Ben for
  the first time.
4)
  falls over and
  hurts herself.

AIS

The writer's mother
l) decides to go to meet the new neighbours.
2)
  feels as
  excited as the writer does.
3)
  tells her to go
  and help the neighbours move in.
4)
  suggests that
  she waits before going to introduce herself.

A19

The family stand outside the house
  looking at it because 1) they are not sure they're at the right house.
2)
  they are happy
  to be moving into a new house.
3)
  it's the first
  time they have seen it.
4)
  they are trying
  to decide whether to buy it or not.

A20

The writer looks up to see the boy
  at the window because I) she hears a loud noise.
2)
  the workmen
  point in that direction.
3)
  she hears a
  voice from that direction.

4) she feels someone is
looking at her.

pa.3Hb1.r
  qacnlftx t;aamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaawca.
  17pu nepeHoce omgemoa 6 aaòaH11fLr B2, B3 õYKßb1
  aanucblBŒomcR õea npoõeaog u .3HZlK06 npenunaHllH.

                              Pa3aeJ1          rpaMMaTHKa JleKCHKa

 Test
  9]

Ilpoqumaùme maccm
3anoanume nponycxu B npeòaoyceH11Œzr not) Ht).uepa.uu B4-B11
coomeemcmayot"ll.uu d)0PMŒvt11 CJZ06, HaneqamaHHb1.r
.3aaqaßHb1-MU Õycaa.uu cnpaaa om ycaycÒO?O
YIPeÒmyeHllfl.

B4
B5
B6
B8
BIO
Bil

Shoes
It's difficult to imagine life
  without shoes. Ever since people first started to make clothes, we  many different ways of protecting
  our feet. TRY
Early shoes
   out of leather.
In those days, people's shoes were much simpler than are today.
They didn't have a heel and some shoes  very long toes     HAVE to show
  how important the wearer was.
In colder countries,
  moccasins           people's feet warm. KEEP This was  important in warmer countries than
  in colder  1-rrrLE countries, so open-toed sandals were more popular there.
Until 1790,
  you  fasten your shoelaces, because they hadn't CANNOT been
  invented yet! It was in that year that an Englishman came up with the idea
  for the first time.
Another thing we have today that
  people in the past  is      NOT DO different shoes for our left and right
  feet. They appeared in the middle of the 19th century.

Ilpoqumañme
npueeòeHHb1ù Hil.ye meK•cm [Ipeoõpaayúme cv106a,
HaneqamaHHb1e aa?JIC16Hb1.MU õycea.uu nocae H0Jtepot3 B 124318 maK,
qmoÕbl OHU epaat.uamuqecwu u JWKC1tqeCKU coomøemcmß06aau coòepyamuo
meŒccma. 3anoamume nponycwu 110.1VqeHHbLUU C.106ŒUU. Kaycòblù
nponycK coomcemcmevem omòeJ1bHo„uy aaðamoo 11.3 epynnbl B12-B18.

B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
BIT
BIS

London is one of the great cities of the world, and there
    is evidence that people lived in the area in      times. However, the
    history of the city really began with the of the Romans in 43 AD.
They built a wooden bridge over
    the River Thames. This bridge was very and soon the city of Londinium (as
    it was called) grew
around it. The city
    played an important role in the  life of the country, as it does today. The          of
    London since then
has been incredible, and the
    modern city is home to about 7.5 million From small beginnings nearly two
    thousand years ago,
London has become a place of                         importance.

HISTORY
ARRIVE
USE
ECONOMY
GROW
INHABIT
GLOBE

Test
  9

npoqumaùme me,zccm c nponyæcaatll,
  OÕ03HaqeHHbLU11 Ho-uepa-&tu A21-A28. 3mu 110-uepa
  coon16emcn16.yŒom .421-A28, o Komopblx npeòcma(3aeHb1 60.3MOYCHbte
  eapualffllbl omeemoe. Oõßeòume HOMep 6b1ÕpaHHoeo
  BCLUII aapuawna omæma.

Ashley Gray
  unlocked the door to the garage, swung it open and A21  the lights on. A drum kit sat in
  the middle of the garage. Next to it there was a keyboard on a stand and to
  the side were three speakers. Ashley's group, Cat's Eye, had been using the
  garage to practise for a few months now. Ashley opened his guitar case and
  took his guitar out. It had been expensive and he was
A22  of the fact that he had earned the money to buy it himself
  without any help from his parents. He plugged it into an amplifier and began
  to tune the strings.
'Did you get my e-mail?' Ashley turned
  to see where the voice had come from and saw Yasmin, the band's drummer, in
  the doorway.
'Yes,' he replied. 'I printed out the song and A23  at it briefly. Seems okay.' In
  fact,
Ashley knew that it was one of the best that Yasmin
  had written, but he wasn't going to A24 it straight away.
'Where's Mike?' asked Yasmin. Ashley shrugged his shoulders. Mike was
  always late for practice, but he was the best keyboard player they knew. For
  now, his position in the band was safe, but Ashley was beginning to find his
  attitude annoying. Each time it happened, Mike A25 that it wouldn't happen
  again, but it always did. Ashley had even considered putting an ad for a new
  member in the local paper, but hadn't gone through with it. The three of them
  A26 on reasonably well together and they were beginning to build a small but
  loyal group of fans. Ashley had a feeling that real success was just around
  the corner and he had no A27 of doing anything that would threaten that
  possibility.
The sound of a motorbike engine told Ashley
  andYasmin that Mike had arrived. A moment later, he strode into the garage.
'You're
  A28  time for once,' Yasmin said, and smiled. Mike smiled back.
'Yeah. My
  watch must be fast.' A minute later, they were playing the new song and
  Ashley knew that it was going to be big.

A21                  1) made                  2) operated           3) turned              4) opened
A22                   1) satisfied               2)
happy                 3) pleased             4) proud
A23                   1) viewed                2) observed            3)
glanced             4) glimpsed
A24                   1) confess                2)
allow                 3) agree                 4) admit
A25                  I) gave                     2)
put                    3) said                  4) took
A26 1) went 2) got 3) brought 4) came A27 1) plan 2)
intention 3) idea 4) aim
A28                  1) at                        2) with                  3)
on                    4) into

no        134-1318, A21-A28 HE
  3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOII OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, timo on16en1b1 Ha
  3CIÒCIH11f1 B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacnoaaecuomcfl 6 pa.3HbLr Ltacnmx
  õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHbl B HilYCHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa.
  Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoß

Test
  9

                                              Pa3neJ1
       IIHCbMO

                 CT,
  C2 ucn0Jlb3Yùme WIAHK OTBETOB N2.
[7pu Bbl'10JIHeH11U aaðaH11ù CI u C2 ocoõoe
  6HlL.uaHlde oõpamume Ha mo, qmo eatuu omeenlbl õyðvm moabK0 no aanucmt, B K'7AHKE OTBETOB Y2. HilKaK1te
  aanucu qepH0611R•a He õyòym yqun1b1e,aÐ1bcf1 .9Kcnepmo.u.
Tlpu aanomtotuu
  Ik7AHKA OTBETOB ycaycume cnaqaaa H0.uep CI, C2 aamt'M aanutuume C60ù
  omaem Ecau cmop0Hbt t5aaHR•a Heòocmamot1H0, Obi *toyeme
  ucno,lbaoøamb ()pyeyo cmopouy õaawca.

You have
20 minutes to do this task.
This is part of a letter from
Claudia, your German pen friend.
Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many people argue that ordinary people can do a lot to help the
environment, including recycling materials and preventing waste. However,
this depends on towns providing facilities for recycling and educating people
on the need to help the environment, which some people think is too expensive,
Do you
think your town does enough to            Use the following plan support people
who want to help the        I. Introduction (State the problem).
              environment?                                                            2.
Express your opinion and give reasons for it.
Write 200-250 words.                                               3.
Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.
4. Conclusion.

                                     Pa3aeJ1
      1'0BopeHne

Bbl noayqume Kapmot1KY, Ha Komopoù mpu aac)01H11+1   ycmH0?0
  omaema: C3 — meuamuqeocoe MOHOJIO?UtWCKOe 6b1Ci•ca.3b16aHue,
C4 — c)uaaoe c lgeabR)
  OÕ.ueHCl cþeucmuqeucoðl uucþop.ltatgueù, C5 —
  c)uaat)? c lge.tbJ0 ot;.uena
OLßHO¼Hoðl llHcþopua«ueÙ.
  OKOHtlCtHUe ,tcayòozo aaÒaH11H onpeòeaqem
  9K.3Œueuamop. Bo epe.MH npoeeòeH11H qacmu 3K.3Œ$teua
  uÒem nocn10HHHZlH aanucb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

3aaaH11S1
3K3aMeHveMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a 2-minute talk on
hobbies. Remember to say:
•      what hobbies are popular today
•      what hobbies you have
•      how much time you spend on your
hobbies
•      why you enjoy those hobbies
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you
have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You would like to buy a
ticket to a pop concert this weekend by your favourite singer. You need a seat
on the balcony and can only spend £15.
Ask the
box-office attendant questions about:
•      available tickets
•      the ticket price
•      the length of the concert
The teacher
will play the part of the boxoffice attendant and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      buy a ticket on the balcony
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
Your class at school is planning a school trip. You and a
friend have been asked to decide where to go. You can go to a:
•      museum
•      factory
•      sports stadium
•      beach
• farm
The teacher
will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:

discuss all the
options take an active part in the conversation and be polite

come up with
ideas

give good reasons
 find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement
Section 1 Listening: second task
A     Listen
and circle the number or phrase that has a similar meaning to what you hear.
I 5.30 am/ 4.30 am
2
6.45
/ 7.15
3   5.30 / 6.30
4
8.40
9.20
5
4.35
/ 5.25
6
3
am / 3 pm
7
Il
am / Il pm
  8 under 300 / under 400
 9 under £500 under £600
10
650 / 6.5
11 91/2 / 91/4
 12 2.4 / 2.25
13
81/4
/ 8 3/4
14
2.3
/ 2/3
15
3.4
/ 3/4
Section 2
Reading: third task
B  Quickly
read the text on page 118 and make notes to answer these questions.
I  Who does
Julie work for?
2
What
problem has Julie had for several days?
3  What time
is Julie's appointment?
4
Is
that while Julie is supposed to be at work?
5
What
does Mrs Worthington notice when she looks at Julie?
6  Does Mrs
Worthington let Julie go to her appointment?
C

Read
the text again and find words or phrases that have a similar meaning to these
words and phrases.
I  very fast
2  the thing
you should view as most important
3
difficult
4
just
5
very
strong, very serious 6 probable
7  strength,
power
8  formed the
wrong opinion about
Section 3 Grammar and
vocabulary:
first task
D  Read through
the first task on page 120 and answer these questions for each item B4-B11.
I  (B4) What
kind of word usually comes before the word 'than'?
a comparative I superlative adjective or adverb
2
(B5) Complete the table for the verb 'do' when it is a main
verb.
3   (B6) What
is the main verb of this sentence?
wear I dress
4   (B 7) What
tense do we use to talk about general truths?
present simple I present progressive
5
(B8) What tense
do we use to talk about a completed action at a specific time in the past?
past simple I past progressive
6
(B9) Complete the
table for the verb
'bring'.
bare infinitive        bring past simple past participle
7
(BIO) Complete
the table for the verb
'be'.
bare infinitive        be past simple
past participle
8
(Bll) Which tense
do we often use with
the word 'now'?
present simple I present progressive
Section 4 Writing: second task
Read the second task on page 122.
Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F).
When you write your composition, you should:
1    make sure you answer the question.
2    make a plan before you start writing.

3    copy whole sentences from the
question.
4    use informal grammar and vocabulary.
5    use words and phrases such as
'however', 'such as', etc.
6    express your own opinion in the
conclusion.
7

give examples where possible.
8    present a logical argument. 9 always
use very short and simple sentences.
10 make sure your handwriting is readable.
Il check your work carefully for mistakes at the end.
Section 5 Speaking: third task
F
Write a word from
the box in each gap to complete these phrases.
about • best
• do • don't idea • let's sure • thing • think • wonder
1
1 if we should .
2
Maybe the best  would be to ...
3
Why  we ... ?
4
What do you think

5
I think the  thing might be to .
6
I'm not  I agree, to be honest. 7 I don't  we should .
8
I'm not convinced
it's a good  because ...
9
 think about
10    So,  we agree?
G
Work in pairs to
carry out the activity below. Use the phrases from Exercise F to help you.

 You and your partner are friends.
You have another friend, called Catherine, whose birthday is next week. You
want to get her a present together. You can get:
    • a necklace
    a CD
    a book
Discuss the possibilities. Try to
reach agreement at the end.

Test 10
Pa3aeJ1

Bbl
  ycalbltuume 5 BblCKTh3b16CIHUÙ. Ycmanoaume coomeemcmeue .ueycc)y
  dblCKaab16(1H11fiJfll eooopmgeeo 1 — 5 u
  ymeepyòeuumtu, C)CIHHbL1tU (3 cnucxe A — F. Mcnoa1b3Yùme
  Kaycòyo õYK6)'s oõ03Haqawugyo .ymaepycòeuue,
  mœ1bR0 oðun paa. B aaðauuu ecntb oðHO autuuee
  ymeep.ycðenue. Bbl ycabtluume aanucb ÒoaycÒbl. 3anecume
  ('6011 ome,embl d maõautcv.

A. I'm always
very careful about what I eat. B. I don't eat any meat at all.
C. I don't
put on weight, even if I eat a lot. D. I'm trying to lose weight at the moment.

E. I always have a large
breakfast. F. I'm not a very healthy eater.

F0BopH11U1ñ

YTBepxneH11e

1

2

3                                4

5

Kaycue 11.3 ,'1P116eÒëHHbLV
  ymoepycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomeemcmøyom
  coòep.vcamøo mexcma (I), KCIKUe
He coomgemcmayom (2) u o LlëM
  6 meyccme ne c,çaaauo, mo ecmb Ha OCHOBCIHUII mexcma HW1b.3H ()amb Hid
  nono.ycumeJ1bHo¿o, Hil omt$ema (3).
  ()õaeòume H0Jtep 6btt5PCIHHO?0 6ŒM11 gapuanma omeema. Bbl
  ycvlblluume aanucb ()6ClYCÒbl.

Al The woman prefers Montreal to Vancouver. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B ereKC"re
He
A2 How much the flight costs might affect when the woman travels. I)
BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B •reK'c-re He cK"d3'dH0
         A3    There is a flight at
6.30 am on 10th September.
                                 I)
BePHO                2) HeBepH0              3) B TeKCTe He CKŽBIIHO
A4 The woman has spent the night in an airport before. I) BePHO 2)
HeBepH0 3) B TeKC"l'e He CKa3ŽIHO
         A5    The flight on 17th
September is more expensive than the flight the day before.
1)
BepHO    2)
HeBepHO          3) B TeKc•re He L'Ka3auo
         A6    The woman decides to
book flights that cost under £700.
                                 l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKcere He

Bbl
  ycJ1b11uume õeceðy mpenepa cþymõo„lbH0ù       c
  112POKOM. B aaðaH11f1.r A 7-A13 oõeeòume gucþpy 1, 2
  11.1113, coomoemcmayougyo 6b1õpaHH0.uy 6ŒU11 aapuamny omeema. Bbl
  yc„lbltuume aanucb c)ga.ycÒbl.

Mr Davenport wants to
1) give Adrian his training plan and schedule.
2) show Adrian around the football club.
3) talk to
Adrian about his new job at the club.
Adrian
is asked to
1)   inform Mr Davenport before giving an
interview.
2)   take an interest in what the media
says about him.
3)   always remember how famous and
successful he is.
Adrian
makes it clear that he
I) had not realised he
would have to give interviews.
2)
will talk to Mr
Davenport before talking to a journalist. 3) is not going to do any interviews
with journalists.
SIO If a company asks Adrian to advertise its product, Adrian I) must
discuss the situation with Mr Davenport first.
2)   must first make a new contract with
the football club.
3)   might want to benefit from Mr
Davenport's knowledge.
Al 1
Adrian doesn't need any more information about
l) his training schedule.
2)   his accommodation.
3)
the payment of
his salary.
A12 Mr
Davenport says they do not usually pay players
1)
in cash.
2)   by cheque.
3)   through their bank accounts.
A13 Adrian chooses to be paid every 1) week.
2)
two weeks.
3)   month.

110 Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  Ltmo omaembt Ha .3aÒaHUfl BI u Al-A13 pacnoaaewomcq 6 pa.3HbLt qacm.qx
  Õaamca. BI pacnoaoyeH0 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕJICIHKa. Ilpu
  nepeHoc•e ome,emoa 6 aaòcmuu BI õYK6bl t;ea
  npoõeJ106 u JHWC06 npenllHaH11H.

                                          Pa3neJ1        Llrrerme

Mcnoabayúme
  KW*CÒVIO t5ycay moat,K0 oÒuH paa. B aaðtmuu oÒ1ta
  me.'ta JIUIUHHH.

A. EXPENSIVE EQUIPMENT B. CONFUSING RULES
c. NO WINNERS OR LOSERS
D.     LEARNING
AND ENJOYMENT
E.      IN
CONTROL
F.       A
MAJOR EVENT
G.     A
DANGEROUS ACTIVITY
I In football and
rugby it's the 'referee', in tennis and cricket it's the 'umpire'. Whatever
name each sport decides to give to this particular person, their role is
essentially the same. They are in charge. They start and stop the game, they
make sure the players follow the rules, and thev have the power to make
decisions when there are disagreements between players on opposing teams. With
this power comes responsibility, however, and referees and umpires must be
equally fair to both teams.

No •rewra

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

The most important game in American football each year is the Super Bowl. This
is the final Of the National Football League, which is held either on the last
Sunday of January or the first Sunday of February. This championship game is so
popular in the States that it's always one of the most watched TV shows of the
year. At any one moment during the game, approximately 80 to 90 million
Americans are watching it on TV!
3     Motorcycle
racing has been popular with riders and spectators alike for about a hundred years.
The high speeds at which the riders go, however, can sometimes lead to
disaster. For example, on the Isle of Man, which is a small island between
England and Ireland, an annual motorcycle race called the Isle of Man has been
held since 1907. The roads and tracks which the riders race on are extremely
narrow, increasing the chances of accidents. Since the race started, almost 180
riders have been killed while racing there.
4     If
you ask most people why they choose to do a particular sport, they'll probably
tell you it's because it's fun and gives them pleasure. They might also say
that it helps keep them fit. Another major benefit of team sports such as
football, basketball, cricket and rugby is that they can teach us to work
together as a group. This is particularly useful for children, who can then use
the skills they have learnt while doing sports in their working and social
lives as adults.
5     Although
most sports are competitive, involving individuals or teams trying to be better
than their opponents, recreational fishing is quite different. Whether you're
salt-water fishing in the sea, or fresh-water fishing in a river or lake,
whether vou're on your own or with other people, fishing is about relaxation,
enjoyment and the occasional moment of excitement. There are no prizes for
catching the most or the biggest fish, and no one goes home at the end of the
day thinking they've lost. It's not that kind of sport.
6     The
games snooker and pool, both of which involve hitting balls into pockets on a
table covered with material, are extremely popular in the UK, and many pubs
have either a pool or a snooker table. If you want to play at home, though, it
can be costly. A full-size professional snooker table can cost several thousand
pounds — the price of a new car, in other words — and a good 'cue', which is
the name of the stick used to hit the white ball, can cost several hundred
pounds.
Test 10

Ilpoqumaùme
ymeepYðeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeòyouguù aa HILUII meyccm YcmaH06ume
coomeemcmeue Meycòy _vn16epYðeHllflAtll u coòepyaktuey,t
mexcma. Hamuuume Igucþpy 1 — ec:lll _vmaepycòutue eepnoe, u
I'll(þpy O — ecau ymeepycòeHue Heeepnoe. 3cmecume ceou omaenlbl 6
maõau«y.

1
  Roald book
2
  Matilda's is usually her.
3
  Mrs to parents
4
  Both children film
5
  The different book.
6
  The the famous

Dahl wrote
a called Matilda.
brother Mikey very kind
to
Trunchball is nicer
Matilda
than her are.
adults and will find this funny.
is in a very style to the
person who wrote screenplay is also a film
director.
Several of Roald Dahl's children's books, including James and the Giant
Peach and Charlie and the Chocolate Factory, have been made into successful
films.
The film
Matilda, directed by and starring comic actor Danny DeVito, is based on the
Roald Dahl book of the same name and is perhaps the most successful adaptation
of them all.
Mara Wilson
stars as Matilda, a sweet and intelligent six-and-ahalf-year-old girl whose
parents (Danny DeVito and Rhea Perlman) treat her terribly. When they're not
ignoring her, thev're mean and rude to her, and make her life a misery, as does
her horrible brother Mikey (played by Brian Levinson).
Matilda is desperate to go
to school and eventually her parents send her to Crunchem Hall, where the evil
headmistress Mrs Trunchball (brilliantly played by Pam Ferris) treats her worse
— if that's possible — than her family does at home.
Matilda has
friends at school, though, including her kind teacher Miss Jenny Honey (played
by Embeth Davidtz), and she soon discovers she has some strange powers which
enable her to fight back against the people who want to harm her.
Although
Matilda, which was originally released in 1996, is a highly amusing children's
movie, much of the humour will appeal to adults too and the film is extremely
well directed and acted. As a director, DeVito manages to capture completely
the tone and stvle of the original book. Indeed, this is one of the rare
occasions where the film of a book is equally good, if not better. The
screenplay was written by Nicholas Kazan, son of the famous film director Elia
Kazan.

1

2

           3                    4

              5                         6

The film is
also known as Roald Dahl's Matilda in some countries.

Test 10

17poqumaùme mewcm u 6btnoauume
3K1òaH1ffl A14-A20, oõß0ðfl 1411Cþpy 1, 2, 3 Will
4, coomeemcn16Y0110'10 Ho.uepy 6b1õpaHH0?0 ea.uu eapuamna omeema.

Although Julie had been with Mrs Worthington just three days, she had
  already learnt that her boss was the kind of person one had to be careful
  with. Her changes of mood could be rapid, she definitely did not tolerate
  failure, laziness or poor work and she firmly believed that everyone's
  highest priority should be their work for the company. Julie was enjoying her
  job as Mrs Worthington's personal secretary, but she knew that today would be
  tough.
For several
  davs, Julie had been experiencing toothache. At first, it was merely a minor
  annoyance that could be ignored. 'It'll probably go away by itself,' Julie
  told herself. 'If not, I'll see the dentist when I'm more settled here at
  work. It's not that urgent.'
It didn't
  disappear, however, and after an extremely uncomfortable night, Julie awoke
  to severe dental pain. 'That's just what I need,' she said to herself. 'Maybe
  I can get a dentist's appointment for this evening, after work.'
Julie called
  the dentist's. 'I'm afraid the only time the dentist has available today is
  at 3.30 pm this afternoon,' said the receptionist. Julie had to make an
  immediate decision. 'I'll take it,' she said. The question was, how was Mrs
  Worthington going to react? Would she say, 'Of course you can leave early,
  Julie. In fact, leave at lunchtime and don't come back until you're
  completely better.'? Julie knew a far more likely response would be something
  along the lines of: 'Well, that really is most inconvenient. Couldn't you
  have arranged to see the dentist in your own time? You have to think about
  the company as well, you know. We can't all take time off whenever we feel
  like it. We'd never get any work done if we all spent the day running around
  seeing doctors and dentists. Can't you change the time of your appointment?'
The pain was increasing
  in intensity, though, and Julie knew she had to see a dentist today. If the
  only solution was to leave work early and face Mrs Worthington's displeasure,
  then so be it.
'Here's your coffee, Mrs Worthington,' said Julie, as
  she went into her boss' office for the first time that morning.
'Thank you, Julie,' said Mrs Worthington, without
  looking up. 'Don't forget I need those reports typed up by three o'clock at
  the latest. I've got a meeting with Mr Price this afternoon.'
'Yes, Mrs Worthington. I've nearly
  finished them. Umm , .. Sorry, Mrs Worthington, but I wonder if I could ask
  you something. It's quite important.'
'What is it, Julie?' She looked up from the documents she'd been
  studying, and without giving Julie a chance to reply, said: 'Oh my goodness!
  What's happened to your face? It's all swollen on one side. Are you all
  right?'
'I've
  got really bad toothache, Mrs Worthington. I called the dentist and tried to
  make an appointment for this evening but the only time he can see me is at
  half past three and I know that would mean leaving early but I don't know
  what else .
'Stop!' said Mrs Worthington. 'I quite understand. These things have to
  be dealt with or they only get worse, don't they? Get it sorted out, as
  quickly as possible.' 'Thank you, Mrs Worthington.'
'Do you think you can work this morning, Julie? If
  you can't, tell me and we'll find a solution. If vou can, just finish those
  reports as quickly as you can and then go home. Have you taken anything for
  it, by the way?'
'No, I haven't. I think I'd better
  wait as the dentist will probably have to give me an anaesthetic and you have
  to be a bit careful, don't you? But, yes. I can definitely stay and finish
  the reports. It's not that bad.'
'Well, it looks bad enough. I do appreciate it, Julie. I
  really do.'
As Julie returned to her desk, she wondered if she hadn't
  misjudged Mrs Worthington. 'I couldn't have asked for a more understanding
  person to work for — this morning, at least,' she said to herself, and
  smiled, despite the pain.

no        B2, B3 U
  A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE 11EPEHECTn OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB   !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaenlbl Ha 3aÒCIH11H B2, B3 u A14-A20
  pacno.Qt1?ŒomcH B pa.3Hb1X qacmnx t5aamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 6
  HUYCHeÙ qacmu õaamca. Ilpu nepeHoce omeem06 B aaòammr
  B2, B3 õYK6b1 aanucbtacnomcfl õe.3 npoõe.106 u .3HCIK06
  npenunaH11f1.

Tesl
10

A14

Julie knows that Mrs Worthington
l) thinks all of her staff are lazy and bad at their work.
2)
  is only in a
  good mood for a few minutes each day.
3)
  thinks that
  Julie is not hard-working enough.
4)
  wants Julie to
  put her work before everything else.

315

When Julie says 'That's just what I need', she
l) means the opposite of what she says.
2)
  is being
  optimistic about the situation.
3)
  is trying to
  pretend she is okay.
4)   suggests she has found a solution.
Julie expects Mrs Worthington to respond by I) suggesting Julie sees a
  doctor instead.
2)
  allowing Julie
  to leave work early.
3)
  criticising
  Julie for being selfish.
4)
  telling Julie
  to stop complaining.

SA17

Mrs
  Worthington doesn't look at Julie because she is busy I) drinking a cup of coffee.
2)
  talking to Mr
  Price.
3)
  typing some
  reports.
4)
  looking at some
  documents.

LAI 8

Mrs Worthington interrupts Julie to
1)
  give her
  permission to see the dentist.
2)
  tell her to
  leave the building immediately.
3)
  express her
  displeasure at what she said.
4)
  find out some
  more information from her.

i819

Mrs Worthington asks Julie whether she 1) can think of a solution to the
  problem.
2)
  has taken any
  medicine for the pain.
3)
  has already
  finished typing the reports.
4)
  can tell her
  what work has to be done.

ŽA2()

When Julie leaves Mrs Worthington's office, she
l) feels that she hadn't misjudged Mrs Worthington after
  all.
2)
  wonders why
  she'd misjudged Mrs Worthington so badly.
3)
  recognises some
  good qualities in Mrs Worthington.
4)
  wishes Mrs
  Worthington had been more understanding.

Tlpoqumañme
  npueeðeHHb11i HilYCe    npeoõpaayùme
  ca.oaa, HaneqamaHHbte t5YK6Œ8f11 nocae HOMÚ'POB
  B12-B18 maK, qmoÕbl OHU epa-wtamuqecK11 u neKC11tWCKU coomgemcmeoeaau
  coòep.ycaH1t+0 me,zccma. 3anoamtme nponycKll caogaatll.
  Kaycòblù nponycK coomaemcmavem omòevQbH0J1.v
  .3aòaHl/*0 epynnbl B12-B18.

Test
  10

Do you have to wear a uniform at school or can you wear
  what you like?

Many people believe that uniforms are         than casual
  clothes for children at school.
Uniforms remind the children that they have to follow rules
  at school.

GOOD

Casual clothes                             this.

NOT
  DO

B6

With all the children at school           the
  same clothes, children from rich families dress the same way as children from
  poorer families,

WEAR

A uniform also           a feeling that everyone at the
  same school is part of the same community.

CREATE

B8

In the 1960s and 1970s, many schools in Britain     having
  a school uniform because of the expense for parents.

STOP

B9

Since then, however, a number of these schools      uniforms
  back.
Their new uniforms are more comfortable and more
  fashionable than

BRING

BIO

uniforms                            forty years ago.
They're so popular that many of the head teachers at
  schools without

BE

Bll

uniforms                             now
  about bringing uniforms back there too.

THINK

                           Pa3neJ1
      rpaMMaTHKa W JleKCWKa

Ilpoqumaúme
  meKcm 3anoamune nponycKt1 npeòaoyceuunr not) H0Jtepaatu B4-B11    cþOPJta.Mll celOB,
  HaneqamaHHb1-v 3aaqa6Hb1.M11 ÕVKea.U11 cnpaea om KaycÒ020
  npeòao.yceH11f1.

School
Uniforms

Test 10

Ilpoqumaùme
moccm c nponycycaM11, OÕ03HaqeHHbLUU HO.uepŒuu A21-Ä28. 3mu
H0Jtepa coomeemcmcvwm aaÒaH11fLU .421-A28, d KomopbLr
npeòcmaœl&tbt 60X1tOYCHbte aapuahtmbl omeemoe.
Otîeeðume H0.uep 6b1ÕpaHHOZ0 ga.',fll eapuamna 01116ema.

The main argument used
against the space programme is that the enormous amount of money it costs could
be better spent on solving problems such as poverty and environmental damage
here on Earth. Initially, this view A21  persuasive, particularly when
confronted with how huge the amounts of money we are talking about actually
are. Surely, the argument goes, if, instead of sending hundreds of billions of
dollars up into space for a pointless walk on the Moon or a few glossy colour
photographs of Mars, we channelled the funds into A22  projects on our own planet, we could
solve all the world's problems in about as short a time as it A23 for the space shuttle to circle the
globe.
How appealing and — perhaps sadly — how untrue. The fallacy of that
argument is in the idea that all of the money allotted to the space programme
is wasted in space. It isn't. None of the money goes into space at A24  . It stays right here on Earth and
is fed back into the economv. Take the astronauts and tens of thousands of
other people who are involved in whatever way with the space programme. They
spend their salaries — and pay tax on them — here on Earth. That tax is used by
governments to do a number of important things: build hospitals and schools,
A25  pensions, pay for the police service
and, yes, fund the space programme. Take
the cost of all the spacecraft, the
technology inside them and the research that's done to create that technology.
All of that money goes to companies here on Earth, companies which pay tax if
they A26  a profit, and pay salaries to their workers, who then pay tax to the
government, which builds hospitals, etc.
Looking at it the other way round, what would happen if all the
governments in the world which have a space programme A27  their programmes down tomorrow?
Would they have a lot more money to spend on other things? Onlv for a very
short time, because along with the
A28                          savings
there would be enormous costs from the increased unemployment and

reduction in taxes received.
A21                 1) sees                     2) sounds             3)
views               4) hears
A22                   1) generous              2)
pleasant             3) worthwhile       4) optimistic
A23                  1) takes                    2)
needs                 3) lasts                  4) spends
A24                  1) once                    2) best                  3) last                   4) all
A25                 1) provide               2) donate               3)
contribute      4) sponsor
A26                  l) make                   2) build                 3)
construct         4) manufacture
A27                  1) finished               2)
ended                 3) turned               4) closed
A28                  1) urgent                2) immediate        3)
hurried            4) fast

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB
ObPATMTE BHJ4MAHIfE,
  qmo omeembl Ha B4-B18 11 A21-A28 pacnoaapa,romcq 6 pat3HbLr qacmm•
  ÕaaHKŒl. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb1 e HilYCHeÚ qacmu
  Õaamca. 111911 nepenoce ome,em06 6 aaòcmuŒLv B4-B 18
  tîVK6bt  tîe.3 npoõeaocs u
  3,tlClR06 npenunaH11f1.

                                         Pa3aeJ1
     TIVICbMO

         0111601106        Ha aaðauu.q CI, C2
  ucno-Qb3Yùme WIÄHK OTBETOB X2.
Ilpu BbtnovlHC'HUU
  aaðtmuù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHILVtCIHUC' oõpamume Ha mo,
  Limo gatuu omaenlbl õyòym o«eHU6an1bCH movibK0 no aanucxu,
  cðeaaHHb1.M B WIAHKE OTBETOB 'E2. flurccucue aanucu qepH0ßurca He
  õvòvm yttunlblßantbc•fl .9Kcnepmo.u.

aamuuume ceoù omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ
  cmop0Hbl Õaamca Heòocmamot1H0, Bbl euoyeme ucnoab.306an1b
  òpypyo cmop0HY t;aawca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.

Test 10

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

...Guess what! I'm ill with
  chickenpox and the doctor says / have to stay iM bedfor at (east the next two
  weeks. It's awful! Haveyou ever had to stay iM bedfor a (eng time becauseyou
  were ill'? How am lying topass the time?   bored! what can /        two weeks
  bed? I'm a             too. How    catch up?
Write
  soon,
Love,
Andrea

Write back
to Andrea answering her questions.
Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many young people go to university after leaving school. However, a
number of school-leavers feel that university is not for them and choose not to
go.
What can you
say for and against going to Use the following plan university? 1. Introduction
(State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments "for".
3.
Arguments
"against".
4.
Conclusion.
Test 10
                                Pa3aeJ1
       roBopeHvte

Bbl noayqume Kapmowcy, Ha
  Komopoù npeÒcmaeaeHb1 mpu aac)cmun omegema:
C3 — mewltamuqecwoe                                           6b1CKa,3b1eaH11e,
C4 — c)uaaop C            oõJteHð1
  cþcucmuqecK0ù llHcþopMa«ueð1, C5 — ÒuŒQ02
  C lge.'Zb10 or5MC?Ha
01ßHot1Hí)ù
  uutþop.uagueù. OKOHtlClHlle KaycÒO?O aaòaH11H
  onpeòeanem .9K3ŒueHamop. Bo ape.}tH npoaeðeHllH
  .Ðžnoù qacmu 3K.3ŒueŒ-ža nocm0HHHCIH aanucb Ha
  avò110Kaccemy.

3aaaH11¶
STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on where you live.
Remember
to say:
•      what kind of building (house, flat,
etc) you live in
•      who you live with
•      what the neighbourhood is like
•      whether you like where you live
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you
have finished. Then he/she Will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in an electronics
shop and are looking at the mobile phones. You want to buy a mobile phone which
costs not more than £100 and which you can use to take photographs.
Before making a decision,
ask the shop assistant about:
•
mobile phones
available
•
a camera being
included
•
other features
included
•

the cost
3K3aMeHyeMOro
The teacher
will play the part of the shop assistant and will speak first. Remember to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need  make a decision
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and your
friend have won a competition. The prize is some money to spend on equipment
for your school. You and your friend are discussing what to spend the money
on. You can afford:
•
a computer (with
monitor and printer)  a widescreen TV and DVD player • new furniture for your classroom
•
200 books for the
school library
•
a top-quality CD
player plus 30 CDs The teacher will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Test 11

ment

Section 1 Listening: second task

C Find words or phrases in the
  texts to match these words and phrases.

A       Look at the second task on
  page
126. For each statement, you will hear

Text 1

two extracts (A and B). Circle the

I

understanding

extract which means that the
  statement

2

most successful

is true.
1 (Al) The man is staying for less
          than a week.                                       A

B

3

4

easiest
  parts
Text 2 on the Internet

2
  (A2) The man
  has been to this house before.  A
3
  (A3) They
  decide to go sightseeing

B

5
6

quickly sudden increase

         together the next day.                       A

B

Text 3

4 (A4) The theatre is near the

7

unusual success

         museum.                                               A
5 (AS) The bookshop is in the centre

B

8

success
Text 4

         of town.                                              A

B

9

was clearly the best at

6 (A6) They arrange to meet at the

10

beat

         Railway Café.                                       A
  B

11

groups

Section 2 Reading: first task

Text 5

12

stop existing

B Look at the task on page 128. Use
  the

13

free-time activities

headings A-G to complete the
  sentences below.

Text 6

14

had been created in

1 The rules of chess are  , but becoming good at it takes
  years.

15 the only one of its kind

2 In chess, the Queen is  and is

16 ordinary

worth a lot more than the other pieces.

D Use some of the words and phrases you

3 Kasparov is a great chess player
  and is

found in Exercise C to complete these sentences.

4 The popularity of chess is

I Tim beat me five times, but I finally

and lots of people play it these
  days.

 him and won the last game.

5 Ron had only just learnt how to play, but

2 Flying over the Grand Canyon was a

he was  in the chess

 experience.

tournament.

3 I'm just going to go  and

6 Good chess clubs in this area are

check my e-mail.

 and soon there won't be any.

4 My grandfather taught me the

7 Leaving your King in the middle of the

              of judo when I was a young

board in
  chess can be  — never

boy,

angüägè
Wd EžäiñSQitlš •eVé10
do it!

5     1'm a bit disappointed because my
grades this year have been very
6     1'd love to have a  and become a famous singer!
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
second task
E
Quickly read the
second text on page 132 and answer these questions.
1    When was Marlon Brando born?

Section 4 Writing: second task
2
Was he a good student at
school?

3    In which city did he study acting?

4

Whose ideas about acting did he
learn about?

5    Which film made him a star?

F
Look at the
second task on page 134. Make notes to complete the essay plan, using the
questions to help you. Remember to use your own words. When you have finished,
work in pairs to compare your plans.

Structure

Questions

My essay

Introduction
(State the
  problem).

Express your opinion and give reasons for it.
Give other people's arguments and explain why they
  are wrong.

Make a conclusion.

What
  is the problem? What do some people think? What do other people think?

Are you in favour or against? What are the most important
  two/three reasons for your opinion?
What are the two/three
  most important arguments against your opinion? IV71Y is each one wrong?

IV7zat is
  the gist ofyour argument? Hou can you summarise it?

Section 5 Speaking: warm up
G Make notes to answer these
questions, then work in pairs to interview your partner. Make a note of their
answers.

You

Your partner

What's
  your favourite food?
Is there
  anything you can cook?
Do you like going out to eat? Why?

                                        Pa3neJ1        AYAHl)0BaHne

Bbl ycalblluume 5
6b1cxa.3b1t;anuñ. YcmaH061tme coomgemcmt311e .&teycðy
t3b1CRU3blŒaHlfflJt11 KLIYCÒO?O ?060pmueeo I — 5 u
ymeepycòeH11f1.uu, ()aHHbLUU 6 cnucxe A — F. Mcno,1b3Yùme
Kaycòyo õYK6Y, oõ03Haqa10t«yo ymgepycòeHtte,
moat'KO OÒ"H pa.3. B aaðmtuu ecnlb oÒH0 auuutee
ymaepoeðeuue. Bbl VCJ1b11uume aanuct, Ò6aYÒbl. 3Œecume
('6011 on16en1b1 6 maõnutgy.

A. I like this writer because he she has unusual ideas. B. I
have read all this writer's books more than once. C. I think this writer
understands how young people feel. D. I like this writer because his/her books
are very funny.

Test 11

E. I like this writer because
his/her books have helped me at school. F. This writer has helped me choose my
future career.

roßopquutli

1

2

3

4                        5

YTBepx;ueHne

Bbl ycabltuume pauoaop
  X03HÙKU c)0Ata c npuexa6tulL$t 6 eocmu c)pypo.vt ceMb11.
  OnpeÒeaume, KCIKUe 113 npugeÒëHHblX
  ymeepycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomeemcnwv,tom coòepyct1H11'0
  moccma (1 ), ,tccncue He coomaemcmeyom (2) u o tiëM 6 mt'Kcme He
  cycaaaHO, mo ecnlb Ha OCH06CIHU11 meyccma
c)amb HI' nonoycumeJ1bH0?0, Hil omeema (3). Oõaeòume
  HO-MCP 6b1ÕPCIHHO?O gaatu 6apua,qma omcema. Bbl ycnbtzuume aanucb
  t)eaYCÒbl.

             Al     The man is
staying for less than a week.
                                      l)
BepH0              2) HeBepH0              3) B •rewre He CKtt3aHO
             A2     The man has been
to this house before.
                                       l)
BepH0                2) HeBepH0                3) B •reKc•re He cw13t1H0
A3 They decide to go sightseeing together the next day. I) BepH0 2)
HeBepH0 3) B TeKc rre He CKa3,2HO A4 The theatre is near the museum.
                                      I)
BepHO                2) HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKa3t1H0
             A5    The bookshop is in
the centre of town.
                                       l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO                  3) B 'rewre He cKa3•aH0
             A6    They arrange to
meet at the Railway Café.
                                       l)
BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3) B •rewc•re He CKtt3ttHO

Bbl ycatblluume unmep6bJ0 c cyòbeù no
meHHucy. B  A7-A13 oõaeòume 111tcþpy 1, 2 uau 3,
coomeemcmayougyo BblõpaHH0.uy 6Œuu 6apuaHžny omeema. Bbl
ycalblluume aanucb òeaycòbl.

Patricia became an umpire because she 1) was fired from her last job.
2) got hurt playing
tennis.
3) couldn't find another job.
The part of training Patricia found the most difficult was I) dealing
with the players.
2)   remembering the rules.
3)   being the centre of attention.
Patricia's mistake at her first
game as an umpire didn't matter much because
l) she managed to put it
right quickly.
2)   it was an unimportant match.
3)

she didn't take the match
seriously.

AIO

Patricia's most
  embarrassing moment came when she I) was careless in writing down the score.
2)
  started an
  argument with one of the players.
3)
  forgot to keep
  a written score of the game.

All

Patricia says it's most important that an umpire can
1)
  get on well
  with the players.
2)
  keep the crowd
  informed.
3)
  perform well
  when he/she is tired.

A12

According to Patricia, one disadvantage of being an
  umpire is 1) the low pay.
2)
  the travelling.
3)
  the working
  hours.

A13

Patricia says that if you want to
  be an umpire, you should

1)  play a lot of tennis.
2)  read about umpiring. 3) watch a lot
of sport.

qacnlftr õaamca. BI
  pacnoaoyceuo g HUYChteÚ uacmu Õaawca. 111711 nepenoce omeemoe 6
  aar)auuu BI õYK6b1 aanucb16ŒomcH õea npoõe.Q06 u
  ,3HaKOß npeY111HaHllfl.

                                     Pa3neJ1       LITeHwe

Ycmcmoaume coomeemcmeue
  mewl' A — G mexcma.M I — 6. 3aHecume ('6011 01116011b' 6 matluugy.
  Mcnoab3Y1ime Kaycòyo õYKßY mo.QbK0 oð11H pa.3. B
  .3aòanuu oòlta me-Ita atilU1fflH.

A.
EASILY LEARNED
B.
EXTREMELY DANGEROUS
C.
SADLY DISAPPEARING
D.
REALLY VALUABLE
E.
RARELY BEATEN
F.
SURPRISINGLY SUCCESSFUL G. QUICKLY GROWING
I Draughts (or
'checkers' as the Americans call it) is one of the most popular games around
the world. The rules are simple. Even young children have no problem working
out how to play. The top players study moves in the same way that chess players
do but anyone can pick it up and have a go. Getting to a high standard takes a
lot of hard work and practice but the basics are not particularly difficult.

TeKc-ra
Tesla

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

Since 1997, when the game Ultima Online became popular, many thousands of
people have played all kinds of games online — and the numbers are still
increasing rapidly. Every year, more and more people discover the pleasures of
playing over the Internet and the next generation of games consoles are being
designed with that in mind. There seems to be no sign that this explosion in
online games will stop any time soon.
3
It has been called the greatest phenomenon in the history of
games, but when Trivial Pursuit was created by two friends in 1981, few people
had any idea what a hit it would be. It was a quiz game and none of the games
companies expected it to do well, until an American company became interested
in it. Many millions ofTrivial Pursuit games have been sold since then in 19
languages and 33 different countries.
4
Tigran Vartanovich Petrosian was chess world champion from 1963
to 1969. He dominated the game during those years and almost never lost. He was
known as a player who was strong in defence and very few players got the better
of him. In fact, his defensive play was so good that he was known as 'Iron
Tigran'. When he did lose, it was big news in Moscow chess circles.

5
It seems that there have been some big changes in the
British playground. Twenty years ago,       traditional children's games were
played in every school across the country during the break. These days, they
are quickly being replaced by hand-held games consoles and other electronic
games. Before long, there is a danger that traditional games could die out.
Once they are forgotten, it may be impossible to bring these enjoyable pastimes
back to the playground.
6
In 1831, a farmer on the Isle of Lewis, north of mainland
Scotland, discovered sets of chess pieces that dated from the middle of the
12th century. Carved from walrus tusk, it is almost impossible to put a price
on these pieces because they are a unique find. There are 78 pieces in total,
67 in the British Museum and the rest in the Edinburgh National Museum.
Whatever they are worth, you can be sure it's a lot more than the average chess
set.

Tlpoqumañme gonpocbl I — 6 u
  peKaaatHbte A — G o cnopm116Hbtr gewnpa.r u ycma,qoeume
  coomgemcnlßlte Meycðy gonpocŒuu u peKaŒMHb1Jf11
  otî1'fi6aWHlffiJtu. B meKcme Bbl Haùðeme omeem moabK0 na
  oÒuH eonpoc. 3aHecume CßOU omeembl 6 maõ.mugy,
  npuaeòeHHY}0 HU.ye, eòe noð       eonpoca enutuume
  coomeemcn16Y0110'R) õYKØY. B aaÒaHUU oÒ11H moccm
  atlZUHUÚ.

A
  Redwood Sports
  Complex
We offer a full range of sports and exercise sessions with
  trained members of staff. Whether you're looking for a new hobby or just want
  to get in shape, Redwood Sports Complex has something for _.oupg and old alike. For
  membershiprates,vlease call.
B
  Crooksworth
  Sports Centre
Crooksworth Sports Centre has been serving the local community for over
  three decades. It's the largest recreation centre in the region. Membership
  costs just £40 per year (children and seniors 20) and for that you get
  training and use of all equipment.
C
  Dentington
  Sports Centre
Dentington Sports Centre is
  a great place to work out. You can now fit your exercise session into your
  lunch break with our Worktime programme. Younger members will also enjoy our
  after-school club, Kicks for Kids. One month's membership costs £5,
  while a year's membership is £50 contact us
  for details of discounts).

D
  Sir Peter
  Walker Sports Centre
With the newly-built swimming pool,
  the Walker Centre is now even better. It's got the best indoor rock-climbing
  wall in the country, where training is given by climber Denise Holmes. Join
  for a year (£45) or a trial membership of a month (£7). Please
  note that an extra charge is made for the sessions with Denise Holmes.
E
  West Norton
  Recreation Centre
Although the West Norton Recreation Centre is offering a
  reduced service until the new gymnasium is completed, there's still lots to
  do. If you're thinking of taking up a new hobby, why not try our Newcomers
  Scheme, where you pay half-price to try a new sport? Please note that there is
  no wheelchair access until the building work is
  completed.
F
  Inborough
  Sports Centre (ISC)
The newly-opened sports centre at Inborough has an
  Olympic-sized swimming pool, together With a fully-equipped gym. The ISC
  philosphy is that sport is for all, so we're pleased to be able to offer
  special exercise machines for members in wheelchairs. Children are welcome to
  join ISC, but there are no discounts on the membership fee of£55
  per year.
G
  Herne Sports
  and Leisure Complex
We are offering a full year for just £20 (OAPs and
  children £16), although that does not include the use of equipment such
  as rackets, for which a small charge is made. However, feel free to bring
  your own equipment and take advantage of the lessons we run at no extra cost.

4      charges extra for the use of
equipment?

1

2

4

5

6

5

provides equipment for the
disabled?
6
organises special
events for children?

[Ipoqumaùme me,tccm u
  6b1110AHume .3aòaHLIH A14-Ä20, OÕBOÒH
  1411Cþpy 1, 2, 3 coomeemcmcsyoucwo H0Mep_v 6btt5paHHO?O          6apuawna
  omcema.

4,

plane circled and the pilot pointed down into the
  Australian desert below.
the runway there,' he said, 'next to
  the store.' Nancy looked. There was a strip of level next to a few wooden
  buildings. It looked small and unimportant in the middle of the stretches of
  red earth and small bushes that stretched as far as the eye could see, but
  knew that it was a vital link to the outside world for the farmers in the
  area. As she a figure appeared at the door of one of the buildings and waved
  up at them. The pilot the plane expertly and thev soon touched down on the
  line of hard sand. They came to stop by the largest building and Nancy
  stepped out. A woman of perhaps forty held out her
Welcome to Carter's Cross. I'm
  Shelley.' Nancy looked at her. She was not unattractive, although long hours
  in the sun were beginning to take their toll and she had a number of lines
  wrinkles. Nancy was surprised to see that her clothes were quite fashionable,
  despite a bit dust. Something in Nancy's expression must have communicated
  itself to Shelley because laughed and said, 'We're not quite as backward as you
  might think, This is the 21st century. on into the store.' went inside while
  the pilot checked his plane. The store was well stocked with farming
  equipment, tinned food and clothes. An old man was cleaning the counter. He
  looked up when entered and then carried on with his task without catching
  Nancy's eye.
come on, Dad,' Shelley said. 'We
  all know how you feel about them finding oil outside
Carter's Cross, but that's no reason to be rude. This is
  Nancy Edwards, from the university.' turned to Nancy. 'He's stuck in his
  ways. Thinks it'll mean the end of farming round here. such a bad thing, if
  you ask me.' nobody did ask you.' It was the old man. 'My granddad farmed
  this land, and so will my grandson. I'm not having this land turned into a
  great big ugly oil refinery.' He looked at 'And I won't be bought off,
  either.' had heard from her colleagues that this kind of resistance just
  disappeared when people quite what the find was worth and they happily packed
  up and headed for the comforts of the nearest city. She hoped this time would
  be no exception, here to assess the environmental impact, Mt-Williamson,'
  Nancy said. 'I have no intention building anything.' The old man looked at
  her and then walked to the door. He pointed out the land.
'Environmental impact?' He shook his
  head. 'What environment? It's a baking desert and a person's got to work hard
  to make a living off sheep in a land like this. You aren't going to find
  endangered species out there, and so you'll go back and write your report and
  the oil companies will move in. But there's one thing that I bet you don't
  mention in your report. The He looked out into the sun again. Nancy was a
  little confused. There had been no mention of a village in any of the
  information she had read. village?' she asked.
are ten farms that rely on this
  store. Together, they cover an area of nearly 400 square kilometres. And
  they're our neighbours. We never miss a birthday, or a wedding, or any other
  You're going to destroy our village.' Nancy could think of nothing to say.
  Shelley shrugged her shoulders. Nancy wandered back to the plane to get her
  equipment.

The
'That's ground empty Nancy looked, turned a hand. 'Hi.
and
of she Come They
they
'Now,

TestA1

She
Not 'Well,
Nancy. Nancy realised
'I'm of at
any
village.'
'What 'There event.

'A14    The buildings Nancy sees from
the plane are
1)
smaller than she
expected.
2)
very important to
the local people.
3) left empty most of the time.
4) used to store farming equipment.
EA15 The phrase 'take their toll' in
paragraph 2 means that I) the sun has improved Shelley's appearance.
2)   Shelley enjoys spending time in the
sun.
3)   Nancy and Shelley both find the sun
too hot. 4) the sun has damaged Shelley's skin.
EA16      Shelley laughs when she
realises that Nancy
I) wasn't expecting her
to be wearing new clothes.
2)   didn't know that there would be so
much dust.
3)   is using strange expressions.
4)   wants to be invited into the
building.
;317    The man ignores Nancy at
first because he doesn't I) like meeting new people.

no B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE
  IIEPEHECTM CBOII OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB Ml !
ObPATMTE
  BHMMAHME, qmo omaentbl Ha           B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaapwomcn 6 pa.3Hb1X
  qacmnx õacmyca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHb1 6 Hil.YCHeð1 qacmu
  ÕaaHKCl. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòaHlffl-r B2, B3
  õYKßb1 õea npoõeaoe u 3HaK06
  npenunaHllfl.

2)

approve of what is happening.
3)   see her behind Shelley.
4) want her to see how upset he is.
5318 Nancy hopes that the old man
will change his mind when I) he learns how comfortable the city is.
2)
he sees there is
no point hiding his true feelings.
3)
he is offered
enough money. 4) she explains how important the find is.
jA19   Mr Williamson believes that
I) Nancy has no intention of doing her job properly.
2) the discovery of oil
threatens the local wildlife.
3) the oil companies will ignore what Nancy tells them. 4) there is no
wildlife worth saving in the area.
A20 Nancy doesn't understand Mr
Williamson's reference to 'the village' because I) it covers a large area and
is never marked on maps.
2)   the oil company didn't give her all
the relevant information.
3)   he's talking about relationships and
not a physical place. 4) it's a long way from where they are.
                                Pa3aeJ1
         rpaMMaTHKa aeKCHKa

Tlpoqumuùme mexc•m
  3an0JIHume nponycKll 6 nor) HOJtepŒ}tu B4-B I coomaemcmßY101U11.Mld
  cþop.ua.$tu caot3, HaneqamaHHbl-r 3a¿aaßHb1Jtll             cnpaøa
  om KOICÒo¿o npeòJ10yceH1ffl.

Telling stories
Books tell
stories, films tell stories and we tell one another stories. Telling stories
important since people first sat around a camp fire. BE Back then, hundreds of
thousands of years ago, people TELL stories about things they had done earlier
that day while hunting.

TestA11

B6       A hunter could make     sound
very brave in his own story.    HE They also made up mythical stories,            the
world around        EXPLAIN them and where they came from.
B8
Many of      stories became part of their culture because they THAT were told
many times.
Long before writing      ,
people learnt stories from their        APPEAR parents and passed them on to
their own children.
                    BIO      Stories                            to
babies by their mothers.                                           SING
Bil
This   to be an important form of education in many parts CONTINUE of the
world, even today.

Tlpoqumaùme npuøeÒeHllbtñl
  nu.yce macc•m Tlpeoõpaayùme cJ106a, HaneqamaHHbte õYKßŒuu
  nocae B12-B18 max, qmoõbl OHII ppavu.uamuqec}cu u .1CRCUtWCR11 coo,rnoemcm606a.11d
  coðepycamuo me,tccma. 3an0JIH11žne npon_vcK11 nonyqeHHbL1f11
  CA06ŒUU. Kaycòblll nponycK coont6emcmeyem aaÒaHll/0
  11.3 epynnbl B 12-1318.

B12
B13 B14
BIS
B16 B17
B18

Marlon Brando was
  perhaps the greatest film  of his generation. He was born in 1924 and people soon
  realised that he was
 However, he never did very well at
  school and he never seemed to be interested in When he finally left school, he
  travelled to New York, where he became a  at drama school. There, he heard
  about the ideas of the Russian, Konstantin Stanislavski, who had developed a
  way to bring acting closer to
 Brando used Stanislavski's ideas in his acting and during
  the 1940s he appeared in        plays on Broadway.
The critics liked him and he slowly
  became better known. His first major  was in the film A Streetcar Named
  Desire (1947),
He became world famous and a star
  was born.

ACT
TALENT
EDUCATE STUDY
REAL VARV
SUCCEED

Tlpoqumaùme mcwcm c nponycwa.uu, HO.uepa•tu
  .421-428. 3/7111 110.uepa coomgemcmaywm aaòaH11}LM Ä21-A28, B
  KOD10PbLr npeÒcma6aeHb1 603MOHHbte gapuwunbl omeemoe.
  Oõeeòume HOAtep ßblÕPCIHH020 aa.'.tu aapuamna
  omaema.

'Come on. I'll help you.' The voice came from the left and Jenny turned
  her head in that direction. She was blind, and had been from birth, but even
  without the sense of A21  , she could tell that the voice belonged to a middle-aged
  man. He touched her on the arm and she pulled back. The guide dog bv her side
  looked up.
'Please,'
  she said, struggling to keep her anger A22  control. 'That's very kind of you,
  but I don't need any help.'
'Oh,' the man said, and Jenny could imagine the look of confusion on
  his face. 'I'm sorry,' he said finally, and crossed the road. People just
  didn't seem to realise that there was a huge difference between offering help
  and trying to take control of somebody else's life. Sometimes she
A23  people's attempts to help funny,
  but not today. Today it was important to
A24                the impression that she was
  independent, because today was the first day in her new job.
She waited until the
  signal from her dog told her that it was safe and she A25  off across the road. When they
  reached the other side, she paused for a second to A26 herself of the way and
  then continued. After a few days in the job, her dog would have learnt the
  way, but for now Jenny had to A27  the distance to the right
  building. She counted her steps and listened. To anyone who could see, it
  would have seemed like a quiet street, but Jenny concentrated on the small
  sounds: her footsteps, a car going past, the bell on a bicycle. They helped
  her judge when she was coming close to the corner of the street, where she
  knew number 116 stood.
They got
  there and she stopped. She patted her dog on the head.
'Well, boy, this is
  it,' she said. She knew there would be many challenges ahead. There always
  were. But at least she had overcome the first one: A28  to the building. She stepped
  inside.

A21                   l) view                     2)
100k                   3) sight                  4) observation
A22                  1) in                         2)
on                      3) behind              4) under
A23                  l) took                     2) found                3)
kept                  4) caught

A24 I) give 2) hand 3) throw 4)
send A25 l) made 2) came 3) put 4) set
A26                   1) remember            2)
recall                  3) remind              4) recollect
A27                  1) locate                    2)
estimate           3) discover            4) reveal
A28                   l) being                    2)
getting               3) making             4) bringing

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE
  3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTM CBC)" OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB     !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  Limo omeembl Ha aar)t1H1ffl B4-B18 u A21-Ä28 pacnoaaanomca 6 paallbl.x
  qacmax t;aamca. B4-B18  o HilYCHeÚ yacmu
  ÕJIUHKCI. flpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 134-1318 ÕVK6bl
  aanucbleaw»nca õe.3 npoõeaoe u 3+taKOß npenumtkllffl.

Ha                  Cl. C2 WIAHK OTBETOB E2.
171211 ßbtnoaueuuu aaòauuù CI u C2
  ocoõoe 6HU..}taHUC oõpamume Ha "10, qmo eatuu omaembl
  t;yòym  no aanuca.u, WIAHKE OTBETOB M2. aanucu
  qePH0611K•a He õvðym yqun1b16ambcfl .9Kcnepmo.u.
"pu
  aan0JIHeHld1d WIAHKA OTBETOB N2 yxa.wume cwaqaaa HO.uep aaòt1H1/51 CI,
  C2 aame.u aanutuume C601i omuenu Ecau oc)H0ù cmop0Hbt õaamca
  ueòocmamowto, atoyeme ucnom»aooantb òpyeyo cmop0H.v
  õ.aamca.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.
This is part
of a letter from Georgia, your English pen friend.

„.Doyourparents
  don't wellat school? seem toput me so muchpressure. what can / do? think /
  shouate(/them that it's making me unhappy? Hew can / explain tv myparents how
  (feel? / try my best at but /just toget top marks. should/ speak to a
  teacher? Write back soon withyour advice.
Love,
Georgia

Write back to Georgia
answering her questions.
Write 100-140
words.

Remember the rules of letter
writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Some people think that
pupils at school should learn practical skills that will help them in later
life, such as cooking or car mechanics. Others argue that pupils are at school
to learn traditional academic subjects and that those who want to can learn other
skills in their oun time.

Do you think
that there is a place in schools for practical subjects such as cooking and car
mechanics?
Write 200-250 words.
Use the
following plan
1.  Introduction (State the problem).
2.  Express your opinion and give reasons
for it.
3.  Give other people's arguments and
explain why they are wrong.
4.  Make a conclusion.

Test 11

                                 Pa3aeJ1
         IòBopeHvte

Bbl non.yqume Kapmotwy, Ha
    Komopoú npeðcmaœWHb1 mpu ycmH0?0 omaema:
C3 — me.uamuqecxoe
    *touo.aoeuqeæcoe Bbtcyca.3b16anue,
C4 — ÒuŒqoe C
    1/Cäb}O otîuena cþaxmuqecwoù  C5 — ()uŒ10? C gea1b10
    oõJf('Ha 01ßHot1H01i  OKOHt1CIH1že Bbl'10.QHeHUH
    KaycÒoeo aað(1H11H  .9KaŒueHamop. Bo ape-WI
    npoaeòt'H11fl 9moù qacmu llðem noc•momtnafl aanucb Ha
    ayò1d0Kaccemy.

                                                   3aaaH1151
          3K3ayreHVOtoro

STUDENT CARD
Task I
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on the weather.
Remember
to say:
•     what types of weather you get where
you live
•     how the weather changes during the
year
•     what type of weather is your
favourite, and why
•     what types of weather you dislike,
and why
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you
have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You have seen
an advertisement for helpers at your local zoo. You are onlv available at the
weekend and you have no transport of your own to get to the zoo.
Before
making a decision, ask the zoo-keeper about:
•
when they need
helpers
•
what helpers have
to do
• any experience needed
•
how to get to the
zoo

You begin the conversation. The
teacher will play the part of the zoo-keeper.
Remember
to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need
•
decide whether
you want to become a helper
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and a
friend are thinking of creating a website together. You are discussing what you
want your website to be about. Here is the list of possible subjects:
•
your favourite
singer/group
•
your favourite
sport/team
•
your family
•
your school
•
your town/city
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•
discuss all the
options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement
Section 1 Listening: first task
A   Look at the first task on page 138.
Match each word in the box to a statement A-F. Some words will be used more
than once.
allowed • angry
• beds • clean • dad her • key • larger • mess • out • relaxed she • size •
smaller • toys • warm
c

B    In pairs or as a group, discuss which
other words and phrases you might hear. Add them to your lists in Exercise A.
Section 2 Reading: second task

Section 3 Grammar and
vocabulary: second task
D Read the text with questions B12-B18
on page 144. Look at the words on the right which you have to change and decide
what part of speech is needed to fill each gap.
I (B12) positive adjective / negative adjective / positive adverb /
negative adverb
2      (B13) positive adjective / negative
adjective / positive adverb / negative adverb
3      (B14) singular noun / plural noun /
-ing form / verb
4      (B15) noun / verb / adjective /
adverb
5      (B16) noun / verb / adjective /
adverb
6      (B17) noun / verb / adjective /
adverb
7      (B18) positive adjective / negative
adjective / positive adverb / negative adverb

c
Quickly read the text on page 141. Find words and phrases in the text that fit
in the categories below.

poetry

E Complete the table.

noun

verb

positive adjective

negative adjective

positive adverb

negative adverb

solve

complete

origin

luck

Section 4 Writing: first task
F Read the first task on page 146.
Imagine that you are Melanie's pen friend and that you have lots of advice to give her
because you recently organised a successful party at your house. Make notes to
complete the information.

Your party

What did you
  offer the guests? (food, drinks, etc)

What would you do the same way
  again if you had another party?

What would you do differently if you had another party?

Did you decorate the place?

If yes, how?

Did you provide music?

If yes, did you have a DJ?

What else did you do to make the party a success?

Section 5 Speaking: first task
G
Look at the
Student Card for Task I on page 147. Make notes to complete the table.

name of famous person

their appearance

what
  they are famous for why you like them

Melanie's party

What should
  she offer the guests? (food, drinks, etc)

Should she decorate the place? If
  yes, how?

How should she arrange the music?

What else should she do to make the party a success?

What other advice can you give her?

H
In pairs or as a
group, discuss the question below. Use the phrases to help you.

What are the good and bad things about being famous?

There are lots of good bad things about
  being famous, such as ...
Famous people usuallv / often sometimes ...
One good bad thing is that you can
  can't ...
If you're famous, you can can't .
If you're
  famous, you have to don't have to .

Test 12

                                   Pa3aeJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycau.uuume 5
  6blCKa3b16aHUå. YcmaH06ume coonwemcmøue MeycÒy
  6blCKC13b16CZHUfLUt1 KCIYCÒoeo zoeopnugeeo 1 — 5 u
  ymoepycòeH11f1.uu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 cnuœce A — F.
  Ifcnoabayùme Kaycòyo õVK6Y, ymeepycÒeHue,
  moabK0 oðzut paa. B aaðauuu ecntb oòH0 autunee
  ynteep.ycðenue. Bbl vc.lbttuume aanucb ()ßaycÒbt. 3aHecume
  Cßou om€entbl 6 matîau«y.

A.
It's important
for me to feel comfortable in my bedroom.
B.
I share a bedroom
with my sister.
C.

My old bedroom was bigger than
this bedroom. D. No one can enter my bedroom when I'm not there. E. My parents
get annoyed when my bedroom is untidy. F. I try to keep my bedroom as tidy as
possible.

roBopqruHÏ1

1

2

3

4

5

YTBepxneHvte

Bbl ycablžuume
llHžnep6b}0 cne«uaaucma omðeaa .uapcenlllhtpa co
cayqaùH0ù npoxo.yceñ. Onpeðenume, 'CtlKUe 11.3
YIPUßeÒëHHbLX ymaepycòeH11ñ Al-A6 coomeemcmgyom
coðepycamuo meRtma (1), KCZICUe He coomaemcmeyom (2) u o që.u 6 mewcme
He CKaaaHO, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU meyccma He-lb.3fl ()antb Hil
nono.ycume-lb,qoeo, HI' ompu«amevQbH020 omaema (3). Oõgeòume
HO.uep 6b1ÕpaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuawna omeema. Bbl ycvlblžuume
aanucb Òea.ycÒb1.

      Al     The woman buys a new
toothbrush every month.
                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3)
B Tewre He CKt13aHO
     A2    In the woman's family,
each person has their own tube of toothpaste.
                          1) BepHO               2)
HeBepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKa3ilHO
     A3     The woman visits her
local supermarket once a week.
                          1) BepHO               2)
HeBepH0                 3) B •rewre He CKa3tiHO
     A4    The woman buys a new tube
of toothpaste approximately every three weeks.
                           l) BepHO               2)
HeBePHO                 3) B •rewre He CKagaHO
     A5    The woman believes the
mouthwash she uses is healthy and tastes nice.
                          I) BepH0              2)
HeBepH0             3) B •reKcq•e He cxagaH0
     A6     The woman thinks that
'Freshrinse' is a good name for a mouthwash.
                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3)
B •reKcrre He CKtt3ttHO

Test 12

Bbl ycablžuume 6btCRU.3bteaHUfl
  moðeú 6 ce-uu paaa11LIHbLr cumya1'11fLt. Omeemwne Ha eonpocbl no

A7-A/3 oõeeòume
  I'll(þpy I, 2 ILIU 3, oõ03Haqayoug_yyo omeem, Komopblå
  6Œu Ka.ycemc•fl Hauóoaee 6'?PHblJt. Bbl ycabtluume KaycÒoe
  6blCKa.3b16ClHUe ()ßWICÒbt.

    You will hear a woman talking
about her son. How does she feel?
1)   proud
2)   surprised
3)   disappointed
     You will hear a man talking about an activity he does regularly. Why
does he particularly enjoy it?
1)   It helps to get him out of the house.
2)   It makes him feel fit and healthy.
3)

It stops him thinking about his
problems.

A9

You will hear an advertisement for
  a new product. Who is the product aimed at?
1)
  people who are
  wealthy
2)
  people who are
  unfit
3)
  people with a
  lot of free time

AIO

You will hear a radio announcer. What is on next?
1)
  a comedy
2)   jazz music
3)
  the news

Al I

You will hear a teacher talking to
  a class of students. What is she doing?
1) encouraging the students 2) congratulating the
  students
3) criticising the students

         Al 2

You will hear a writer talking about his new novel. What is
  the novel about?
1)   power
2)
  revenge
3)
  jealousy

A13

You will hear a man talking about
  the economy. What worries him?

1)   that the price of petrol might
increase
2)   that house prices might fall
3)   that unemployment might rise

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B OTBETOB El,'
ObPATMTE BHMMAHUE,
  qmo m, Al-A13 pacnoaaea,omcH 6 pa.3HbLV qacmsa ÕaaHKa. BI pacnoaoyceH0
  6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu õaamca. [Ipu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaðaHuu BI
  õYK6b1 aanucblßcuomcfl t5e3 npoõe.106 u .3HaK06
  npemŒaHlŒ.

                                         Pa3aeJ1       11TeHne

Yc•maH0ß11me coomeemcmaue me.M — G mexcmŒM 1 — 6. .3aHecume C60U
omaembl 6 maóau«.v. Mcnoab3Yùme Ka.ycòYR) Q)'K6Y moabK0
oÒ11H paa. B aaòaHuu oÒua me.',ta JU11UHflH.

A. GOING
ABROAD B. BECOMING RICH
c. LIVING WITHOUT MONEY
D.
BUYING PROPERTY
E.
EARNING MONEY
F.
USING PLASTIC
G.
HELPING THE POOR

I The World Bank is officially part of
  the United Nations. Its aim is to fight poverty around the world and, to do
  that, it lends money to governments and countries which need financial help.
  Since it was created in 1945, after the end of the Second World War, the
  World Bank has helped improve the lives of millions of poor people in many
  different countries.
2
  Credit cards have made shopping much easier for millions of
  people. With a credit card, you don't have to carry lots of cash with you
  when you go shopping. You just need to take one plastic card with you. With
  credit cards, you get a bill at the end of each month. If you pay the bill
  immediately, you don't have to pay the credit card company any money. If you
  delay paying some or all of the bill, however, the credit card company
  charges you extra.
3
  In America it's the dollar and in Russia it's the rouble. Many
  countries have their own 'currency' their own money. This means that when you
  travel from, say, Russia to the USA you have to exchange your roubles for
  dollars, as shops in America don't accept roubles. Many countries in Europe,
  such as France, Germany and Italy, now have the same currency, called the
  euro. This means that Italians travelling to Germanv don't have to worry
  about exchanging money when they travel.
4
  In Britain, people who work receive either a 'salary' or a
  'wage'. They are both money that workers receive, but there are small
  differences between them. If you get a salary, you are paid at the end of
  each month. A job with a salary of £20,000 means that you get that
  amount over a year, not each month. A wage is usually paid at the end of each
  week. A factory worker in Britain might get a weekly wage of about
  £300.
5
  Most people do not have enough money to pay in cash if they
  want to buy a house or a flat. Because of this, they have to borrow money
  from a bank. The name for the loan that most people get when they buy
  property is a 'mortgage'. In Britain, it's common to get a mortgage for up to
  twenty-five years. In other countries, it's more common to get a mortgage
  that lasts for onlv ten or fifteen years. Xhen you've finished paying your
  mortgage, the building is yours!
6
  What would the world be like if we didn't have money? It would
  be a very different place! We would probably have to exchange different
  things to get what we needed. For example, imagine that you needed some
  bread. You would go to a baker, but you couldn't buy the bread with money.
  You would have to give the baker something that the baker needed. If you were
  a farmer, perhaps you could offer the baker some fresh vegetables. It would
  be very difficult to get everything we needed, wouldn't it?

Ne •reKcrra

TeMa

2

3

4

5

6

Ilpoqumaùme gonpocbl I — 6 u peK•aa-uy meampŒ1bHbtx
  cneKHl(lKaeù A — G. YcmaH06ume coomaemcm€ue -ueycòy aonpoca.uu
  u pewqa.MH01"1 cnocmavaeðl. B RayÒOM meyccme Bbl
  naúòeme omaem ntOJ1bKO Ita oÒt11t eonpoc. B
  npuaeòeHH0ú Hit.yce matîautge nor) HO.',tepO.M aonpoca
  enutuume

auumuÙ.

Which
  production
1
  has only two
  actors performing?
2
  involves a
  police officer?
3
  partly concerns
  young people's fashion?

4
5
6

includes
songs written for the show?
involves someone talking
about their work?
is based on a well-known
book?

   What's On At The Theatre                            Fe

A
  Let The Good Times Roll • Shaftsbury Theatre - Plymouth
Let The Good Times Roll is a comedy for all the family. Set
  in the late 1950s, the play is a look at the relationships between two
  teenagers and their parents. The kids are mad about roll and the parents are
  mad with their kids for what they wear and the music they like!
B
  Working For A Living • Angel Theatre - Exeter
A new musical written
  specifically for the Angel Theatre Company by John Chappell, Living shows us
  office life as we've never seen it before! With secretaries singing their the photocopying
  machine and managers dancing on their desks, you're assured of a highly
  entertaining night out.
C
  The Doonray Affair • Torbay Theatre - Torquay
When strange messages start appearing on
  the notice board of a sleepy Yorkshire village, inhabitants are confused.
  When a horrifying murder terrifies them, it's time for Chief Carlton to try
  and discover what's going on. Will he find the murderer before another person
  is killed?
D
  Richard and Liz
  • Theatre Royal - Topsham
Corin Davers
  stars as Richard Burton and Wendy Davis is Elizabeth Tavlor in this
  two-person production exploring the relationship between two of the most
  famous film stars of the century. Their love for each other was powerful, but
  so was their jealousy and ambition. a dull moment when Richard and Liz get
  together!
E
  Talent Contest • Lydford Theatre - Lydford
On Friday 17th February, the 1 3th Annual
  Lydford Talent Contest gives you the chance your talents! If you can sing, dance,
  tell jokes, juggle or do anything else that's entertaining, Pete Graham on
  2341 5654333 before 31st January.
F
  Alice In Wonderland • Tavistock Theatre - Tavistock
This new adaptation of Lewis Carroll's
  famous children's book has been especially designed younger children (aged
  3-10). The show's only one hour long, the costumes are fantastic  lots
  of audience participation. Saturdays and Sundays only. Don't miss it!
G
  Roger Linbuck -
  Live! • Harvest Festival Theatre - Exmouth
For one night only (Tuesday 14th February), successful local
  poet Roger Linbuck will be poems from his latest collection and answering
  questions about the life of a poet. His latest Devon Dumplings will also be
  on sale, and Roger will be happy to sign copies after the event.

ar

bru
humorous rock 'n'
Working For
A out at fabulous and

the Inspector innocent
twentieth
There's never
show off contact
for and there's
reading book

2

3

4

5

6

Test
  12

flpoqumaùme
  mŒcm u aaðaH14H A14-Ä20, OÕ60ÒH
  Igucþpy I, 2, 3 unu 4, coomeemcmeyougyo H0Mepy 6b1ÕPaHHO?0
  6Œuu gapuawna omeema.

Whether
you call it a 'gap year', a 'year out' or a 'year off', the decision to delay
going to university for a year after leaving school is a difficult, but
important, one.
Becky
Roberts, now studying history at the University of Warwick, doesn't regret her
decision to take a year off. 'I'd worked so hard for my A levels,' she says. 'I
knew it would do me good to do something totally unrelated to studying before
embarking on a three-year degree course. My year off working for my dad's
company wasn't a holiday by any means, but it was a break from the world of
education, and that's just what I needed.'
Carl
Sanchez agrees. Now halfway through a biology degree at Cardiff University,
Carl spent much of his gap year travelling. 'I worked for about three months to
save up enough money, then went to stay with some friends who live in France. I
ended up travelling round most of Europe, and even got over to Russia for a few
weeks, which was fantastic.'
Both
Becky and Carl enjoyed their year off, but do they feel it's benefited them in
terms of their university life now? 'Definitely,' says Carl. 'When I left school,
I was a normal, fairly irresponsible eighteen year-old. I hadn't been anywhere,
I hadn't done anything. A year later, when I went to university, I felt much
more like an adult than a child.'
'I
know a few people at Warwick who took a year off,' says Becky. 'Generally,
we're more dedicated to our studies than those students who came straight from
school. We've got different priorities. We want to have fun, of course, but we
realise we're here to get our degrees. I don't think some of the others have quite
realised why they're at university yet.'

There are drawbacks to taking a
gap year, though. Penny Cartwright went straight from school to study medicine
at Imperial College, London. 'I thought about taking a gap year but decided
against it and don't regret the decision for a minute. Becoming a doctor takes
such a long time — I'll be about 26 years old before I can start earning any
money — that the sooner you start, the better, in my opinion. It might be fun,
but it's really just a wasted year in terms of career development.'
There's also the
financial consideration. If you do decide to take a year off, and you don't
want to work the whole time as Becky did, you have to be able to pay for it.
Susan Jenkins, a Careers Officer, points out that parents are now less likely
to fund their child's year off. 'Twenty years ago, it was fairly common for
parents to say to their son or daughter, 'Here's two thousand pounds, go and
have fun abroad for a few months.' Nowadays, because parents have to pay so
much more for their child's education while they're at university, they just
can't afford to pay for this extra year too.'
One option, of course, is to do what
Carl did: work for a few months in order to save up for a trip abroad. Another
option is to find casual work while travelling abroad. 'There are now a lot of
books and websites with loads of information for people who want to do this,'
says Susan. 'It's a great way to see the world, gain experience, and get money
for living expenses all at the same time. But don't expect to earn enough to
save any money.'
So,
should you take a gap year? The answer is: it depends. If you want a break from
books and essays, then it's probably a good idea — as long as you, or your
parents, can afford it and as long as you're going to do something worthwhile
during your time off. Sitting at home watching TV doesn't count! If you want to
get your degree and start regular employment as quickly as possible, a gap year
may not be so sensible.

Test 12

DA14  Becky took a year off because
she
I) needed to see what working for her father was like.
2)   felt she needed a long holiday before
university.
3)   had done so well in her A level exams
at school. 4) wanted to do something different for a while.
:A15    Carl says that a year off
helped him
I) learn the importance of saving money.
2)   become more mature and experienced.
3)   make friends in many different
countries.
4)   become more knowledgeable about
geography.
A16 According to Becky, students who
didn't take a year off 1) are less hard-working than those who did.
2)   probably won't end up with a degree.
3)   don't want to have fun at university.
4)   are less intelligent than those who
did.
-Ali According to Penny, a year off
1)   should be taken when you're about 26
years old.
2)

is better once you've
actually started your course.
3)   merely delays the time when you can
get a job.
4)   can be enjoyable and useful for your
future work.
-A18    In the past, parents were
more likely to
1)
pay for their
child's education at university.
2)
encourage their
child to go straight to university.
3)
force their child
to take a year off before university. 4) give their child money to help with
their year off.
UA19  Susan issues a warning about
l)
information from books and websites, 2) low wages for casual work abroad.
3) paying for
everyday expenses abroad. 4) the difficulty of finding casual work.
A20 This article would probably not appear in I) a textbook
for university students.
2)   a handbook for school-leavers.
3)   a magazine for young people.
4)   the education section of a newspaper.

no OKOHttaHUU B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYUbTE
  TIEPEHECTII CBOM OTBETW B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, gyno omeenlbl Ha .3aòaHllH B2, B3 u A14-A20
  pacnoaaecuomcfi e PC13HbLX qacmnr ÕJIZIHICCI. B2, B3 pacnOJtoyeHbl 6
  HUYCHeÙ qacmu õaamca. Tlpu nepe,yoce omeemoe B aaðcmuxr B2,
  B3 õYRBb1 aanucuea,zomcH õea npoõeaoe u .3HaKOd
  npeh11ŒaHllH.

Test
IZ

                       Pa3neJ1           rpaMMaTVIKa
JleKCHKa

flpoqumaùme meyccm
  3a110AH11me nponycwu 6 npeÒaoyceH11fLr not) HO.IWPŒUII B4-B11                cþopMŒuu
  caog, HaneqamaHHbLV aaua6HbLUU t5YK6t1M11 cnpaea om KaycÒopo

B4
B6
138
B9
BIO
Bli

The News on TV

Do you
  watch the news on TV?
Before television, people often  to the cinema to watch the news.
  GO In those days, they also listen to the news on the radio but they weren't able
  to see anything.
Of course, newspapers  people the news for GIVE hundreds
  of years.
Even today, however, a daily
  newspaper gives  readers      IT yesterday's news and the only pictures are
  photographs.
The introduction of
  television  the daily news, with           BRING moving pictures, into
  people's homes for the first time.
In the beginning, people  the news on TV whenever NOT GET
  they wanted it, because it was onlv broadcast at certain times of the day.
These davs, there are a number of
  TV news channels         PROVIDE the news 24 hours a day.
If you want the  news, just turn on one of those channels LATE at any time
  of day or night.

Ilpoqumaúme
  nPU6eÒeHHbtÙ Htl.yce meR•cm Ilpeoõpa.3Yùme caoga,
  naneqamaHHbte aauza6HblJt11     nocae H0Mepot3
  B12-B18 mew, qmoÕbl OHII ppŒ&LuamuqecKll u JWKCllqeCKU
  coomaemcmgoe,aau coòepycaHll}0 mexcma. 3anoanume nponycKtl
  nary'qeHHblMU CJ106a*fU. KaycÒblÚ nponycR coomeemcn16.vem
  omòe.1bH0M.v aaÒaHlUO 11.3 epymlbl B 12-1318.

Mary Celeste is a
  mystery that day. Built in 1861, the ship was       SOLVE but its name was
  changed to the Mary ORIGIN left New York for Italy on 7th November
  professional  and the captain's SAIL another ship, the Dei Gratia,
  spotted sea. To the crew's , they           ASTONISH
Mary Celeste had  COMPLETE food and water on board
  and the ship
There were no signs of a struggle
  or fight. EXCELLENCE were never found. No one has ever those nine         men and women. LUCK

What happened to the ship the
B12 remains  to this
 B13  called the Amazon,
Celeste in
1869. The Mary Celeste
B14 1872 with a crew of seven wife and daughter. On 4th
December,
B15 the
Map:v Celeste drifting in the
B16 discovered that everyone on the disappeared. There was
plenty of
B17 was In  condition.
The people on the Mary
Celeste
B18
discovered what happened to

[Ipoqumaùme
moccm c nponycKŒuu, otî03HaqeHHbLM11 HOMepŒuu A21-A28. 3mu
H0.uepa coome,emcmeyom aaò01H1dfL$t A21-A28, 6 Komopbl.r
npeðcmaœ1"Hbt 60.3.UOYCHbte gaplltl/ffllbl omøemog.
Oõeeòume H0.uep 6b1ÕpaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuamna
omæma.

Dear
  Claire,
It was wonderful to receive your
  e-mail yesterday. I can't believe it's over six years since we were last in
  A21  How time flies! It was great to hear all your news, and
  thank you so much for attaching those photos of you and the family. You
  haven't aged a bit, and look as beautiful as ever! I'm still living in the
  same flat in Rome, but it looks very different to when you were here last.
  I've totally redecorated and knocked the wall through from the kitchen to the
  living room to make a large living A22 It's a lot more comfortable for me
  because — and this is my other big news — I now work from home as a full-time
  writer! You remember that novel I always said I was writing? Well, I finished
  it, sent it off to a publisher and it was accepted for publication. This was about
  three years ago. The book A23  out in hardback first and got some
  fairly good reviews in the Sunday newspapers in the UK, and last year they
  produced a paperback
A24  ! Can you believe it? I'm not rich
  yet by any means, but I am earning enough from royalties to have been able to
  A25 my job. I'm now hard at work on my second novel — let's
  just hope it doesn't take as long to write as the first one! Actually, it's
A26  well and I hope to have finished it
  within the next six months or so.
I'll be coming over to the UK the first week of next
  month. I'd love to meet up! Let me know when you're free and we'll arrange
  it. I can either come over to your A27  and meet the family, or maybe just
  you and I can go out to dinner somewhere and A28  up on old times. Whatever you
  prefer. I'll be staying at a hotel in London and will only have a couple of
  meetings while I'm there, so I should be free most of the time.
Let me know, and see you soon, I hope!
Lots of love,
Celine

A21                   I) exchange             2)
message             3) connection        4) touch

A22                 1) space                  2)
opening                    3) hole4) gap
A23                  I) brought               2) sent                   3)
came                4) printed
A24                  I) issue                   2) edition              3)
copy                4) reproduction
A25                  I) depart                 2) vacate               3)
abandon          4) quit

A26

1) going

2) making

3) taking

4) having

l) point

2) position

3) location

4) place

A28

1) carry

2) hold

3) catch

4) bring

110                            B4-B18,
  A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM
OTBETb1 B FAAHK OTBETOB
ObPATJ-1TE BHMMAHUE,          HO
       B4-B18 u A21-A28  6 pa.3Hb1X qacmax tîlamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyeHb1 B
  HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaawca. Tlpu nepenoce omeemoe 6
  aaòt1H11+1-r B4-B18 tîYKBbl  t5e.3 npoõe,10ß u
  3HUK06 npe,'111HaHlffi.

                                             Pa3aeJ1
    111dCbMO

 Ha                           Cl, C2
  ucn0J1bJYùme WIAHK OTBETOB .Nþ2.
Tlpu Bbl/lOJl}-teHUU .3aòaH11ù CI u C2 ocoõoe
  BHIŒuaHue oõpamume Ha mo, Ltmo eatuu omeenlbl õyðym
  OlßHU6ambCH mo.1bK0 no aanucmt, CC)eaaHHbl.U 6 b.7AHKE OTBETOB .,E2.
  1-111KŒcue aanucu gePH06UKU He õyðym yqumb16amt.c•H
  *Kcnepmo.u.
aanuuuune C60ð1 omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1
  ÕaaHKa Heòocmam0¼H0, 6b1 Moyeme ucnoab.goeamb
c)pypyo cmopt)HY õaawca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

Write back to Melanie
answering her questions.
Write
100-140 words.
Remember
the rules of letter writing.
You have
40 minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many countries have 'national service', where young adults must join the
army, navy or airforce for a certain period of time after leaving school. Some
countries, however, have recently stopped national service.
              What can you say for
and against national service?              Use the following plan
            Write 200-250 words.                                                           1.
Introduction (State the problem).
2.
Arguments
"for".
3.
Arguments
"against".
4.
Conclusion.

Test 12

                                  Pa3aeJ1
       IR)BopeHne

Bbl nonyqume Kapmoçy, Ha Komopoù
  npeòcmaeaeHbl mpu aaòaH11f1 c)'lfl ycmH0?0 omeema: C3 —
  me-uamuqec,çoe -uomžqozuqecxoe Bblc»caaweamte,
C4 — òua.R0? c ot;.ueHa
  cþaxmuqecwoñ lŒcþop.ua«ueù, C5 — c)uaaoe c
  oõ-uena OIVHO¼HOÚ 11Htþopeua«ueú.
  OKOH¼ClHlže KUYCÒO?0 onpeòeaaem 9K.3Œueuamop.
  Bo npoaeòenuq amoù qacmu .xaa.',tcwa uòem aanucb Ha
  ayò110Kaccemy.

3aaaHuq  3K3aMeHveMoro

STUDENT CARD

Remember to:
 be active and polite

Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes)

•
  get all the
  information you need
•
  decide on a
  pizza to order

Give a
2-minute talk on a famous person you

like.
Remember
to say:
•      who the famous person is
•      what he/she looks like
•      what he/she is famous for
•      why you like him/her
You have to
talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then
he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are on the telephone to Jolly's Pizza Company. You want to order a
family-size pizza to be delivered. The pizza topping must not contain any
chicken. You cannot pay more than £10.
Before making
a decision, ask the person who answers the phone about:
•      family-size pizzas on the menu today
•      the toppings
•      the cost
The teacher will play the
part of the person answering the telephone and will speak first.
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and
a friend want to take up a new hobby together. You are discussing possible
hobbies. You can start:
•      doing photography
•      painting and drawing
•      collecting stamps
•      making models (of aeroplanes, etc)
•      doing magic tricks
The teacher
will play the part of your friend. Remember to:
•      discuss all the options  take an active part in the
conversation and be polite
•      come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement
Section 1
Listening: second task
A
Look at the second
task on page 150 and read statements Al-A6. For each of the following
statements, tick the ones you think you are likely to hear in this dialogue.
Put a cross next to the ones you think you are unlikely to hear.
I 'Why don't we go and see what's on at the theatre?'
2
'I'd like to book some
tickets, please.'
3
'Now, would you like to
be in the centre or on the right or left?'
4
'One Night in Mexico is
on until Sunday the 23rd.'
5
'The seats on the sides
are slightly cheaper at £7.50, while the ones in the middle are
£8.50.'
6
'Okay, I'll take the
seats in the middle, please.'
7
'There is something
magical about watching a play in the theatre.'
8
'Certainly, madam. Which
performance were you interested in?'
B
Look at the
statements you have ticked in Exercise A. Decide whether you think they might
be said by the woman calling the theatre or by the theatre booking assistant.
The woman
calling the theatre might make statements
The theatre booking
assistant might make statements

Section 2 Reading: third task
C
Quickly read the
text on page 154. Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F).
I At first, the girls aren't sure what is under the rubbish.
TIF
2
The dog has been
injured in the past.         TIF
3
The dog is
generally in bad health. Tl F
4
Sally's father
believes you should help all stray animals.        TIF
5
The dog spends
all day lying on the towel.            TIF
6
Verity is happy
to leave the dog on the beach.            TIF
D
Complete each
sentence with a word from the text. You are given the first letter of the word
to help you.
First paragraph
I Don't drop your I on the floor! Put it in the bin.
2
Everyone fell silent when a UFO started to e from the sea.
Second paragraph
3      Would vou like k with your chips, or mayonnaise?
4      Do you live here p or only in the summer?
Third paragraph
5
Martin h for a few seconds and then dived
into the sea.
6
Some animals have
owners, but s dogs just live on the streets.

Fourth
  paragraph
7
  It seems like a
  cfight to keep up with all the work we get at school.
8
  Do you think
  any animals s when the forest caught fire?
Fifth
  paragraph
9
  From this hill,
  you can see the sun rise in the morning and sin the evening,
10
  I sa dog and it
  turned round and bit me on the hand!
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
third
  task
Quickly read the text on page 157, ignoring the gaps. Write a word or
  short phrase to answer each question.
1
  Who calls the
  woman late at night?
2
  Who does she
  meet and where?
3
  What does she
  buy?
4
  Where do they
  eat?

5 Whose birthday is the next day?
• Find words and phrases in the text
to match these words and phrases.
I stayed in bed longer than you
intended to
2      wasn't upset
3      slow walk

4      money you get to live on when you
stop work
5      sweater, pullover
6      very unpleasant
Section 4 Writing: second task
G

Read the second task on page
158. Work in pairs or as a group to make a list of all the arguments for and
against caring about appearance and fashion.

arguments for:

arguments against:

H
Put a tick next
to the points in the list above which you will mention in your composition. Put
a cross next to the points you will not mention.
Section 5 Speaking: third task
Look at the Student Card for Task 3 on page 159 and choose
'Do' or 'Don't' for each of the following statements:
1
Remember to ask
your friend for their opinion of each choice. Do I Don't
2
Just give vour
opinion without any explanation why.      Do (Don't
3
Wait for your
friend to ask questions and never ask them any.   Do I Don't
4
 Agree or disagree with your friend's suggestions and say why.         Do I Don't
5
Try to say as
much about each option as you can. Do I Don't
Complete these questions in as many different ways as you
can. Compare
your ideas to your partner's.

 go and watch the planes?
Why don't we ...

 going and watching the planes?

Pa3neJ1

Bbl ycat'ltuume 5 6b1CKa3btcaHUð1. Ycmanoaume
coomaemcmaue Ate.ycðy ßbtCKC13b16CIH1fflJft1 Kaycc)oeo poaopmgeeo 1 —
5 u ymaepycòeuumtu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 cnucxe A — F. Mcno.lbayùme
Kaycòyo tîYR6Y, ot;oauaqcuougyo ymeep.wòeuue, moat,K0
oðuu paa. B aaÒauuu ecmb   autuuee ymoepoeòeuue. Bbl
ycabltuume aanucb ()aa.ycÒbt. 3anecume ('6011 omaenlbl matîautgy.

A.
She likes this
subject because it helps her in life outside school.
B.
This subject
helps her understand other school subjects. C. Her feelings towards this
subject have changed over time.

D. She finds most of this
subject difficult to understand. E. She seems to have a natural talent for this
subject. F. This subject seems to her to be unimportant.

YTBepxneH11e

1

2

3

4                       5

Bbl ycabltuume meaecþ0HHb1ù paaeoeop c 'CaccilPOM
meampa-1bH0ù KClCCbl. Onpeòeaume, KCIK11e 11.3
npuaeòëHHbtr yn1ßep.ycòeH11ú Al-A6
coomaemcmayom coòepycamuo muccma (I ), KClKlle He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o
tië.u 6 mewme He ocaaano, mo ecmb Ha OCH06aHUU me»ccma He,1b3H ()amb HI/
noao.ycumeJ1bHOPO, omptugame.lbH0?0 omæma (3). Oõaeòume
HO.uep 6blÕpaHHO?0 6ŒU11 aapua,qma omeema. Bbl yc,lbltuume aanucb
()eayðbl.

      Al     The woman has been to
this theatre before.
                           l) BepH0                2)
HeBepHO                3) B -reKc•re He CKagaH0
     A2    The woman wants to book
tickets for all the members of her family.
                           l) BepH0               2)
HeBepHO                3) B •reKCTe He
     A3    The woman wants to see the
play at the weekend.
                          1) BepH0              2)
HeBepH0           3) B -reKCTe He CKa3t1HO
     A4    The woman decides to book
the most expensive tickets.
                           l) BepH0               2)
HeBePHO                3) B -reKCTe He cwa3ttH0
     A5    The assistant makes a
mistake with the booking.
                           1) BepH0                2)
HeBepH0                 3) B -reKc•re He
     A6    There is an extra charge
for booking the tickets by phone.
                          1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3)
B •reKœre Vie cKt13aH0

Test
  13

Bbl yc„lbauume
õeceòy mpeHepa Õacwemõ0J1bH0ù KOMaHðbt c
U?POKCLMU. B .3aòctHLtqx A7-Ä13 oõgeðume Igucþpy
1, 2 Will 3, coomeemcmeyoucy}0 6b1t5paHHOMY 6ŒM11 gapuamny omeema. Bbl
ycabltuume aanucb c)6ŒycÒbl.

The coach has called this meeting to
I) congratulate the players on their last match.

2) analyse what the players could do
better. 3) announce the team for the next match.

A8

Lisa is worried that the team doesn't have I) enough time to
  prepare.
2) the right facilities to train.
3) players who are good enough.

A9

The coach asks the players to
I) tell him who to blame for the loss.
2) give him their opinion of their own performance. 3)
  suggest new players for the team.

AIO

In the previous match, Lisa was most pleased by
1)
  her level of
  fitness.
2)
  the points she
  scored.
3)
  not running out
  of time.

All

The coach thinks the players have more energy because
  they have been I) running long distances.
2)
  doing weight
  training.
3)
  eating
  different food.

A12

Lisa
  blames her lack of concentration on 1) the noise in the stadium.
2)
  her future
  exams.
3)
  the other team.

A13

The coach advises Lisa to

1)    forget about her exams.
2)    take more exercise in the evening.
3)    do something she enjoys before bed.

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM
  CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,   omeembl Ha    m,
  Al-Ä13               qacrnax
  óaaHKC1. BI pacnoaoyceuo HUYCHeÙ t-tacmu tîaamca. [Ipu
  nepenoce omeemoø 6 3aðaHuu

                                      Pa3aeJ1        LIrreHne

TeMa

1        2

3

4

5

6

Ycmanoeume coomeemcmeue me.u A — G mexcmaat I — 6. 3cmecume caou omaembl a
maõnuqy. Mcno.lbayùme Kaycðyo õYKßY moabK0
oÒ11H paa. B aaðauuu oðHa me.'ta JIUIUHMI.

A. FAST
HUNTER B. POWERFUL DIGGER
c. PATIENT KILLER
D.      TALENTED BUILDER
E.       FAITHFUL FOLLOWER
F.       STRONG LIFTER
G.      CLEVER HELPER

1
2
3
4
5
6

You may have seen
  dolphins performing tricks, but did you know that they are amongst the most
  intelligent creatures on the Earth? They are so intelligent that they can be
  trained to assist divers in the sea. They are sometimes used by the US Navy
  to search harbours for mines. They also seem to know when humans in the sea
  are in trouble. There have been a number Of reports of dolphins protecting
  swimmers from sharks until the humans can escape.
How do you get a
  duckling to go everywhere you do? The secret is to take advantage of its
  powerful instincts. A duckling is programmed by nature to think that the
  first large moving object it sees is its mother. This is so that it doesn't
  get lost while very young. If, Instead, the first thing it sees is a human's
  green wellington boots, the duckling will go wherever the boots go.
Imagine carrying a
  huge leaf or an enormous piece of food on your back that weighs 50 times more
  than you do. It sounds impossible, but that's exactly what millions of ants
  do every day. Different ants might have different jobs in the colony and for
  some of them that means going out and about, searching for things to eat.
  Once they find a small piece of fruit or a grain of sugar, they have to bring
  it back home — and the only way to do that is on their backs.
One of the most
  unusual spiders in Australia is the trapdoor spider. This spider doesn't spin
  a web in a bush or tree but creates a trap on the ground. It digs a hole and
  covers the entrance. It then waits, sometimes for hours, for its prey to walk
  into the trap. When it finally senses an insect such as a beetle or a moth
  outside, the trapdoor spider comes out and takes its meal back into its hole
  to enjoy in private.
Most birds collect twigs and leaves to
  create a nest, and you've probably seen them in trees. However, most birds
  look like beginners next to the weaver birds of Africa. The weaver birds put
  together an enormous nest I Oft high and 15ft across. The nest is more like a
  block of flats! It consists of up to 300 separate 'rooms', each with a
  nesting pair of birds inside, which get into their private nest through a
  tunnel at the bottom.
The cheetah is
  perfectly suited to a life where speed is all-important. It spends its time
  on the wide open plains of Africa, searching for food and caring for its
  young. A cheetah can reach speeds of up to 70 miles per hour for short
  periods, and it needs every bit of that speed to catch its prey. Gazelles and
  other similar animals are quick and the cheetah has to be quick to catch
  them. Despite their ability to run so well, the cheetah is still only
  successful in catching its prey about fifty per cent of the time.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test
  13

[Ipouumañme ymcepycòeH11H 1 — 6 u
  caeòyougue aa HILUU mexcnlbl. YcmaH06ume coomeemcnwue
.ueycòy
  yn16ep.ycðeH1[f1.uu u coc)epyŒueu moccmoe. Hamuuume l!lltþpy 1
  — ecau ymeepycðeuue

I Birmingham grew because it was easy
  to get coal and iron there.
2
  The Birmingham Carnival lasts for a month.
3
  People from lots of different cultures live in Birmingham.
4
  Every year,
  actors perform at Aston Hal.
5
  Ships from
  Glasgow took rum and tobacco to America.
6
  Glasgow recently became zeell known for its sport.

Birmingham is
  England's second city. It has always had a good supply of water and the easy
  access to coal and iron meant that it became an important industrial centre.
  Today, heavy industry is less important to Birmingham. Other parts of the
  local economy, such as shopping and tourism, now provide jobs and an income
  for many people.
One of the highlights of the year is
  the Birmingham Carnival. This takes place one day in August and includes
  music, dancing, food and arts and crafts. It is a great opportunity to find
  out about the many different cultures that make up modern-day Birmingham. The
  city has Chinese, Muslim, Hindu and Sikh communities, all with their own
  cultural traditions.
A great place to visit in the local area is Aston Hall. Completed in
  1635, the hall contains examples of furniture and paintings from different
  historical periods. Every two years, you can attend 'Aston Hall by
  Candlelight', when the house is lit by candles and actors recreate a
  17th-century Christmas,
Glasgow is a modern, multicultural city in Scotland
  with a long history. Starting as a fishing village, by the end of the 18th
  century it had become a centre for shipbuilding. Being on the west of
  Scotland meant that it was in an excellent position for sending ships full of
  cloth and iron to America and the West Indies. These ships brought back
  sugar, rum and tobacco and Glasgow grew. Many local merchants became rich
  through trade.
Glasgow has long been
  famous for its sport. The two biggest teams in Scottish football, Celtic and
  Rangers, are both based in Glasgow and it was the European Capital of Sport
  in 2003. There are three world-class football stadiums in Glasgow and the
  Glaswegians (as people from Glasgow are called) are very proud of their
  sporting history.

17poqumaùme merccm u Bbtnoamume .3aÒaHUH A14-A20,
OÕ60ÒR gucþpy I, 2, 3 unu 4, coomeemcmøyoucwo
HŒuepy 6b1t5PaHHO?O ea.uu eapuawna omeema.

When
they first saw the dog, they weren't sure, in fact, that it was a dog. A small
pile of rubbish by the side of the litter bin began to move. Verity and Sally,
walking past on their way to the beach, both jumped back, expecting a rat to
emerge from the litter. \That they saw instead was the back end of a small
brown dog, which seemed to be connected to a plastic bag. They both let out
shrieks of delight.
'Oh,
it's a puppy!' cried Verity, and bent down to release the dog's head from the
plastic bag. The dog looked up at them with ketchup on its face. Now that they
could see the whole animal, it was clear that it was not quite as young as
Verity had thought at first sight. It carried one or two scars of life on the
streets — it had a cut below one eye and one ear seemed to be permanently at an
angle — but on the whole it was not in bad health for a stray dog. Its coat was
shiny and you couldn't see its ribs under the skin, like you could with many
dogs in a similar position. Judging by the litter bin, visitors to the beach
were a good source of chips, hot dogs and hamburgers without knowing it. The
dog sat, looking up at the girls with its tongue hanging out as it panted.

'Come on,' said Verity. 'Let's
take him down to the beach!' Sally hesitated a moment before agreeing. She
could see where it was leading. Her father always told her to walk away from a
stray animal because there was a danger you would want to keep it. Then it
would be harder when you actually did have to walk away. However, she couldn't
deny that the dog was cute, so she was pleased when it trotted along behind
them on the way to the beach.
They
spread their towels on the beach and got sun cream out of their bags. When they
turned round, the dog had settled on one of the towels as if he owned the
place. He seemed glad of the opportunity to rest and Verity could imagine the
constant battle he faced each day to survive. Apart from the search for food
and shelter, which perhaps were less of a problem here than they would have
been in the city centre, there was the competition from other dogs. This dog
must be pretty smart, she decided, to survive against the others because he
certainly wouldn't win too many fights, even if his injuries showed that he
didn't give up easily.
They spent the day
lazing in the sun, swimming and plaving beach tennis. The dog joined in after
resting for a while. To the casual observer, it would have looked like two
girls and their dog playing together. Sally knew, however, that that wasn't the
case and she was dreading the moment when they would have to leave. Eventually,
the sun began to set and it got cooler. Verity stared at the sun, as if willing
it to stay in the sky for another hour. She avoided looking at Sally and didn't
seem to notice Sally looking at her watch. Veritv stroked the dog, which was
lying on the towel next to her. Sally knew that they couldn't put it off any
longer.
'It's
probably time we were getting back,' she said at last. Verity turned round and
Sallv saw tears running down her face. The dog looked from one of them to the
other and waited.

Test
  13

Verity and Sally's first reaction is
1) amusement at the dog's appearance.
2)
worry about the
dog's condition.

A15

The dog seems to be
I) in good condition despite its injuries.
2)
  in a worse
  state than most stray dogs.
3)
  rather
  overweight for its size.
4)
  in urgent need
  of medical attention.

A16

It seems that people
  who go to this beach 1) enjoy feeding the stray dogs.
2)
  are careless
  with their rubbish.
3)
  throw a lot of
  food away.
4)
  don't know they
  are harming the dogs.

Al 7

Sally doesn't immediately agree to
  take the dog to the beach because 1) they don't have a lead to put on the dog
  to control it.
2)
  her father
  stops her from doing what she wants to do.
3)
  she thinks the
  dog might be dangerous, in spite of his appearance. 4) she doesn't want to
  form a relationship with the dog.

AIS

Verity thinks that the dog
l) needs their help to avoid the other dogs.
2)
  is a coward
  when it comes to fighting other dogs.
3)
  is more
  attractive than the other dogs.
4)
  uses his brains
  to beat the other dogs.

A19

The girls don't want to
  leave the beach because 1) they think the dog will be attacked.
2)
  they want to
  sunbathe for another hour.
3)
  they want
  people to think it's their dog.
4)
  they are trying
  to delay leaving the dog.

A20

Sally feels uncomfortable because
1) she and Verity have argued about the dog.

3)

fright at
what might be under the rubbish. 4) curiosity at the dog's behaviour.
2)   she thinks that someone is watching
them.
3)   she knows that leaving the dog will
be hard.
4)   she wants to get rid of the dog
without Verity knowing.

no        B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE
  3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B FAÄHK OTBETOB
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo omaernbl Ha           B2, B3 u A14-A20
  pacnoaapa,tomca 6 pa.3HbLr qacmnx ÕaaHKa. B2, B3         6
  Hid.YCHeå yacmu õaawca. Ilpu nepeHoce omaemoe
  aaòamžqx B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucbtacuomcn õea
  npoõeaog u 3}fflK06 npetlllhta,qua.

Test13

B4
B6
B8
B9
BIO
Bll

Paper
We use paper today in many different ways — in books
  and in newspapers, for example. Although  people probably don't think about
  its history, paper goes back a long way.
The
  ancient Egyptians  down plants that grew along the River Nile.
The plants,
  which  to be cooked, were added to water.
This liquid
   to dry in the sun on special screens.
This 'papyrus' gave us the word 'paper', but paper  wasn't invented until 105 AD.
In that year, a Chinese man called Ts'ai Lun created
  paper bamboo and bits of old cloth.
By 1,000
  AD, the secret of paper-making still  Europe.
Since the technology
  finally arrived in Spain and Italy in the twelfth century, paper          into a part
  of everyone's lives.

MORE
CUT
NEED
LEAVE
IT
USE
NOT REACH
GROW

                         Pa3aeJ1           rpaMMaTVIKa
JleKCHKa

Tlpoqumaúme meK•cm 3anoaHume
  nponycK11 6 npeòaoycenuax nor) no-uepaatu B4-BI I    cþop.ua.ltu
  caoa, HaneqamaHHbtx aaeaa6HbtMU t5ycoa.uu cnpaaa om KaycÒoeo
  npeòno.yceH11H.

Ilpoqumaùme  Hityce mcwcm
  Tlpeoõpaavùme cu106a, HaneqamaHHb1e acuaaBHb1.uu
ÕYKUŒUU nocae H0Atep06 BI
  2-1318 ma,tc, qmoõbl OHU epa.uatamuqeucu u JWRC11qeCKU
  coomaemcn1606Œlll coòepycamuo mewma. 3an0JIHume nponycyu
  ,'10AVqeHHbLUU c.i06Œuu. Kaycòblü nponycK coomeemcmeyem
  omðeJ1bH0MY aaðaHll}0 epynnbl B12-B 18.

B12
B13
B14
B15
1316
B17
B18

It is  to travel back in time millions of
  years. However, visit many museums and you will see detailed models of huge, dinosaurs that once walked the
  Earth. When experts study these creatures, where do they get their  from? The answer is fossils. When
  an animal dies, its  body can sometimes become covered in a thin layer of
  earth. In certain circumstances, this layer of earth can  and turn into rock over time and
  the shape of the animal is preserved inside. We can learn a lot about the  of an animal from a fossil. We can
  learn about its , its behaviour and even its diet.

POSSIBLE POWER
INFORM DIE
HARD
LIVE
APPEAR

Test 13

Ilpoqumaùme meyçcm c
  npon_vcyca.M1d, OÕ03HaqeHHb1AtU H0AtepŒ',t11 A21-A28. 3mu Hoeuepa
A21-A28, 6 Komopblx npeðcmaeaeHbl 60aUOYCHbte
  6apuaHÐ1b1 omeemoe. Oõ6eòume H0.uep
  ßb1õpaHH0?0 aa.uu oapuaHtna omeema.

Monday,
  14th March
I overslept
  this morning. I don't know how it happened. I'm sure I A21  the alarm last night as usual. At
  least, I think I did. I remember having a cup of tea, turning the TV off and
  putting the cat outside. Then the phone rang. It was my granddaughter, Zoe.
  She had been
A22  in her school play and she wanted to tell me all about it.
  I must say it sounded wonderful! I A23  not going, but if I went to see
  everything my grandchildren did, I would never have any time for myself.
Anyway, whatever the reason was, my
  alarm didn't A24  off this morning, so I was late meeting Rita for coffee.
  She said she didn't mind, though, because she had a good book to read. We
  chatted for half an hour and then went to have a wander round the shops.
  Everything seems so expensive these days, or it does to those of us who have
  A25  from work. It's not easy living on a pension. In the end,
  I just bought some wool for a jumper I'm making and Rita bought a new hat.
we had A26  our usual bus home, so we decided to have lunch in one of
  those fast food places. I'd never been in one before, but Rita said she had,
  with her grandson. I let her order the food and we sat down to eat. Well,
  I've never had anything so disgusting in my whole life! The chips were so
  salty I couldn't eat them. The other thing was like a bread roll with a
  beefburger and cheese on it. It turned A27  to be a 'special cheeseburger',
  although it didn't seem very special to me. It tasted like cardboard. I don't
  think I'll be going in a place like that again.
Tomorrow is
  my eldest son Darren's birthday and we're planmng to have a nice picnic in
  the countryside. I can't believe that he's about to A28  fifty. How old does that make me?
  Don't ask!

A21                  l) set                        2) put                    3)
did                   4) timed
A22                  I) appearing           2) playing             3)
standing          4) dramatising
A23                 1) reject                  2) repent               3)
resent               4) regret

no        B4-B18, A21-A28 HE
  3AbYUbTE [TEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB
ObPATÞfTE
  BHMMAHME, qmo omaenlbl Ha B4-B18 u A21-A28 pacnoaaecuomcfi 6 pa.3LlbLr qacnmx
  õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHbl 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu atamca. Ilpu
  nepenoce omaemoe 6 .3aÒClHURV B4-B18 õYK6b1 .3anucb16a,tomcf1
  õe.3 npoõeaoa u ,3HOK06 npenll/tcmu.q.

A24                 1) go                        2)
come                 3) bring               4) sound
A25                  l) ceased                 2) retired               3)
retreated          4) fired
A26                  I) lost                      2)
dropped           3) missed             4) failed
                          l) round                  2) down                 3) off                    4)
out
A28                  1) get                        2)
turn                    3) make               4) have

                                     Pa3aeJ1
     11MCbMO

Ha                             Cl,
  C2 ucn0J1b3Yùme WIAHK OTBETOB .½2.
Ilpu 6btYlOJ1}WHuu
  aaðcmuù CI u C2 ocoõoe 6HlLUClHUe oõpamume Ha mo,
  Limo eatuu omeenlbl t;yòym ogeHlŒan1bO'H mo.1bK0 no aanucfl.u,
  cÒeaaHHblJ1 B K'IAHKE OTBETOB .½2. Htm•axue aanucu etePH06UKa
  He tîvðym yqurnb16ambc•fl .9KcnepmoM.
17pu FE7AHKA OTBETOB
  .Nþ2  cHaqaaa C], C2 aamuuume CBOù omeem Ecau
  OÒHOÙ cmOPOHb1 õaaHKa HeðocmamotlH0, 6b/ Moyeme
  ucnoab306amb òpyeyo cmop0HY âqamca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.

Test
  13

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

.Doyourparents       annoyedwithyou
       bedroom's untidy? Mine do. My says I'm really lazy because / never tidy
  my room. How  tia'yyour room? Do keep it althe tinte?/ think it's my  so /      what
  / (ike it! what think? What deyou whenyou argue withyourparents about things
  like that?
Write
  back soon,
Love,
Tracy

Write back to
Tracy answering her questions.
Write 100-140
words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Most people believe that it's important to look nice. However, some
people say that we place too much importance on appearance and fashion.
What can you
say for and against caring about Use the following plan appearance and fashion?
I. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments
"for".
3.
Arguments
"against".
4.
Conclusion.

                            Pa3neJ1         roBopeHne

Bbl noayqume ,tcapmowcy, Ha Komopoù
  npeòcmawwHb1 mpu aaÒaH1df1 ycnmo¿o omeema: C3 —
  me.uamuqecycoe .M0Hono¿uqecvcoe BblCKa3b1BaHUe,
C4 —
  ()uaaoe c tgevlb10 ot5.ueHa cþcwmuqecwoú
  uncþop.ua«ueù, C5 — ÒuŒ10Z c 1101b10 oõMeHC1
OIVHOLIHOÙ
  UHCþOPMCl"Ueðl. OKOHqaHUe 6b1PIOJIHeH11.q Kaycðozo
  .3aÒaH11fl onpeðeutflem 3K3Œuenamop. Bo upeJffl
  npoeeÒeHlffl omoð1 qacmu .9K.3aateHC1 uòem nocn10HHHafl
  .3anucb Ha ayòu0Kaccemy.

3aaaHv1S1 3K'3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task I
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on public holidays. Remember to say:
•     what public holidays there are during
the year
•     what people do on different public
holidays
•     which public holiday is your
favourite, and why
•     what you enjoy about other public
holidays, and why
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then heishe will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)

You are in a bookshop. You would
like to start learning Italian. You want to be able to speak a little Italian
when you go there on holiday in six months' time. You do not own a computer.
Before making a decision,
ask the shop assistant about:
•      Italian courses available
•      how long the courses take
•      any special offers
You begin the conversation. The teacher will play the part of the shop
assistant.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on which course to buy
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You are at an airport and your flight has been delayed by two hours. You
and your friend are discussing how to spend this time. You can:
•      play video games
•      do some shopping
•      watch the planes
•      have a meal
•      find somewhere to sleep
The teacher
will play the part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•      discuss all the options  take an active part in the
conversation and be polite  come up with ideas
•      give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account
•      invite vour friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement

        Section 1 Listening: third task                Section
  2 Reading: first task
        A        Listen and circle.                               B
  Match the words to their definitions.

a film. For each speaker, decide what
the
speaker did not like about the
Speaker 1 the
acting / the special effects / the story
Speaker 2 the acting /
the special effects the story Speaker 3 the acting / the special effects the
story
3
Listen to three speakers talking about a game. For each speaker, decide what
the speaker found difficult. Speaker 1 understanding the rules / moving the
pieces / setting up the board Speaker 2 understanding the rules / moving the
pieces / setting up the board Speaker 3 understanding the rules / moving the pieces / setting up the
board

1 Listen to three speakers talking about

a the clothes which actors

a restaurant. For each speaker,

I

rehearsal —

wear

decide what the speaker did not like

b the small book or leaflet

about the restaurant.

2

stage _

with information about

Speaker 1

the play

the prices / the service the food

3

costumes

c the things actors use in

Speaker 2

a play

the prices / the service / the food

4

director

d a time for the actors to

SPeaker 3

5

practise

programme

the prices / the service / the food

e the person who tells the

2 Listen to three speakers talking
  about

6

actors what to do part _

f the character that an actor
7
props — is
playing g the people watching a
8

audience _ play h the
place where the actors perform
C  Quickly read the headings and six
texts in the task on page 164. Underline all the words and phrases connected to
the theatre and acting.
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
third
task
D  Write a word from the box in each gap
to complete the sentences.
            burgled • mugged • robbed stolen
1
I hope you
weren't in the bank when it was being
2
Oh no! I think my
wallet's been

3
Our
neighbours' house was again last night.
4
Alan was  in the street last night; he was hurt
but his attackers ran off before they could steal anything.

5
At  I thought you were guilty, but now
I'm not so sure.
6
There were five
people in the room at  ; probably fewer, in fact.
7
The exam was very
difficult but at
 I managed to answer every question.
8
I've heard so
much about you; it's so nice to meet you at
 disaster • destruction • damage • ruin
9
The house was
almost a when we bought it; the walls had fallen down!
10
The  of the rainforests is a very serious
problem.
11
The storm only
caused a small amount of  to the building.
12
The meal would
have been a if you hadn't helped me.
Section 4 Writing: first task
E
Read the first
task on page 170. Rewrite each of the following statements in a more informal
way. There may be more than one possibility.
1    Dear Jenny Williams,

2    1 would like to thank you for your
recent letter.

3    1 had a similar experience and I
found it unpleasant.

4    Would you mind telling me whether you
know the girl well?

5

I would
advise you to inform the girl of your feelings.

6    I look forward to hearing from you in
the
7
F
Match each
response to a question.
1    When's your birthday?
2    What do you usually do on your
birthday?
3
What's the best birthday
present you've ever been given?
f
G
Work in pairs or
as a group to discuss which answer for each question is better, and why.

Test
  14

                                              Pa3neJ1          AYAMI)0BaHÞfe

Bbl ycalbltuume 5 6btcyca3b16CIHuÙ. YcmaH06ume
  coomæmcmaue Me.ycÒy 6b1CKa3b16CIHURMU KCIYCÒOZO
  zoeopaugeeo I — 5 u ymeepYÒeH11HJtu,  cnucyce A — F.
  Mcno„Qb.3Yùme Kaycòyo õycey, oÕo.3Hauawu0'}0
  ymgepycòemw, mŒ1bK0 omm pa.3. B aaðanuu ecmb oðno auumee
  ymaep*òenue.

A.
She reads more
now than she used to.
B.
She doesn't buy
books very often. C. She reads on the way to work every day.

D. She's teaching her children
to read at the moment. E. She prefers reading books for children. F. She wants
to write a book one day.

Bbl ycabltuume
  õeceðy apaqa c naguewno.u. Onpeòenume, }-ccucue 11.3
  nPUeeÒëHHblX ymeepYòeH11ù Al-A6 coomæmcmeyom
  coòepyamuo meR•cma (1 ), KŒcue He coomuemcmeyom (2) u o qëM
  6 mexcme He CKa.3tlHO, mo ecmb Ha ocH06tmuu mexcma Healb3f1 c)amb HI/
  noaoycume.lb,qozo, Hil omeema (3). Oõgeðume Howuep
  6b1ÕpaHHO?O ea.uu gapuawna omeema. Bbl yc-lbltuume .3anucb
  ðeaycòbl.

          Al     Mr Briggs often gets
ill.
                                 l) BepH0              2)
HeBepH0            3) B •reKcTe He CKa-gaHO
         A2     Another name for Mr
Briggs' illness is the 'kissing disease'.
1)   BepH0             2) HeBepHO          3)
B •rewre He CKtuaHO
         A3     Mr Briggs must start
taking some medicine immediately.
                                 l)
BepHO               2) HeBepHO               3) B •reKCTe He cK',13t1H0
         A4    Mr Briggs usually
drinks some wine or beer in the evening.
                                 1)
BepH0               2) HeBepHO                3) B •reKc•re He cwa•gaH0
         A5    Everyone with this
illness recovers within three weeks.
                                 1)
BepH0                2) HeBepH0               3) B -reKc-re He CK[13aHO
         A6    Mr Briggs will see the
doctor again next Friday.
                                  l)
BepH0                  2) HeBepHO                   3) B •rewre He CKt13t1HO
Test
14

Bbl ycablluume
dblCKa3b16t1H11S1 aR)ðeù1 6 ce.uu paœ11d¼Hb1X cumva«unv.
(_)maemwne Ha aonpocbt no coòepY(lHll/0 6b1cxa.3btuaH11ù,
6b1õpaa oòt1H 11.3 npeòaoyceHHb1.r aapuaumot$ ome,ema. B
aaòaHll$1X A7-A13 oõaeòume 1/11Cþpy 1, 2 IL?LI 3,
oõoanaqŒ0110'10 omaem, Komopblù e,Œu Kaycemcfl
naut;oaee

Bbl yc.lbltuume
Kaycòoe 6b1CKa.3btacmue Òaa.ycÒb1.

     You will hear a man talking about a restaurant called Luigi's. What
was the problem?
I) The food was too
expensive.
2)   His meal was cold.

A8

You will hear a woman talking to her
  doctor. Why has she come to see the doctor?
I) She has got spots all over her face.
2)
  She has a
  problem with her stomach.
3)   She has been getting backache
  recently.
You will hear a boy talking to his parents. What does he want?
l) to watch a film on TV 2) to go to bed later than
  usual
3) a new computer game

AIO

You will hear an athlete talking about her training. What
  does she find difficult?
1)
  getting up
  early
2)
  running in the
  rain
3)
  running on her
  own

All

You will hear a news report about a
  man. What did the man do?
1)
  He bought
  stolen property.
2)
  He committed
  some burglaries.
3)
  He failed to
  appear in court.

A12

You will hear a woman talking about a film. What does she
  think about the film?
1)
  It is funny.
2)
  It is boring.
3)
  It has a good
  ending.

A13

You will hear an advertisement.
  What makes the company different?

3)

The service was poor.
l) They offer
free design. 2) They offer free delivery.
3) They offer
free installation.

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTLI CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHHMAHME, gyno omoenlbl HO' aaÒaH11f1 BI, Al-A13
  pacnoaaea,zomctH 6 pae3HbLV qacmnr õaamca. BI pacnonoyceH0 e
  HUYCHeñ qacmu Õaamca. Ilpu nepeHoce on16em06 6 .3aðaHt111
  BI õYKßb1 aanucbte,cnomcfl t5ea npoõeJ10ß u
  ,3HCIK06 npen11HaH11.q.

rest 14
                                      Pa3aeJ1        I-IrreHne

YcmaH0Bume
  coomæmcmaue me.}' A — G  I — 6. a-mecume ('6011 omeenlbl B
  maõautgy. Mcnoab.gyùme KaycÒYR) t5YKB_v mŒQbKO
  oÒurt paa. B aaðcutuu oðna me-'ta JIUtU1t51fl.

A. FINAL PRACTICE B. PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS
c. UNSEEN PEOPLE
D.     ACTORS' CLOTHES
E.      REMEMBERING
WORDS
F.      INFORMATION
BOOKLET G. WRONG WORDS

Ng "RKCTa
Testa

1

      2

3

I Congratulations!
  the difficult
  bit: should you learn and, the more you lot of work to do at
2
  The last rehearsal almost never go well. performance in front
  whole play has been costumes have been
3
  Costumes are an create the wrong to feel comfortable

director's just called
and you've got the part you wanted in the play. Now comes learning your lines.
If it's a main part, that's a lot of speech to memorise. So how script?
Firstly, don't panic. You don't have to be word perfect in the first rehearsal
actually rehearse on stage, the easier memorising your lines becomes. But there
is a home too.
of a play before the
first performance is called the 'dress rehearsal'. Dress rehearsals Indeed,
many actors believe that if the dress rehearsal goes well, the first of the
public will be a disaster! The dress rehearsal is probably the first time the
performed from start to finish in one go. It's also probably the first time all
the worn, the lighting plan has been followed, and all the props have been
used. extremely important part of any production. If you get the costumes
wrong, you atmosphere, and that can be disastrous for a play. It's also very
important for an actor in what they're wearing. There are practical
considerations here. A costume may be lovely to look at, but if it stops an
actor from moving in the way that he or she wants to, then it's getting in the
way of the performance and should be changed.
4
One of the worst things you can do to an actor before a performance is wish him
or her 'Good luck!' In the theatre in Britain, saying 'Good luck!' is
considered very bad luck, and should be avoided at all costs. If you want to
express the meaning without actuallv using those words, you should say 'Break a
leg!'. This doesn't mean, of course, that you want the actor to break a leg. It
means you hope that their performance is a success.
5
The programme is the audience's first contact with the play on
the night, and it's important to make a good impression. A good programme
should give background information about the play if necessary, short
biographies of the playwright, the cast, and director and the full cast list,
including the names of the characters they are plaving. The names of all the
backstage crew should be listed in the programme too. If there are different
scenes and acts in the play, these should be mentioned. If there's an interval,
that should be indicated as well.
6
A play cannot be put on without a number of people who the
audience never get to see. The director is one such person. There's also the
backstage crew, and they do an extremely important job. The director has
responsibility for the play during rehearsals, but it's a member of the
backstage crew, the stage manager, who's in charge during performances.
Lighting technicians, costume designers and sound engineers are all also part
of the backstage crew.

Test
  14

Ilpoqumaùme ymoepYòeH11H 1 — 6 u
caeòyouguðl aa HILUII maccm Ycmanoaume coomaemcmaue vueyòy
ymeepycòeH11f1vuu u coòep.ycanue.&t mexcma. Hamuuume
uucþpy 1 — ecau ymaepyòenue aepttoe, u I'll(þpy O — ec,lld
ymaepycòenue Heeepnoe. 30Hecume ('6011 omaenlbl 6 maõau«y.

I
2
3
4
5
6
it

The ancient
Egyptians made use of the sun to help tell the time.
The ancient Chinese were unable to measure time.
The first
mechanical clocks had bells rather than hands.
The hand on a table clock moved every fifteen minutes.
Most people say that Galileo invented the pendulum clock.
Clocks nowadays are used for more than just showing us what
time is.

What time is it? To answer that
question today, all we have to do is look at a watch or clock. It wasn't always
that simple, however.
For thousands of years, people have wanted a more accurate way of telling
the time than merelv looking at the position of the sun in the sky to see how
close to dawn or nightfall it is. We know that the ancient Egyptians had
sundials, which required sunlight to work, and it is thought they also had a
way of measuring time using running water. The ancient Chinese also developed
non-mechanical ways to measure the passing of time. The first mechanical clock
appeared around the 9th century. This did not have hands as modern clocks do.
Early mechanical clocks 'told' the time by ringing bells, although they were
not very accurate.
The first reasonably accurate clocks were developed in Italy in the 13th
century. Unlike modern clocks, they did not tell the time to the nearest
minute; rather, they announced when an hour had passed.
Table clocks
became popular in the 1500s. They usually only had one hand, which had four
possible positions each hour, allowing someone to tell the time to the nearest
fifteen minutes.

1

2

4

5

6

In 1657 the pendulum clock was invented. Although Galileo came up with a
similar idea first, it is Christiaan Huygens who is generally considered to be
the inventor. Since then, clocks have become more and more accurate. Today,
clocks are not just used to tell us the time. They are also used to control
other devices. The clock on a video cassette recorder, for example, can be
programmed to start and stop recording at a certain time.

npoqumaùme meKcm u 6btnoaHume .3ac)aHtlH A14-A20, OÕ60Òf1
tgucþpy 1, 2, 3 11.111 4, coomuemcme_woucwo H0Mepy 6btõpaHH0?0
6Œuu 6apuawna omeema.

A14

Carrie had chosen to join the
  Debating Club because it was 1) at the bottom of the list of possible
  activities.
2)
  the only
  activity which didn't take place outdoors.
3)
  the activity on
  the list she disliked least of all.
4)
  a chance to
  give speeches in front of strangers.

A15

The following Thursday,
  Carrie realised for the first time that 1) she would actually have to speak
  in public.
2)
  she didn't
  believe in capital punishment at all.
3)
  Miss Forbes
  would always decide the speakers.
4)
  she was allowed
  to volunteer to be a speaker.

A16

Miss Forbes told Carrie that
  Carrie's main responsibility would be to 1) help Alison come up with a list
  of points to make.
2)
  write Alison's
  speech for her before the debate.
3)
  answer the
  opposition's questions during the debate.
4)
  disagree with
  arguments made by the opposing team.

Al 7

Carrie was glad the debate had been
  arranged at another school because 1) she would be able to use a microphone
  there.
2)
  her friends
  wouldn't be able to see her fail.
3)
  the atmosphere
  would help her succeed.
4)
  she had never
  taken part in a debate there.

(AIS

In
  the Main Hall before the debate, Carrie felt that everyone in the room 1)
  could hear her heart beating.
2)
  was looking at
  her hands shaking.
3)
  expected her to
  do badly.
4)
  knew she would
  drop her things.

A19

Carrie was particularly impressed
  that Alison
l) had written her speech on several pieces of paper.
2)
  had made so
  many clear, forceful arguments.
3)
  didn't look at
  the papers in front of her at all.
4)
  had memorised
  her speech before the debate.

A20

During Clare's speech, Carrie was
  surprised that she I) had found a point to make in her own speech.

2)   was able to remember Clare's exact
words.
3)

had time to make a note next to
Clare's words.
4)   could make notes on the piece of
paper so quickly.

[10 OKOHWHUU 132, 133 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE
  [IEPEHECTM CBOII OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeembt Ha aaðaH11H B2, B3 u A14-Ä20
  pacnoaazŒomcH 6 PC13HbLV qacmax tîaawca. B2, B3
  pacno.ao.yceHb1 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa. Tlpu nepeHoce omesem06
  6 3aðaHlŒx B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucb16a»omcH õea
  npoõeA06 u 3HaK06 npemu-taHlffl.

                           Pa3aeJ1           rpaMMaTÐIKa
JleKCHKa

Test 14

[Ipoqumaúme mel€cm 3ano.QHume
nponycK11 6 npeòaoyceHllfLr noð H0.uepa.uu B4-BI I
coome,emcmeyouguatu cþOPMŒuu c-106, '-taneqamaHHbLr saua6HbLMU
ÕYK6CLUll cnpa6a om rcaycÒo¿o npeòJ10yeHllH.

npoqumaùyne
  npueeðeHHblù Hil.yce me}ccm Ilpeoõpaayùme
  caoøa, HaneqamaHHbte aa¿aaBHbLML1 nocae
  H0Jtep0ß B12-B18 maK, qmoõbl OHII epa,u.uamuqecycu u
  JWKCI"WCKU coomæmcmeoaaau coòepyaH1110 meKcma. 301/10JIHume
  nponycycu noayt1C'HHbLUU caoaaatu. Kaycòblù nponycK
  coomeemcmeyem omòeabH0MY aaòamuo 113 ppynžlbl B12-B 18.

Since the days of Christopher Columbus it has been a tradition for a ship
B12     to fly a flag showing what  it is.
            B13       More recently,
this has become a legal
            B14       Almost every
country in the world has its own  flag, called
an 'ensign', which is
flown at sea. Some countries have two ensigns:
B15 one for private boats and one for ships carrying a cargo of products. A boat in the waters of a
foreign country should always fly two flags: its own ensign and the flag of the
foreign country. To not fly the
            B16    other country's flag  meant you had not come in peace.
B17       Even today, the rules  the flying of flags on boats and
ships are often strictly enforced.
Ensigns should not be confused with flags used for signalling. With these
flags, there is one flag for every number and letter of the alphabet and B18
each flag has an additional when used on its own.

[Ipoqumaùme
  moccm c nponycpca.uu, OÕ03HaqeHHbL8tll Ho-uepa.uu A21-A28. 3mu H0.uepa
  coomgemcmøyom aaÒCIHUfLVt A21-Ä28, 6 npeòcmaaaeHbl
  60.1UOYCHblC' e,apucmmbl omeemoe. Oõeeòume H0Jtep
  6blÕPaHH020 ea.uu eapuawna omeema.

Tonya didn't know whether to laugh or cry. She certainly
  knew she'd never been in a situation like this before, and hoped she never
  would again. She also knew that the worst A21  would be to panic. She had to stay
  calm. She sat on a bench to think things through. 'I'm in a foreign country,' she said to herself. 'All
  my money, my mobile phone and my passport were in my bag. My bag's been A22  Or maybe I just left it somewhere
  — I don't know. Should I go to the police or the embassy?'
She decided to go to the police first, Maybe, just maybe, someone had
  A23 in her bag or the thief had been caught. But how would she find the
  nearest police station? She'd have to ask someone.
The man in the newsagent's was helpful and polite, which put a slight
  smile back on Tonya's face, and she soon found herself talking to a police
  officer in Marylebone Police Station. 'Thank goodness my English isn't bad.
  At A24  I can communicate easily,' she thought. 'It would be a lot
  worse if I couldn't understand 8that he was asking me.'
The officer took down
  her A25  and went to see if her bag was in the lost property room.
  'Oh, please let it be there,' thought Tonya. 'What am I going to do if it's
  not?'
When the officer returned, she saw from the expression on his face that
  her worst fears had been realised. Now she really was in A26  She wiped away the tears that were
  starting to run down her cheeks.
'Please don't get upset,' he said
  kindly. 'Every problem's got a solution. I'm not quite sure what yours is in
  this A27  , but I'm sure there is one. You did the right thing
  coming to us anyway.'
Three hours later, Tonya was sitting in a small room in the embassy.
  From what she'd been told by the embassy staff, if the bag didn't turn up by
  tonight, they'd have no choice but to put her on a plane back home. 'What a
  complete A28  ,' she thought. 'But I suppose it is a trip I'll never
  forget.'

A21                 1) result                  2) reply                 3)
response          4) report
A22                 1) robbed                2) stolen                3)
burgled            4) mugged
A23                    ) delivered             2) passed                3) found                4)
handed
A24                  l) least                    2) most                 3)
last                   4) first
A25                  1) facts                     2)
details                3) truth                  4) reality
A26                   l) problem               2)
trouble               3) mess                 4) crisis
A27                  l) state                    2) order                3)
condition         4) case
A28                 1) disaster                  2)
destruction 3) damage             4) ruin

no B4-B18, A21-A28 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOM
  OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATWTE BHMMÄHME, gyno omeenlbl Ha aaòaH1ffi B4-B18 u
  Ä21-Ä28 pacnoaauuomca 6 pa.3HbLr qacmŒl-r ÕJICIHKa.
  B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHb1 a HUYCHCÙ yacmu ÕaaH}€a. npu nepew»ce
  omewmot$ 6 3aÒaHUfLV B4-BI 8 õYK6bl aanucb16cuomc,q õea
  npoõev106 u BHCIKOB npenunaHlffl.

169
                                     Pa3AeJ1
       IlHCbMO

       omcemoe Ha               CI,
  C2 ucnoabavúme WIAHK OTBETOB
Ilpu        .3aòcmuù
  CI u C2 ocoóoe anu.uanue oõpamume Ha mo, qmo eatUU omeembl
  õyòym 014é'HueambcF1 moJ1bKO no aanucnu, CðenaHHbLU
  e bJIAHKE OTBETOB v'V2. Htuca»cue aanucu qepH061Œa He õyðym
  yqumb16an1bcf1.9Kcnepmo.u.
aamuuume c601v1
  omeem Ecau oðHOÙ cmop0Hb1 õaaHKa Heðocmam0LIH0, Bbl
  M0.yceme ucnoabJoe,amt. òpyzyo cmopo,tty Õaamca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.
This is part
of a letter from Jenny, your English pen friend.
                            ever-forgotten
to         tv a party? / thiMk that's what's happendtv me.

Test 14

been invited.
should/ say something to her? /just ignore it andnot invite her to my
nextparty? Doyou think / shouldyo the pay" awway.2 Help!
Write back to Jenny
answering her questions.
Write 100-140
words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
A number ofpeople believe that pocket money teaches teenagers
to be responsible with money. Others say that teenagers are too young to deal
with money and that their parents should just buy them what they need.
Do you think
that being given pocket money teaches teenagers anything? Write 200-250 words.
Use the
following plan
1
Introduction
(State the problem).
2
Express your
opinion and give reasons for it.
3
Give other
people's arguments and explain why they are wrong. 4 Conclusion.

                               Pa3neJ1
        roBopeHne

Bbl nonyqume
  KapmotlKY, Ha R•omopoù npeòcmaaaeHb1 mpu .3aðaH11fi ðaa
  ycmHoeo omaema.• C3 — me.uamuqecycoe Jtonoaoeugecwoe Bblcwaabteauue,
C4 — òuaaoe c lge.1b10 otIueHa
  cþcucmuqecK0ù tmcþop.ua«ueù, C5 — òua.aoe c
  lge.1b'0 oãut'Ha
OIVHO¼HOÙ
  11Hcþop.ua«ueú. OKOH¼CIHIW 6btž10.QHeHUH
  Kaycðo¿o aaðaHlffl onpeòeaaem 3K.3Œuenamop. Bo
  epe.u.q npoeeòeH11f1 .•moù qacmu 9K.3aateJ--ta uòem
  nocmom-lHafl aanucb Ha ayð110Kaccemy.

3aaaHV151  3K3aMeHveMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on mobile phones. Remember to
say:
•
if you have a
mobile phone
•
what people use
mobile phones for when mobile phones are useful
•
if mobile phones
are ever annoying
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are at a
pop concert. You want to buy an item of clothing as a souvenir. You want
something in bright colours, and the size must be medium.
Before making a decision,
ask the sales assistant about:
•      the clothing available
•      what is printed on the clothing
•      colours
•      size
The teacher will play the
part of the sales assistant and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on which item of clothing to
buy
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and
a friend are planning to spend a week's holiday in a city about 1,000
kilometres away from where you live. You are deciding how to get there. Your
friend has a driving licence but you do not. You can go by:
•      hitchhiking
•
bus • train
•      plane
• rented car
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite
• come up with ideas give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account invite your friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement
Section 1 Listening: first task
A
Look at the first task on page 174. Match each of the statements A-F to one of
the holidays below.
1    a holiday visiting a remote
          Chinese village                     Statement

2    a holiday in a place that has
informative websites Statement
3 a climbing holiday in
      America                     Statement
4 a
driving holiday with a very detailed schedule     Statement
5 a holiday in a country where
          English is spoken                Statemen
t
6 a
holiday relaxing by a swimming pool      Statement
B Read the statements again and decide
which, if any, are true for you. Explain why.
Section 2 Reading: second task

1 Yellowstone

a a peninsula in Russia

2 Wyoming —

b an American state

3 John Colter

c a geyser

4 Old Faithful —

d a national park

5 Kamchatka —

e an explorer

C Read the text on page 177 and
match.
3
There are           hotels
in the park.
4
In the , the wolf
became extinct in the area.
5

Old Faithful blows water into
the air about every minutes.
6
Yellowstone
National Park has visitors a vear.
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
second task
E
Read the text with
questions B12-B18 on page ISO. For each gap, decide what kind of word (noun,
adjective, etc) fills each gap.
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
BIS
F
Complete the
table. Include negative adjectives where appropriate.

verb

noun

adjective

discover

help
appear

friend

nature

taste

capable

2 Yellowstone
became a national park in

D
Read the text again and complete the sentences using some of the numbers in the
box. You will not use all the numbers.
50 • 1806 • 60 • 1872 •
1930s • 3,000,000
9 • 3,470 • 311 • 1990s
1
You can see different kinds of bird in the park.

Section 4 Writing: second task
G Circle the correct word or phrase
to complete the composition. - Almost everyone these days has a mobilephone andmany ofus be unable to (ire
without one. (I) However, there arepeople who argue that we not be awe to use mobile
phones whenever we like.

(2) /t / There is no doubt that
mobilephones are

extreme/' useful This is particular/' true when you need to
  contact svmevne analno ordinary phone is available. (3) For/ By
  example, ifyour car has broken down needassistance, having a mobilephone
  might mean thatyou Ho not have to (eave the car and walk a long way tv help.
On the other (4) side / hand there are many situations when mobiles can
  causeproblems for otherpeople. //you are the cinema, (S) with / for instance,
  a mobile ringing can be extremely annoyiM¶. There are (6) also /as welltimes,
  sach (7) (ike /as in class at school, when it wouldbe disrespectful tv have a
  mobile switchedon. A (8) mere /further argument that is made against mobilephones
  is that they damage our health. Most scientists, (q) however/although,
  believe that this is not the case.
To (10) conclusion /conc/ude, mobilephones make oar lives easier iM
  many ways. In my (Il) opinion / mind, there are occasions when using mobile
  is not appropriate and we always consider otherpeople before deciding whether
  to have ourphone switcheden vr Mat. (12) However /Although somepeople believe
  that mobiles are badfor our health, / (13) / personally de not accept that
  argument, (14) because /so / dc.' not think that be a reason for restricting
  their use.

a
Section 5 Speaking: second task
H
Look at the
Student Card for Task 2 on page 183. Write a word from the box in the correct
form in each gap to complete these questions.
arrive be • cost • get • reach • take

I
What time
does the plane       to Plymouth?
2
 How much does the coach
3
Are there any
trains that
Plymouth before eleven
o'clock?
4
Does the
trainin Plymouth before eleven o'clock? 5 How much  the plane fare?
6 Can I a coach to Plymouth from here?
I Rewrite sentences 1-3 in Exercise H beginning with
the words given. I Could you tell me

2      1 wonder if you could tell me

3      Do you know if

                                   Pa3neJ1       AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl ycylbauume 5 6btCKC13bwaHUÙ. YcmaH06ume
coom6emcn16ue Meycòy 6blCKa3b16ClHUfLUU KCIYCÒO?O
eoeopauge¿o I — 5 u ymeepYòeHldH.uu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 cnucyce A
— F. Mcnoabayùme Kaycðvyo õYK6V, oõ03Haqwougyo
ymeepyðemte, moabK0 oÒt1'1 pa.3. B aaÒanuu ecmb         auuutee
ymaepycòenue. Bbl yc.lblluume .3anucb Ò6CIYCÒb1.
3Œecume ('6011 omgembl 6 maãauuy.

A.
He likes to visit
places that other tourists don't normally go to.
B.
He prefers
holidays that have been carefully planned. C. He finds it difficult to
communicate when he is abroad.

Test 15

D. He likes holidays where he doesn't have to make many
arrangements. E. He prefers to spend his holidays doing something active. F. He
enjoys visiting places he knows something about.

FOBOP¶IIUIÏI

       1                         2

3

4                         5

YTBepxneHVte

Bbl ycablžuume paaeoeop
  penopmepa c òupeycmopo.u .uyae.q. Onpeòeaume, KCIKtte 11.3
  npueeÒëHHb1X ym€epycòeH11ù Al-A6
  coomeemcnlßyom coòepycamuo meKcma (1), He coomgemcmayom (2) U O   6 moccme He CKa.3ŒO, mo ecmb
  Ha OCH06aHUU meŒccma He-lb.3H ðantb Hit nonoyume.QbH0?0, Hil omeema (3). Oõeeòume
  HOJtep 6b1ÕPaHH020 ea.U11 eapuawna omeema. Bbl ycabltuume aanucb
  ()eaycÒb1.

Al Somebody has stolen a painting from the museum. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3)
B -reKCTe He CKt13aHO
A2 This is the first time something has been stolen from the museum. 1)
BepH0 2) HeBepH0 3) B •rewre He CKt13aHO
     A3     The crime happened during
the night.
1)
BepH0        2)
HeBePHO          3) B -reKCTe He CKa3aH0
     A4    Two people were working at
the museum when the crime happened.
                          l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3)
B •reKc•re He cKagaH0
     A5     The museum is closed at
the moment.
                          l) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO               3) B TeKCTe He cKt13'dH0
     A6    The police think they will
probably catch the criminals.
                           I) BepH0                2)
HeBepH0               3) B •reKc•re He CKUŽIHO

Test
15

Bbl yc.lbltuurne unmep6bJ0 c me-aeou.3110HHbLM
npomocepo.M. B 3aÒaH1dHX A7-A13 oõoeòume gucþpy I, 2
11.11/ 3, coonwemcmeyougyo 6b1t5paHH0.uy 6Œuu eapuawny omeema. Bbl
yc./tbtluume aanucb
c)uaycòbl.

Liz says that she
1)   works at a national TV channel.
2)   runs her own video production
business.
3)   is employed to find production
companies.
 Liz explains that her main role is
to I) buy and sell TV programmes.
2)  appear in and present TV programmes.
3) organise and plan TV programmes.
A9 Liz is involved in making I) game shows.
2)    comedy shows.
3)    a range of different shows.
AIO
According to Liz, most TV producers
I) work their way up from
other positions.
2)    take training courses to learn the
job.
3)    start doing the job with very little
experience.
All Liz thinks that she could be better at
I) predicting what
programmes will be popular.
2)   dealing with difficult people on the
shows,
3)   working out the cost of a new
programme.
A12 Liz believes that she knows what viewers want because she I) talks to
a lot of other TV producers, 2) conducts a lot of research.  3) watches a lot of television.
A13 Liz says that most people who watch her programmes 1)
like learning new facts.
2)
dream of appearing on them. 3) want to work in television.

110 Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B Fv7AHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  Limo Ha B], Al-A13  qacmax
  ÕJtamca. BI pacnoao.yceH0 6 HUYCHeÙ qacmu ÕJIClHKa.
  TIPI/ nepeHoce on16em06 B .3aðaHuu BI ÕVK6b1 aanucblea,zomc.q
  õea npoõeaoe u .31fflKOB npemmaHllH.

175
Test 15
                                         Pa3neJ1        I-Irrerme

YcmaHoaume
  coomoemcmaue meM .4 — G mewma.u I — 6. 3Œecume caou omeenlbl B
  maõau«y. Ifcno,lbavùme Kaycðyo õYK6Y moabK0
  oÒun pa.3. B aaðanuu oðl-ta me.ua

A. HOUSING SOLUTION B. TRANSPORT IMPROVEMENTS
c. SAFE AREAS
D.     NATURAL
REGIONS
E.      MODERN
ARCHITECTURE
F.       PROTECTED
HISTORY G. GENEROUS BUILDERS

1946 and 1970, 21 new towns were
  built in Britain. Town planners knew that the number
Britain was going to increase and those
  people would need somewhere to live. Eight Of towns were built in the areas
  surrounding London and were designed to provide homes for population of the
  city. The others were built to provide accommodation in other areas numbers
  of people worked. More than two million people now live in new towns.
of traffic on Britain's roads increased
  quickly after the Second World War. People knew system was not good enough
  for the increase, so motorways were built. These are large are designed to
  take a lot of heavy traffic, with three lanes in each direction. The first
  which today is part of the M6, opened in 1958. It was an immediate success and
  since have continued to make travelling by road faster.
protect areas of countryside, a number
  of English towns have created what are known as Building within a green belt
  is very tightly controlled and the area is protected from developments. This
  helps to prevent towns from growing so much that they destroy the the
  surrounding areas. Since 1 955, 14 different green belts have been set up,
  covering of England.
century
  Britain, many factory owners and other businessmen made large amounts of some
  cases, they decided to give something back to their community by providing
  money schools, libraries or hospitals. Many wealthy Victorians (as the people
  who lived under are called) felt it was their responsibility to provide
  places where the poor could learn their chances, or where they could get
  healthcare. A number of these buildings still
1960s, many British towns have created
  'pedestrianised areas'. Cars are not allowed in and they are sometimes known
  as 'auto-free areas'. They enable people to shop on foot of being in an
  accident. Visitors to the town centre feel more comfortable and don't have
  traffic or worry about their children, as they would if cars were permitted.
in Britain
  that are important might be added to a government list. These listed
  buildings special for archaeological reasons or they may be of historic
  interest. There are many on changing listed buildings in order to preserve
  their character. A number of churches, houses, castles and museums are listed
  so that future generations can enjoy them and can only change them after
  getting special permission.

I Between of people these new the
  grc»äng where large
2
  The amount that
  the roads that motorway, then
3
  In order to
  'green belts'. housing beauty of about 12%
4
  In nineteenth

in
road
money. In to build Queen Victoria and improve stand today.
5     Since
the these areas without fear to avoid
6     Buildings
may be restrictions large country the owners

No •reKcera

1

2

3

4

5

Test
  15

[Ipoqumaùme ymeep.ycðeH14f1 1 — 6 u
caeðyouguù aa HUMU moccm Ycmanoeume coomgemcmeue .ueycòy
ymaepycðt'H11fLM11 u coc)epyccmueu me,tccma. Hanutuume Igucþpy I —    ymeepycÒeHue
eepHoe, u I'll(þpy O — ecau ymeepyòemue neeepHoe. 3Œtecume
ceou omeembl 6 maõau«y.

I Yellowstone is named after the man who
  discovered it.
2
  American
  Indians first heard about the area in 1806.
3
  Another name for
  Yellowstone National Park is Old Faithful.
4
  Yellowstone National Park is the only place on Earth where
  geysers exist.
5
  It is possible to stay in a tent inside the park.
6
  IVb/ves can be
  seen today in Yellowstone National Park.

Yellowstone National Park is in the
  north-west corner of the American state of Wyoming. This national park covers
  an area of 3,470 square miles and its name comes from certain rocks that have
  a yellow colour because of the chemicals in them. It was explored by a man
  named John Colter in 1806, although native American Indians had known about
  the area for thousands of years.
Yellowstone is famous for its geysers. These are hot springs
  that explode and send water and steam into the air. They occur when
  underground water meets hot rock far beneath the surface of the earth. The
  water boils and is forced back to the surface, where it explodes upwards. The
  most famous is called Old Faithful and it sends thousands of litres of
  boiling water into the air approximately once an hour. Gevsers are quite rare
  but can also be found in places such as the Kamchatka peninsula, Russia.
About three million people visit the park each year, most either camping
  or staying in one of the park's nine hotels. Many of them enjoy picnics or
  walks through the park, where they might spot some of the 50 or so species of
  mammals and 311 species of birds. The park advises visitors to be verv
  careful and to remember that many of the larger wild animals, including
  bears, can be dangerous. Another potentially dangerous animal, the wolf,
  disappeared from the park in the 1930s. However, it was reintroduced in the
  1990s in order to control the population of large animals, such as bison and
  elk, and is doing well.
Since Yellowstone was
  made into a national park in 1872, many other national parks have been
  created to protect areas of natural beauty.

            1                         2

3

4

5

6

Test
15

[Ipoqumaùme
maccm u ßblnoamune ,3aÒaHllH A 14420, OÕ60ÒH
gucþpy I, 2, 3 unu 4, coomaemcnlßyyougyo H0Mepy 6blÕpaHHO?O
ea.uu gapuawna omgema.

Terry stood on deck as the ferry slowly arrived at the
  island. He watched the sailors throw ropes to their colleagues on shore and
  then looked up at the villages of small white houses that dotted the
  mountainside above the small town. He was planning a six-month stay, much
  longer than the few days or weeks that the noisy crowds of tourists around
  him were planning. He had given himself that long to write a novel and he was
  determined to succeed, whatever the temptations to enjoy himself might be.
  Leaving his life behind was just the thing he needed, he thought, and the
  island seemed to him to be the ideal place for it. He collected his things
  and made his way onto the concrete quay.
He was immediately surrounded by
  local people, all rudely pushing each other out of the way to offer him a
  room that was guaranteed to be 'the cheapest in town', although he knew that
  they couldn't all be the cheapest. Terry politely shook his head and peered
  around for the Paradise Hotel and one 'Mrs Magda'. She had sounded quite
  intimidating on the phone, so when a young woman approached him and quietly
  asked in perfect English if he was Terry Snow, he wasn't sure how to respond.
  The woman smiled and said: 'Perhaps you were expecting my mother? I hope you
  are not disappointed.'
'N ... No, no. Not at all,'
  stammered Terry. She picked up one of his bags and they set off into the
  small town. She asked him about his stay and he told her that his plan was to
  stay a week at the hotel while he found more permanent accommodation.
'Six months is a long time to be on the island,' she said. 'You'll find
  it different in winter. Once, there was farming and fishing on the island but
  they've practically disappeared. Tourism is the only source of income and so
  few of the locals fancy sitting and watching winter come when the tourists
  leave. Almost all of them have second jobs on the mainland and the heart has
  been ripped out of the place.' 'And you?' Terry asked.
'I went away to the
  mainland for my education. Since I came back, I stay here all year round.'
  They stopped outside a hotel. It reminded Terry of an old woman who still
  managed to keep a certain air of dignity. It could do with a bit of paint and
  one of the letters in the name was missing, but it must have once been one of
  the most impressive buildings on the island. Terry began to wonder about its
  decline and what caused it but realised that the young woman was waiting for
  him to say something.
'I'm sorry,' he said. 'What did you say?'
'I asked you what you thought of the
  hotel.' She looked at it. 'Since Dad died, it hasn't been the same. Mum gets
  a few of the local men in to help out every now and then, but you never do as
  good a job when you're being paid as when it's an act of love, do you? And
  Dad loved that hotel. It was his gift to his grandchildren, he used to say.'
  Terry looked at the hotel again. He felt that he had come somewhere where
  buildings were much more than shelter. Each brick held a story ready to be
  unlocked and he felt inspired just by touching them. If he felt like that
  after such a short time, imagine what he might achieve in six months.
'Well, maybe I could
  help out a bit, while I'm here,' he said, excitedly. The young woman nodded
  and said, 'Maybe,' before leading the way into the cool interior of the
  hotel.

Test 15

A14 Terry thinks the island looks
1)   like it will be too noisy for him.
2)   suitable for what he wants to do.
3)   too far from the mainland for him.
4)   so relaxing that he will never do any
work.
A15      Terry rejects the offers of
rooms because I) he has heard that it is easy to be cheated.
2)   no one asks him politely to look at a
room.
3)   he has already booked somewhere.
4)   he would rather find a hotel himself.
A16 Terry is surprised when the young
woman speaks to him because 1) she was much less attractive than he had hoped.
2)   her English is better in real life
than on the phone.
3)   he was expecting to meet someone
different.
4)   he thought he would have to find the
hotel on his own.
A17   The young woman tells Terry
that
I) traditional sources of
money have become less important.

no 132, 133 u Ä14-Ä20 HE 3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTn OTBETb1
  B WIAHK OTBETOB El !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  qmo Ha B2, m u A14-A20 pa.3HbLr qacmfLr â1CIHKC1. B2, B3
  pacnono.yceHb1 6 HUNCHeÚ qacmu ÕaaHRa. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemo,3 e
  aaðauuax B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucbtuawmc•a õe.3 npoõe.aoe
  u 3HCIK06 npen11HCIHLffl.

2)   most local people are relieved when
the tourists finally go.
3)   people complain about the effects of
tourism on local industry. 4) sometimes tourists find work and decide to stay
longer.
AIS    It seems to Terry that the
hotel
I) has never been an
attractive building.
2)   has had work done on it recently.
3)   makes an impression on everyone who
sees it. 4) used to be nicer than it is now.
A19    The young woman says that one
problem is that
1)
her mother can no
longer afford to pay people to work on the hotel.
2)
nobody in the
area is willing to do this sort of work.
3)
workmen are less
careful when they don't own the building.
4)
some people
pretend to enjoy the work and then do it badly.
A20    Terry is excited by the idea
of
I) finally doing some
physical work instead of just writing.
2) getting ideas for his work from the things around him.
3) spending
six months researching the history of the island. 4) building a house of his
own on the island one day.

Test 15

                           Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTMKa JleKCVfKa

Tlpoqumaùme
  moccm 3anoaHume nponycrcu 6 npeðaoyceHunx nor) HOJtepŒUU B4-B11
  coomaemcmtgyotgu.&tu caot3, HaneqamaHHb1.r aaaaa6HbLMU
  ÕYK6ŒM11 cnpaga om žca.ycò0?0

Animal helpers
Animals can be pets, but they can
    also be much more. Ever since dogs first humans on the hunt, animals have
    worked with people.    JOIN
Dogs, of course, work with people in many different ways,
    such as sheep on farms. CONTROL
B6 They can also to help blind people find their way
    around. TRAIN There are of other animals that help people, including LOT
    horses, camels and elephants.
In the past, horses were an important means of transport
    in Europe and both people and goods.           CARRY
Cars
    soon replaced horses for most jobs because they could go
B9         faster and                                                                                FAR
BIO      In Asia today, as in the
    past, elephants        to transport      USE heavy loads in areas where
    cars cannot go.
As
    long as there are jobs for them to do, we can be sure that our animal
Bli partners                                    to
    help us.                                                                    CONTINUE

flpoqumaùme
npu€eÒeHHb1Ú HilŽyce mewnz Ilpeoõpaayùme
cnoea, HaneqamaHHb1e .3a?M6Hb1.M11 ÕYRBCLUU nocae HOMep06 B12-B18 maK,
qmoÕbl OHU epŒuatamuqecKll u aeKC11tWCKU coomaemcmaoeaau
coòepycamuo mcwcma. 361110JIHume nponycK11 PIOAVLIC'HHbLM11
CJ106Œuu. Ka.ycòblli nponyt'K coomaemcmeyem omðClbH0Jty
aaòamuo 11.3 epynm,l B12-B18.

B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
1318

The of the island of Mauritius in 1505
  was the beginning of the end for the dodo. The dodo was a large bird which
  was  of flying and so spent its entire life on the ground. When
  people first spotted the bird in 1598, it seemed to have no fear of humans
  and was quite
This was because it had always
  lived on an island where it had no  enemies.
The people
  on the island didn't find the dodo  to eat, but the cats and dogs that
  arrived with the people did. The dodo was completely  and by the 1690s it had died out
  on the island. The story of the dodo's  is just one example of man's
  effect on the environment.

DISCOVER
CAPABLE
FRIEND
NATURE
TASTE
HELP
APPEAR

Test 15

[Ipoqumaùme
meKt•m c nponycKœ,tu, OÕO.3HaqeHHbL}tU H0Jtepa.uu A21-A28. 3mu
110Mepa coom6emcn16yom 3aÒaH11fLM A21-A28, 6 Kon10Pb1X
npeòcma6aeHbl 60.3MOYCHble 6apuaHnlb1 omeemoa. Oõeeòume
H0Mep 6blÕpaHHoeo eauu eapuawna omeema.

We take it for A21  that a week is seven days, but where does the idea come
  from, and where do the names for days of the week come from? It's difficult
  to be certain, but we can make some educated guesses. The story starts in
  ancient Babylon, the capital city of an empire in what is now Iraq. The
  Babylonians were A22  on astronomy and were interested in measuring time. It is
  from them that we have A23  the idea that there are sixty minutes in an hour and sixty
  seconds in a minute. Unlike the Egyptians, who divided their months into sets
  of ten days, the Babylonians split the month A24  into four lots of seven days. The
  Hebrews, in ancient Israel, used the seven-day week, as we can see from the
  first book of the Bible, which describes God creating the Earth in seven
  days. Christianity A25 the idea to the Romans, who used a seven-day week
  throughout their empire.
In some languages, such as Russian and Greek, most
  of the days of the week are named after their numerical position (first,
  second, etc). However, in English the days A26  their names from gods, as they did
  in Latin. When the Angles and the Saxons invaded England in the 500s, they
  kept some of the local names (Sunday, named after the Sun, Monday after the
  Moon and
Saturday after the planet Saturn), but named others
  after their own gods. Tuesday is named after Tiw, the god of war, while
  Wednesday is the day of Odin (or Woden as he was also known), who was the
A27  god in Anglo-Saxon mythology. Odin's son, Thor, gives us
  Thursday. The Angles and Saxons believed that thunder was the sound of Thor's
  magic hammer. Friday is the only day of the week to be named after a goddess
  — Freyr. Freyr was the goddess of love and stories about her describe her as
  being very beautiful. She travelled in a wagon pulled by eight cats and could
  change herself into the A28  of any bird.

A21                 1) granted              2) given                3)
assumed          4) presumed
A22                  1) obsessed              2)
eager                 3) keen                  4) enthusiastic

A23                  I) donated              2)
requested         3) inherited         4) descended
A24                 1) up                        2) out                    3)
off                    4) on
A25                  l) repeated               2) broadcast        3) shared              4)
spread
A26                   l) give                      2)
have                   3) make                 4) take
A27 I)
lead 2) chief 3) front 4) advance A28 I) condition 2) set 3) state 4) shape

170      B4-B18, Å21-A28 HE
  3AbYAbTE TIEPEHECTU CBC)" OTBETb1 B IMAI-IK OTBETOB     !
ObPATÞ[TE BHMMAHME,   Ha        B4-B18 U A21-A28                           pa.3Hb1X
  qacmnx õaaH}ca. B4-B18 pacnoaoyceHb1 6 HilYHeð1 Ltacmu
  ÕaaHKC1. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoe a aaòaHuax B4-B18 õYK6b1
  aanucb1BŒomcf1 õe.3 npoõeaoß u .3HaK06 npenu,qauun.

                                       Pa3neJ1
       Il"CbMO

omeem06 Ha aaòaH11.q C], C2
  ucnoabayùyne WIAHK OTBETOB ,hê2.
Tlpu 6bl,'lOJtHeHUU
  aaòaHt1ù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHUJtaHUe ot;pamume Ha mo, Limo
  gaunt omaentbt õyòym OlßH116ambCH moa1bK0 no aanucf1.M,
  CÒœ1í1HHbLM e WIAHKE OTBETOB JE2. Huycaycue aanucu
  LtepH061uca He õvðym vqumbtganlbcg .9Kcnepm0JL

.ganutuume
  ceoù omeem Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1 Õaayuca
  Heòocmamot1H0, 6bl .uoyceme ucno.m,aoeantb
c)pyeyo
  cmopo,yy atamca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

        rea,ý to take exams at the moment? / am, but
  I'm          it         to remember all the important facts. Doyou             it
  easy to revise? How doyou study? How many hours a Might  spend revising?
  Haveyou get any adviceyou couldgive me?
Write back
  seen!
Love,
Jason

Write back to Jason
answering his questions.
Write
100-140 words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40 minutes to do
this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many teenagers enjoy playing computer games. Some people, however,
believe that teenagers should spend their free time doing more physical
activities.
What
can you say for and against teenagers     Use the following plan playing
computer games?         I. Introduction (State the problem).
Write 200-250 words.                                                2.
Arguments "for".
3.
Arguments
"against"
4.
Conclusion.

Test 15

                               Pa3neJ1
       roBopeH11e

Bbl noayqume Kapmoçy, Ha
  Komopoú npeòcma6aeHb1 mpu aaÒaH11f1 ycmHo¿o
  omeema.• C3 — meatamuqeucoe MOHOaoeuqeCKOe 6b1CKa3blßanue,
C4 —
  ()uaaoe c          oÕ.ueHa (þwonutlecwoðl
  lŒcþOPMa«ueÙ, C5 — òuaaoe c         oÕMeHa
OlßHO¼HOÙ
  UHØOP.MCII(IWÙI. OKOHqaH11e KCIYÒO?O aaðaHllH
  onpeòe,lfžem 3K3Œue»qamop. Bo ape.',tfl
  npoæòenun amoù qacmu .)K3Œ1teHa uòem
  nocn10HHHG'+l aanucb Ha ayòuŒaccemy.

3aaaH11fl 3K3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on your favourite place.
Remember
to say:
•      where your favourite place is
•      how often you go there
•      what you like to do there
•      why it is your favourite
You have to
talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have finished. Then
he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in a
travel agent's in London. You want to travel to Plymouth tomorrow morning,
arriving before Il am. You can pay £35 only.

Before making a decision, ask
the travel agent about:
•      the different means of transport
available
•
arrival times  the cost
The teacher will play the part of the travel agent and will speak first.
Remember to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need
•
decide on the
best means of transport
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
It is your
grandparents' wedding anniversary soon. You would like to organise a special
event to celebrate. You and your cousin are discussing what you could do. You
could:
• take them out to a restaurant
•      organise a party at home
•      cook a special meal for them at home
•      arrange a family barbecue
•      arrange a weekend trip for them The
teacher will play the part of your cousin.
Remember
to:
•      discuss all the options take an active part in the
conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement
Section
1 Listening: first task
A
Work in pairs or
as a group to discuss the differences between living in a big city and living
in the countryside.
B
Make notes to
complete the table.

life in the city

life in the countryside

noisy

quiet

Section 2 Reading: first task
C
Quickly
read the six short texts in the task on page 188. Write the name of the main
building each text is about. 1         4
2
  5
3

 6
D
Look at the
headings A-G on page 188. Write a word from six of the headings in the correct
form to complete the sentences.
1     is a place where something happens.
2     Bad weather can sometimes do a lot of
 to buildings.
3     If something is  , it is amazing.
4     The place where you are staying, such
as a hotel, is your
5     If something is  small, you are surprised by how
small it is.

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
  second task
E Complete the table.

verb

noun

positive adjective

negative adjective

x

sun

x

entertain

X

comfort

wonder

x

amaze

x

fashion

forget

6     Something we don't understand is

F Quickly read the text with
questions B12-B18 on page 192. Decide what kind of word fills each gap. I (B12)
noun / adjective / adverb
2
(B13) noun /
adjective / adverb
3
(B14) noun /
adjective / adverb
4
(B15) noun /
adjective / adverb
5
(B16) noun /
adjective / adverb
6
(B17) noun /
adjective / adverb
7
(B18) noun /
adjective / adverb
Section 4 Writing: first task
G

Read the first task on page 194.
Imagine that you sometimes argue with your best friend and once you stopped
talking to each other for a while. Use your experience and imagination to
complete the notes.

What kind of
  things do you argue with your best friend about?

What did you argue
  about when you stopped talking to each other?

What did you do about this problem?
  Was it successful?
What should
Christine do?

H
In pairs or as a
group, discuss what
Christine should do.
Section 5 Speaking: second task
Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 195. Tick the
things you could say when the restaurant manager answers the phone. Put a cross
next to the ones you should not say.
1
'Hello. I'm
phoning to see if you have any tables available on Saturday night.'
2
'Hello. I call a
restaurant to book a table for eight people on Saturday night, not after 8.30
pm.'
3
'Hello. I'm
organising a birthday celebration for a friend of mine on Saturday night and I
was wondering if you had any tables free.'
4
'Hello. I'd like
to book a table for
Saturday night, if that's possible.'
5
'Hello. Eight
people, Saturday night, not after 8.30 pm, please.'
6
'Hello. Could you
tell me if you have any tables available for this Saturday night?'
Decide if these statements are True (T) or False (F). If the
manager offers you a table

1     for six to nine people, that is an
acceptable size.
2     for four to six people, that is an
acceptable size.
3     for 9 pm, that is an acceptable time.

4     for 8 pm, that is an acceptable time,

                                Pa3neJ1        AYAMI)0BaHne

Bbl yc./tbauume 5
BblCKa3b1eaHUð1. YcmaH0611žne coomeemcmeue .ueyòy
6blCKa.3b16aHUEUll Kaycðoeo poaopmgeao 1 — 5 u ymcepycòeHunuu,
ÒaHHbLUt1 6 cnucvce A — F. Mcnoa1b3Yùme 'caycòyo
õycgy, oõ03Haqa1014Y'h0 ymeepycc)euue, mo.1bK0 oÒ11H pa.3.
B aaòauuu ecmb oðHO auumee ym€sepowðeuue. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanucb
ÒgaycÒbl. .3aHecume C60U omeembt 6 maâuugy.

Test 16

A. We don't mind having fewer
things to do in the evenings. B. We've only just moved into the countryside. C.
Living in the countryside is much healthier for me. D. I wouldn't be able to
find a job in the city. E. I like both the city and the countryside. F. Crime
is more of a problem in the city.

FOBOPHLUVIJI

          1

      2

3

               4                       5

YTBepxaeH1te

Bbl
  ycJ1b11uume, õpam u cecmpa oõcyycðcuon4 qmo noðapumb
  onugy Ha ðeHb powðeHIU1. Onpeòeaume, KCZKUe 11.3
  npuaeòëHHb1wr ymgepycòenuù Al-A6 coomgemcmeyom
  coòepycamuo mewcma (1 ), Kcucue He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o 6 mexcme He
  cycaaaHO, mo ecnlb Ha OCH06CIHUU maccma neu1b.3fl òantb Hid
  nonoycumeJ1bH020, HI/ omeema (3).
Oõeeòume H0.uep BblÓPaHHO?O ea.uu
  gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb ()6ClYCÒbl.

Al        Last year, Paula and Greg
bought their father a CD.
                      l) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO                  3) B •rewre He cwagaH0
A2       Paula and Greg can afford to
spend £30 in total.
1)   BepHO           2) HeBepH0           3)
B -reKCTe He CKa3aH0
A3       Their dad's watch was given
to him by his wife.
                    1) BepHO             2) HeBepH0                3)
B rewre He cKtuaH0
A4       Greg and Paula think their
father could look more fashionable.
                      1) BepH0               2)
HeBepH0                3) B •reKcere He CKa3'dH0
A5      They have enough money to buy
something suitable for their father's computer.
                     1) BepH0             2) HeBepH0              3)
B •rewre He cwa3t1H0
A6      Greg and Paula will end up
spending £20 in total.
1)   BepH0          2) HeBepH0        3) B
•rewre He cwa3'dH0

Test
  16

Bbl yc.lb'tuutne umnepßbžo c
1136ecn1H0ù nucameJ1bHlllßú. B 3aÒaH11fLr
Ä7-Ä/3 oõceðume I'll(þpy I, 2 11.7113,
coomeemcmeyougyo 6b1ÕpaHHOMY e,a.uu eapuawny omeema. Bbl yculbttuume aanUCb
ÒaaycÒbl.

Catherine mainly gets inspiration for
her novels from 1) things that happen in her personal life.
2) unimportant news stories.
3) major events in the local area.
A8     The example of the shopping centre shows that, before
writing, Catherine 1) interviews a lot of people.
2)   does a lot of background research. 3)
imagines a complete story.
Catherine says her characters
l) can be
identified by the people they're based on.
2)   are exact copies of people she has
known. 3) are only loosely based on real people.
AIO Catherine is most likely to create a character based on a
real person's 1) history.
2) appearance.
3)   view of the world.
All
There is a chance that
1) Catherine will give a talk about making films.
2) a company
will buy the film rights to Fire At Dawn. 3) there will be a film version of
Fire At Dawn.
A12 Catherine does not want
1) to be involved in making the film.
2)
someone else to write the screenplay. 3) the plot to be altered in a major way.
A13 Catherine believes that
1)  the stories in the book and film
should be the same.
2)
film and
literature are extremely different media. 3) films based on books are usually
annoying.

no        Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE
  IIEPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIÄHK OTBETOB  !
ObPATMTE
  BHMMAHJIE, timo omeembl Ha 3aÒaH11H B], Å1-Å13
  pacnoaa2ŒomcH B pa.3HbLt qacmax ÕaaHKa. Bl pacnoaoyceH0 6
  HUYCHeÚ Ltacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepenoce omaem06 B aaòaH111d
  BI ÕVKßbl .3anucblucuomcn õe.3 npoõeaoa u        npe'111HaHllH.

                                       Pa3aeJ1        Ilrrerme

YcmaH061tme coomeemcmaue meM A — G
  meKcma.M 1 — 6. 3aHecume ('6011 omeembl e maõautgy.
  Mcno.1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õYK6Y moabK0 oÒzut paa. B
  .3aÒanuu omta me.ua

A.     INCREDIBLE
COLLECTION
B.      SERIOUSLY
DAMAGED
c. MYSTERIOUS GIAMS
D.     ENTERTAINMENT
CENTRE
E.      EXPENSIVE
ACCOMMODATION
F.       ANIMAL
HELP
G.     SURPRISINGLY
LARGE

The
(marble, in
  those is that
Originally
  gallery in
Mona paintings,
together with we still agree on built.
for many built the
  1600s, bombs destroyed. of this appears. The
10
Prime
in the music, but
  musicals and
2,700

I The Taj Mahal, the beautiful and
impressive building in Agra, India, was built by Shah Jahan. building work
started in 1630, and took 23 years to complete. It was built using materials
crystal and other precious stones) from all over India and Asia. There were no
cars or trains days, Of course, so how did they manage to carry the materials
to the building site? The answer they used elephants - over a thousand of them.

Test 16

2

The Louvre, in Paris, France, is one of the most famous, and largest, museums
in the world. built as a royal palace, the Louvre first opened its doors to the
public as a museum and art 1793. Todav, visitors can see thousands of priceless
works of art, including Leonardo da Vinci's Lisa, which is generally considered
to be the most famous painting in the world. As well as the Louvre also has
book, furniture, archaeology, architecture and history exhibitions.
3
The Great Pyramid is one of the largest buildings ever
constructed by humans. Although, the other pyramids at Giza, in Egypt, it is
one of the world's most popular tourist destinations, have an enormous amount
to learn about Egyptian pyramids. Scientists and academics cannot  when the
pyramids were built, who built them, why they were built or indeed how they
were
4 Although there have been buildings on
the rock known as the Acropolis, in Athens, Greece, thousands of years, it is
the Parthenon which is the most famous building. The Parthenon was between
447 and 438 BC. The building still exists today, but it is not in a good
condition. In the Parthenon was used to store explosives. During a war between
the Turks and the Venetians, fell on the building, causing it to explode.
Unfortunately, a large part of the building was
 5 The
British Prime Minister lives and works at No. 10 Downing Street, in London.
Pictures building make it look rather narrow and small. In fact, the building
is much bigger than it reason for this is that there is a street behind Downing
Street called Horseguards Parade. No. Downing Street is joined to the big
building behind it on Horseguards Parade, giving the Minister plenty of space
for offices and an apartment.
6 The Sydney Opera House, in Sydney,
Australia, is one of the most famous modern buildings world. It is a popular
tourist attraction for people with no interest in opera or other forms of it is
also highly respected for its artistic productions, which include plays,
ballets, operas, concerts. Opened in 1973, the building has five theatres, the
biggest of which seats approximately people.

Ne •reKCTa

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test 16

T7poqumaùme eonpocbl I — 6 u pacaaary yqetîHbtr
,rcypcoe A — G, OPUiHU.306ClHHbLr C)õugecmeeHHbtJt K.ayÕOJt
eopoòa beòyopma. YcmaH0ßume coomaemcmeue .ue.ycòy
eonpoca.uu u PC'KaŒUHblMll macc.•ma-ltu. B KCIYCÒO.U meKcme Bbl
Haùðeme omeem moabK0 Ita oðllH aonpoc. B npugeòeHHoðl
Hilo-re maõauue not) H0Jtepo.u eonpoca anutuume õYK6Y,
coomæmcmeyoucy'ff) mcwcmy, 6 Komopoat ('tutu HaùòeH omaem B
.3aòauuu oÒ11H meyccm atilUHUÚ.

1
  is not held at
  Bedworth Community Centre?
2
  requires that
  participants bring their own equipment?
3
  gives
  participants the chance to take part in a competition?

4
  involves
  frequent trips away from the Community Centre?
5
  limits the
  number of participants on the course?
6
  is not for
  beginners?

 Which evening class
Bedworth Community Centre — Evening Classes
A
Flower arranging
If you thought flower arranging was just
putting flowers in a vase, think again! Come along and learn the many secrets
of successful floral designs, Over this six-month course, we'll be working
towards your entering the Bedworth and Chatam Flower Show. Who knows? Maybe
you'll be a winner!
B
French for
holidaymakers

1

2

3

Have vou forgotten all
the French you did at school? Here's your chance to start again, beginning with
the absolute basics. By the end of the course, you should be able to read,
write and speak enough French to have a successful holiday in France. Please note:
classes are held at Bedworth Community College, next door to the Community
Centre.
C
French literature
This advanced course looks at some of the classics of French
literature in their original language, including works by Flaubert, Dumas and
Victor Hugo. A knowledge of French is required. Some written homework will be
given.
D
Digital
photography
On this course, we start at the basics and work our way
through to advanced digital photography. Areas covered include: getting to know
your camera, taking great digital photos, saving photos on your PC and using
software to edit and transform photographs. Please note: we assume you will be
bringing your own digital camera with you. Digital cameras are not provided by
the Community Centre.

E Local history
Do you want to know more
about the history of the Bedworth area? Now's your chance. Although we'll start
every class at the Community Centre, we'll spend a lot of our time out and
about in the local area, looking at some of the key landmarks and buildings,
and learning more about the fascinating history that surrounds us.
F
Pottery
Would you like to make your own vases, plates, mugs and bowls? We'll show
you how. For beginners and experts alike, this course makes the most of
Bedworth Community Centre's wonderful Ceramics Centre. All equipment is provided,
but there is a small charge for all clay used.
G
Making the most
of the Internet
Have you never surfed
the Internet before? Are you fed up with looking at the same few websites?
Together, we'll explore many of the exciting things there are to find on the
web. Please note: There are only ten PCs at the Community Centre. For this
reason, the maximum number of people who can take part in this course is
twentv.

Ilpoqumaùme mel-ccm u
  6bt110JIHume aaðaHtlfl  otîaoòfl I'll(þpy I, 2, 3 11011/ 4,  Ho-uepy 6b1ÓPaHHOZO
  6ŒU11 eapuamna omeema.

Ask a hundred
comedians what the secret of good comedy is, and you're guaranteed that at
least ninety-nine of them will come up with the same response: timing. Although
this is undoubtedly true, it is not the complete answer, as what exactly good
comedy is should, surely, involve the concept of making people laugh.
Successful politicians also have to have good timing, but most of them would
soon face an empty audience if they ever chose to perform at a comedy club.
So what is the
secret of good comedy? There clearly isn't one straight answer, but there's no
doubt that much of modern British humour relies on comedy through language,
comedians like Charlie Chaplin and Benny Hill and present-day characters like
Mr Bean being part of a different tradition of 'slapstick' comedy that relies
on the physical rather than the verbal.
The joke is the
most obvious example of 'language comedy'. With language comedy, how you phrase
what you're saying — particularly the 'punchline', the final line of a joke
that draws the laugh — is more important than what you're saying. Take this
traditional double-act joke:
First man: I say, I
say, I say. My wife's gone to the Caribbean.
Second man:
Jamaica?
First man: No, she
went of her own accord.
Ignoring the fact that it's not particularly
funny to modern ears (if it ever was funny), at first sight it appears that the
humour rests in the fact that 'Jamaica' is confused for 'D'you make her?', i.e.
'Did you make her go to the Caribbean?'. Try putting a different final line on
the joke, though. 'No, she chose to go.' contains exactly the same meaning but,
well, it's just not as funny, is it? It's all in the phrasing.

Test 16

This may be one of the reasons
whv British humour doesn't translate into other languages very well. When one
translates, one keeps the meaning but the phrasing changes, losing the basis of
the humour.
The second secret
of comedy to my mind is characterisation. By this, I mean the creation of a
character, or characters, by the comedian through which the jokes or stories
are told. Comedy is acting and, like any play, a great script in the wrong
hands can be a disaster and a terrible script in an expert's hands can be made
into something quite special.
I remember as a
child watching the comedian Peter Sellers being interviewed on the Parkinson
show. Michael Parkinson, the studio audience, and my parents watching with me
at home were crying with laughter at everything that Sellers did or said. I sat
there thinking: 'He's just waving a handkerchief around. Nobody laughs when I
do that. Why are they laughing at him?' I now know what I didn't know then —
that he was a comic genius, and I'm not. And by that, I mean that he had the
ability to create characters that people found genuinely funny, whatever they
did. He could have sat there in silence and people would still have been
laughing. And — let's be clear — even though Sellers was appearing on a chat
show supposedly as himself, he was in character. As anyone who's read the
biography of Peter Sellers by Roger Lewis knows, Sellers off-stage was an
incredibly violent and difficult man.
So
is it possible to learn to be a comedian, or is it just a natural talent? There
may well be people who will never, ever succeed at being professional comedians
however hard they try.
Very few of us will
ever be an Einstein, Mozart or Shakespeare in our respective fields. However,
all comedians will tell you that the more experience you get, the more
experienced, and therefore the better, you become. And they're not joking.

A14 In the first paragraph, the
writer suggests that politicians 1) often attempt humour in their speeches.
2)   are only successful if they are
funny.
3)   are used to facing empty audiences.
4)   are no good at making people laugh.
A15 According to the text,
'slapstick' comedy 1) does not make use of language to be funny.
2)   is different to the comedy of Benny
Hill.
3)   is only found in modern British
humour. 4) does not exist in Britain anymore.
A16 The writer tells the joke about
Jamaica to
I)
demonstrate how many old jokes are not funny today. 2) explain why many jokes
need two people to tell them.
3) show how the actual words used in
a joke are important. 4) point out that some jokes contain confusing phrases.
A17    Whether a comedy act is 'a
disaster' or 'something quite special' depends on I) the quality of the script
being performed.
2)

the ability of the performer to
perform.
3)   how much the act is like a play.
4)   which character tells which joke.
AIS Watching the Parkinson show, the
writer did not understand why
l) Peter Sellers was
doing the things he was doing.
2)
nobody was
laughing at him at that moment.
3)
Peter Sellers was
a comic genius and he wasn't.
4)
everyone laughed
at Sellers doing ordinary things.
A19 The writer mentions a book by
Roger Lewis to
1)
enable people to
find out more information about Peter Sellers.

2)
prove that he
hadn't made up the story about Peter Sellers.
3)
make it clear
that Peter Sellers often played unpleasant characters. 4) emphasize that Peter
Sellers was acting during the chat show.
A20    In the final
paragraph, the writer makes the point that 1) none of us can learn to be good
comedians.
2) all comedians' skills improve through practice.
3)
it's not worth
trying to become a professional comedian.
4)
Einstein, Mozart
and Shakespeare weren't comedians.

110                                                         B2, B3
  u A14-A20 HE 3ABYAbTE IIEPEHECTM CBOM
OTBETb1 B
ObPATMTE
  BHMMAHME, utmo omeembt Ha aaðt1Hllfl B2, B3 u A14-A20 pacnoaazcnomcfi 6
  pa.3Hbtr qacmfl-r ÕaaHKa. B2, B3 pacnoaoyceHb1 6 HUYHeÚ qacmu
  ÕaaH1€a. 17pu nepeHoce omeemoa g aaòaHum- 132, B3 õYKBb1
  aanucblecuomcfl õea npoõeaoe u .3HC11COB npemmaH1iH.

                      Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa
aeKCHKa

[7poqumaùme
mexcm 3ano.mume nponycwu 6 npeòaoyeH11+Lr not) Ho-uepŒuu B4-BI I
coomæmcmeyougu.uu cþopata.uu caoe, HaneqamaHHbtx .3aeaa6HblMU
õYR6Œwu cnpaøa om KaycÒO?O npeòao.yceHlffi.

Test 16

     B4        by him, too.                                                                                WRITE
     B5        The film first  out at cinemas in 1997.                                       COME
B6 It was an immediate success,  eleven Oscars in 1998. WIN Since
  then, millions of people around the world  ENJOY watching Jack and Rose's
  tragic love story on board the ship Titanic.
     B8        Titanic  a cheap film to make.                                                   NOT
  BE
B9 In fact, the film  more money to make than the COST
  original ship did!
BIO Most people who watch the film  the last fifteen SPEND or twenty
  minutes crying.
Bli I think it's the and most wonderful film I've ever
  seen!                        SAD

Titanic

[Ipoqumaùme
npuaeòeHHblðl Hil.yce meyccm 17peoõpaayùme c.qoga,
HaneqamaHHbte aaua6Hb1.uu ÕA'KBŒuu nocae H0.uepoß B 12-BI 8
maK, qmoõbl OHU epaM.uamuqecžcu u AC'KCULWCKU coont6emcmeoeaau coòepyaH11}0
meKcma. 3anoaHume nponycwu LIOayt1C'HHbLUU caogaatu. KaycÒbtÙ
nponycK coomæmcmgyem omòeabH0MY' aaòamuo 14.3 ppynnbl B
12-1318.

17poqumaùme meKc•m c
nponycxa.uu, OÕo.3HaqeHHb1At11 HOMepŒ1tU A21-A28. 3mu 110Mepa
coomeemcmgv,tom .3aÒaHlfflJt A21-A28, 6 ,zcomopbLr npeòcma6JWHb1
60.3MO.YCHble Bapuaunlbl 0171601106. Oõaeòume Ho-uep 6b1ÕPaHHO?0
6Œuu gapuamna omeema.

Adam was struggling. It was his very first day at
  school the next day, and his mother had bought him some new shoes for the A21
   , The problem was they had laces and Adam still couldn't
  tie them up himself. He'd been practising unsuccessfully for days, and now,
  less than 24 hours before the big day, he A22 a failure.
'I can't
  do it!' he shouted in desperation. 'Everyone at school's going to laugh at
  me.'
'No, they're not, Adam. Don't
  worry. A23                                lots of them

I  don't know how to tie up their
shoelaces properly yet. Just A24 trying. Do you want me to show you again?'
Adam nodded.

Mrs Carstairs patiently held
Adam's fingers in hers, and talked him through the required steps. 'Now, you
try A25     your own,' she said. 'I won't say a word.'
Adam picked up a lace in
each hand. He crossed them, with the right lace going over the left, and pulled
the right lace under the left and through.
'Excellent, Adam! That's
the first A26
'Quiet,
Mummy! You said you wouldn't say anything.' 'Sorry.'
He pulled the laces tight, and slowly A27 a loop with the left lace.
Carefully, but slowly, he managed to make a perfect bow.
'You've done
it!' shouted his mother. 'Now do the other shoe.' Adam did the other shoe
perfectly.
In the next twenty
minutes, Adam tied his laces another six times.
Finally he said: 'Mummy, now I know how to tie my shoes, why do I have to
go to school tomorrow?

1 A28

, what can they possibly teach me that I don't already
    know?'

A21

I) incident

     2) instance           3)
    situation

4) occasion

A22

I) sensed

     2) felt                     3)
    suffered

4)
    experienced

A23

1) bet

      2) gamble              3)
    risk

4) chance

A24

I) stay

     2) hold                   3)
    keep

4) remain

A25

1) by

     2) in                       3)
    on

4) with

A26

I) point

     2) stage                  3)
    period

4) chapter

A27

1) collected

2) manufactured 3) assembled

4) formed

A28

1) mean

     2) suggest               3)
    represent

4) intend

no B4-B18, Ä21-A28 HE 3AbY4bTE [IEPEHECT1f CBOM
  OTBETb1 B Fx7AHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,          Ha
           B4-B18 u A21-A28 pa,3HbLV qacn1f1X õaamca. B4-B18 pacnoa10.yceHbt 6
  HU.¥CHeÙ Liacmu ÕJICIHKta. TIPI/ nepeHoce omcemoe 6
  .3ac)aHllHX B4-B18 õYR6bl ,3anucb1ŒayomcH (5€'3
  npoõeaoø u 3HŒC06 npe/11ŒaHllH.

                                Pa3aeJ1
     TIUCbMO

omeernoe
  Ha aaÒaHlffl CI, C2 ucnoalbayùme E'7AHK OTBETOB
õyòym
  otge"llßanlbcfl mo./1bK0 no aanucnu, CC)CQCIHHbLM e WIAHKE OTBETOB
  E2. Hillc•axtte aanucu qepH0ß11Ka He õyòym
  yqunlbleanlbc•fl .9KcnepmoM.

aamuuume C60ù omeem Ecau
  OÒHOÙ cmop0Hbt tîqamca Heòocmamowto, 6b' .uoyceme
  ucnov7b30øamb òpyeyo cmopoHY õaamca.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.

Test 16

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

...be    with    Linda, ana'w/re         each
  other. I'm really           ever argue     what argue about? What doyou thiMk
  /           do tv become friends with Linda again? Haveyou ever been bf a
  similar situation ? What            do?
Write
  soon,
Love,
Christine

Write back to
Christine answering her questions.

Write 100-140
words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Some people believe that 'travel broadens the mind'. They believe that
when you travel to other places, you experience new things and learn from
Other people, however, argue that most people who go on holiday to other
countries just lie on a beach for two weeks and don 't experience the local
culture at all.
Write 200-250
words.
Use the following plan
1.  Introduction (State the problem).
2.
Express your
opinion and give reasons for it.
3.
Give other
people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.
4.  Conclusion.

Test 16

                                  Pa3neJ1
          IòBopežme

Bbl nonyqume Kapmowcy, Ha Komopoù mpu
    aaòaH11H ().l.q ycnmoeo omaema: C3 — me.uamuqecxoe .UOHOAO?UqeCKoe
C4 —
    ()uaatoe c           oâueua cþaKtnuqecK0ú                          C5
    — ðuaaoe c gent','O otîueua
011010t1HOÙ
    tucþopatatgueù. OKOHttauue ObtnomtenuŒ1 KCIYCÒOPO
    3CIÒCIH11f1 onpeòe.anem 3K.3a.uenamop. Bo apeMH
    npooeòeH1147 .-ynoù qacmu .9R•aa.Mé'Ha llòem
    nocÐ10f1HHa+1 aanucb na ayÒ110Kaccemy.

                                                       3aaamaq
      3K3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task I
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on pets. Remember to say:
•      whether you have a pet
•      why people have pets
•      which animals make good pets, and why
•      which animals make bad pets, and why
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are
organising a birthday celebration for a friend. You call a restaurant to book a
table for eight people on Saturday night, before 8.30
pm.
Before making
a decision, ask the restaurant manager about:
•
availability of
tables
•
size of tables
•
time they are
available
•
location in the
restaurant
•

smoking and non-smoking areas
The teacher will plav the part of the restaurant manager and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need  decide on which table to book
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and a friend haven't
done much exercise recently. You're both feeling unhealthy and want to get fit.
You're discussing what to do. You can:
•
join a gym  exercise at home
•
go
jogging/running
•
take up tennis
•
go swimming
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite vour friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement
Section
1 Listening: third task
A    Look at the task on page 199. Find
words or phrases in the questions and answers that mean something similar to
these words and phrases.
      1 respects
2
TV programme
about real events or people
3
included as part
of a situation or event
4
general situation
something happens in
5
boring
6
equal owners of a
business
7
people who
provide products to a business
8
given a more
responsible job
B    Complete these sentences using the
words and phrases from Exercise A in the correct form.
I You have to look at what I said in  and you'll see that I meant
something else.
2
After ten years
as an assistant manager,
Simon was finally  to manager.
3
Alice and Wendy
decided to become  and set up their own clothing business,
4
1 saw a  last night about the ancient
Egvptians and it was very interesting.
5
1 have alwavs  my father for everything he's
achieved in his life. 6 Don't invite Michael to the party — he's so
7

We've been having problems with
our  and I'm afraid we don't have that model in stock at the moment.
8     The head teacher called all the boys in the fight to his office, one by
one.
Section 2 Reading: first task
C
Look at the task
on page 200. Match each of the headings A-G to a description below.
The
text with this heading will probably talk about ...
1
how doing
something wrong can cost a lot of money. Heading:
2
something that people don't like, but which is needed. Heading:
3
judging how
dangerous a situation is.        Heading:
4
the latest things
that people think about.    Heading:
5
someone who knows
a lot about their own area. Heading:
6
information about
future events.     Heading:
7
accurate changes
from one language to another.         Heading:
D
Quickly read texts
1-6 and decide which one refers to each of the following things.
a earthquakes
b communication difficulties c danger in coal mines d where cars park e creating adverts f guiding a
means of transport

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary. first task
E
Quickly read the
first text on page 204 and answer these questions.
I In
which country is cricket sometimes called the national sport?
2
How many people
are there in a cricket team?
3
WIIich other
sport is a little like cricket?
4
What are Lord's
and Old Trafford?
5
Which country
started playing test cricket in 2000?
F
Read the text
again. For each gap in the text B4-BI I, decide if these statements are True
(T) or False (F).
1
(B4) we need the
plural of 'child'. TIF
2
(B5) We need the
present progressive because this is happening now.         TIF
3
(B6) We need a
finite form, 'scores', to go with 'the side'. TIF
4
(B7) We need a
superlative form ending in -est.  TIF
5
(B8) We need the
present perfect to refer to an action continuing up to now. TI F
6
(B9) We need the
present simple because this is a current state. TIF
7
(BIO) We need a
finite form, 'gives', to go with 'the name'.       TIF
8
(Bll) We need to
change the cardinal number into an ordinal number.            TI F

Section 4 Writing: first task
G Read
the first task on page 206 and look at these suggestions for ways of making new
friends. Order them from 1 (best idea) to 6 (worst idea), according to how you
feel about them. Then work in pairs to compare your lists. Do you agree?
•
introduce
yourself to everyone you meet
•
invite people to
play a game with you
•
talk to as many
people as you can
•
try to find
people with similar interests to you
• make sure you appear friendly and smile
•
find people doing
something and ask to join them
Section
5 Speaking: first task
H Look at the Student Card for Task I on page 207. Make notes to complete
the table.

members
  of my family
what they do

what we do together

who I am close to and why

                                            Pa3aeJ1           AYAMI)0BaHHe

Bbl
  yctJtb1tuume 5 BblCICC13b16cmuÙ. YcmaH06ume coomaemcmaue
  -Me.ycÒy 6b1CRí13b16a,tlUfLMU eowpmgeeo I — 5 u
  ymeepyc)thlffl.uu, ÒaHHbLUU 6 ChillCKe 14 — F. Ifcnoat.ayúme
  KaycÒy»o õYK6Y, ot503aaqaroucvro ytnaep.ycòcwue, moat'K0
  oðurt paa. B Jaðartuu ecntb oðrto Jtuturtee
  yntøep.ycðertue.

A. I feel more afraid of crime now than in the past. B. Crime
in my area isn't as bad as the newspapers say.
C. I understand why some people commit crimes. D. My
neighbours work together to help prevent crime.

Test 17

E. The police have made a real
difference in my area. E In my experience, the police are unhelpful.

1

2

        3                    4                  5

YTBepxaewe

Bbl
ycabltuume pageoeop c)eyx òpyaeù o npueomoenenu.qx K
npaaòuut1H0MY eeqepy. Onpeòeaume,
KCIK11e
14.3 np11BeòëHHbLr ymgepycòeH11ñ Al-A6 coomaemcmgyw»m
coòepycaHtoo moccma (1), KCIKUe He coomeemcmeyom (2) u o            e
meKcme He c,tcaacmo, mo ecntb Ha ocnoeanuu maccma He-Qb3H
c)anlb Hid nonoycume.QbH0?0, Hid
ompuuamea1bH020 omaema (3). Oõaeòume HO.uep 6b1ÕpaHHO?0
6tv,tu aapuamna omeema. Bbl yc-Qb1žuume aanucb ðeaycÒb1.

Al The
party is taking place at a friend's house.
                             I) BepHO                2)
HeBepH0                 3) B •rewre He cKt13'dH0
       A2     All the invitations to
the party have been sent out.
1)   BCPHO    2) HeBepH0   3) B •rewre He
CKa3aH0
A3 A restaurant is providing the food
for the party. I) BepHO 2) HeBepHO 3) B TeKCTe He CKa3,iHO
       A4    Ben is going to provide
the music for the party.
                             1) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO                 3) B Tewre He cKa3•aH0
       A5     Their friend, Helen,
often reads fashion magazines.
                              l) BepH0                2)
HeBepH0                3) B •reKCTe He C'K',uaH0
       A6     Ben and Nadine arrange
to meet before the party.
                             l) BepH0              2) HeBepH0             3)
B TeKCTe He cKagaH0

Test
  17

Bbl
ycat,uuume ßblCR•a3bloaHUfl Jl*0òeù 6 ce.uu pa.3A11LIHb1.r
cumya«uqx. On16emwne Ha gonpocbl no coc)epycamuo 6btCKU3b16aHUÙ,
6btõpa6 oÒllH 11.3 npeÒaoyceHHbLE gapuawnoe omeema. B
aaÒaHllHX A7-Ä13 otî6eòume «ucþpy I, 2 ILIU 3,
oõo.3HatlŒot«yo omeenu KomopblÙ ,tcaycemcn nauÕoaee
eePHbtM. Bbl yc.lbltuume Ka.ycðoe BblCKa3blßaHue c)eayðbl.

A7    You will hear a woman talking
about her job. How does she feel about her boss?
1)  She admires him.
2)
She is jealous of
him. 3) She feels sorry for him.
A8     You will hear a man talking
about a TV documentary. What did he think was missing from the programme? I)
the opposite point of view
2)   interviews with people involved
3)   the historical context of the problem
A9     You
will hear a boy talking about his favourite football team. What does he say
about them?
I) They have achieved a
lot recently.
2)  They were a better team in the past.
3)

The new players have performed
badly.
AIO   You will hear a woman describing
an art gallery she visited. How did she feel about the gallery? I) She found it
dull.
2)
She found it interesting. 3) She found it tiring.
All
You will hear a man talking about his business. Who does he have problems with?
l) his
business partners 2) his suppliers
3) his
customers
A12   You will hear an advertisement
for a language course. Who is the course for?
1) people who
don't know any of the language 2) people who already know some of the language
3) people who already
know a lot of the language
A13
You will hear a woman talking about her home town. Why did she leave the town?
I) She went away to university.
2)   She got bored with it.
3)   She got promoted at work.

no Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYUbTE IIEPEHECTU CB01f OTBETb1 B
  "TAHR' OTBETOB El!
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeenlbl Ha          BI, Al-A13
  pacnoaa¿Œomcn 6 paaHbLX qacmax (îqamca. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6
  HilYCHeÙ qacmu ãaawca. Tlpu nepenoce omgemot3 6
  3aòaHL111 BI õYKBb1 aanucbleayomcq t5ea npoõeaoa u
  .3HŒC06

                                            Pa3neJ1        I-Irrel-me

Ycmauoeume coomæmcmcue me.}t A — G meKc:ma.u 1 — 6. 3anecume
  c6011 omaenlbl 6 Mcnoabayüme ,rcaycðyo
  õYK6Y moabK0 oð11H pat3. B aaðanuu oÒ1ta mea-ta
  JIUU11ffl51.

A. CALCULATED RISKS B. NECESSARY ANNOYANCE
c. FASHIONABLE IDEAS
D.     EXACT
TRANSLATION
E.      USEFUL PREDICTIONS
F.       EXPENSIVE
MISTAKES G. LOCAL KNOWLEDGE

I
2
3
4

If you are qualities. have to lead up with the Keeping
  cars, wardens play traffic wardens However, if agree that we We
  normally travel all around other waterway and who can captain.
Although being
  they gather is people that an

considering a career in
advertising, you should ask vourself whether you have the necessary
Advertisements tell people what is cool and what isn't. To be successful in
advertising, you way and create advertisements with that in mind. Advertisers
are the ones who come latest concepts and unless you can do that, then it might
not be the career for you.

Ne Tewra
      TeMa

1

2

3

4

5

6

vans and lorries constantly on the move is a vital part of a modern city and
traffic central role in that. While the police deal with accidents and are
generally respected, are generally disliked for giving tickets to motorists who
have parked illegally.
stop and think about it, even drivers who find traffic
wardens annoying usually need them to prevent the traffic system becoming
chaotic.
think of a pilot as a
person who flies a plane, but ships can also have pilots. Ships might the world
and the captain cannot possibly know the details of every harbour or that they
go to. A ship's pilot is a person who is very familiar with the local waters
guide a ship to safety. They are aware of all the dangers in the area and
advise the
a seismologist can involve long hours in an office or
a laboratory, the information far from boring. Seismologists study earthquakes
and they are sometimes able to warn earthquake is about to happen. Although it
is not an exact science, these warnings can sometimes help people prepare. Even
giving people a few minutes before the earthquake hits may well save lives.
5
Although the job of a coal miner can still be dangerous, it is
much safer than it used to be. Today, the chances Of something going wrong are
worked out very carefully and safety is extremely important. Mining companies
will never be able to completely remove the element of danger, but the industry
does everything it can to make sure that miners are as safe as possible. Miners
are trained to judge how dangerous a situation might be and to take appropriate
action to protect themselves and their colleagues.
6
When politicians from different countries get together, there is
often another figure by their sides. If the politicians don't speak the same
language, an interpreter makes sure that they are able to communicate. In such
important meetings, it is essential that the message does not get changed along
the way. Interpreters need to be extremely careful that what they say to one
politician in one language is precisely what the other politician intended to
say in their own language.

Tlpoqumaùme gonpocbl I — 6 u npoepaw,ty A — G
  paòuonepeòaq. YcmaHoeume coomeemcmcue
Meycðy eonpoca.uu u
  npoepa.&LM0ú paðuonepeðaq. B KCIYÒOM meKcme 6b/
  Haùòeme onwem mŒ/1bK0 Ha oÒllH eonpoc. B
  npueeòeHH0ù Huyce maõJtuge not)       eonpoca entuuume
  õ.VK6V, meKcmy, 6 Komopo.'.t 6Œuu HañÒeH onusem
  B aaðanuu oðllH muccm JIUUIIIUÜ.

Which radio station
I gives its listeners the
chance to win prizes? 4 never broadcasts advertisements?
2 broadcasts
drama as well as music?          5 specialises in one kind of music? 3 is the
most popular in the local area?       6 has recently won something?
A
It could be the celebrity interviews or it could be the listener
phone-in shows. Whatever it is that has made Cool FM the station with the most
listeners in the region, star DJ Zoe Connors is determined to continue the
tradition. Join her every weekday morning from 8 till 12.
B
Radio Jukebox is the station where the listeners get to choose
all the tracks. Simplv phone in with vour request and it's sure to be played
that dav. From unknown singers to award-winning bands, Radio jukebox will plav
any song you ask them to. If there's nothing particular you want to hear, then
just sit back and enjoy other listeners' choices.

been received you
all your music

C

Sunshine 105 broadcasts news, music and chat throughout the local area.
Although it has only on the air for one year, Sunshine 105 is the region's
fastest-growing station and last month the Jimmy Blackburn Local Radio Award.
It's the perfect station for the beach and it will keep entertained all summer
long.
D
If you're interested in classical music, Lvric Radio has it all.
From Beethoven to Tchaikovsky, favourite composers can be heard on Lyric. Lyric
only plavs classical music, although it also broadcasts interesting interviews
with conductors and musicians. For dramatic symphonies or to relax to, vou
can count on Lyric.
E
Majestic FM has a very simple philosophy: give the listeners what
they want. And they're sure that you want great music. There are no commercials
at all and no DJs between the songs, so it's music all the way. The only
interruption is traffic news, so Majestic FM might be the ideal station for
musicloving drivers.
F
Whether you're looking for a good radio play or the latest
chart hits, Radio Paradise is a station you're sure to enjoy. During the day,
all the latest music will keep you tapping your feet, while in the evenings the
station switches to talk shows and original plays. It might just be the only
radio station you need.
G
With reports on the hour every hour, Rocket Radio will keep you
informed about what's happening, but the station is much more than just a great
source of news. The music selection has something for everyone and you can
enter fantastic competitions every day. With an excellent team of DJs, Rocket
is the favourite station of thousands of local people.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test
  17

Tlpoqumaùme meKcm u Bbl'10JIHume .3aÒClHllfl
  A14-A20,         Igucþpy 1, 2, 3 coorneemcmgyougyo H0Jtepy
  6blÕPaHHO?0 6Œuu 6apua,Ltma omoema.

4,

It was the day the exam results were to be
  published. I tried to put off going to school and joining the excited crowd
  of students for as long as possible, but eventually my mum's glances at the
  clock became too much and I reluctantly picked my coat up and set off. As I
  slowly walked, my stomach turning over with anxiety, I could picture the
  others, gathering around the noticeboard that announced the passes that would
  make such a difference to their lives.
It had all seemed quite different six months before. I had never been
  exactly a model student, but I had always managed to more or less keep up
  through a combination of quick thinking and last-minute work. Then Davina had
  come into my life and academically things had definitely started to get
  worse. Suddenly, there was an interesting, confident, funny friend to spend
  my time with and my books just gathered dust on my desk. Essays and projects
  got later and later, while my social life improved to the point where my mum
  felt that she had to take action. Realising that a direct command was
  unlikely to work, she tried to reason with me. The problem was that arguments
  about future careers and opportunities were much less persuasive than the
  next party or the next evening out. Although we never had a row about it, I
  could see

that she
  was disappointed and concerned.
The exams themselves had come and gone. All I
  remembered about them now as I went through the school gates was a feeling
  that half the questions were about things that we hadn't done in class. The
  way the people around me in the exam room filled page after page with answers
  proved, though, that they didn't share that feeling. While they excitedly
  left the room asking each other what answer they had put for each question, I
  quickly disappeared before anyone could ask me. Some of those same faces
  crowded around the noticeboard as I approached, most of them with an
  expression of relief.
'Rose!' It was Mrs Black, our English teacher. In
  spite of all the missed work, Mrs Black had supported me and done her best to
  prepare me for the exam, even offering to have extra lessons with me and a
  few of the others. Although I hadn't taken her up on the offer, I was
  thankful that she hadn't given up on me like some of the other teachers had.
  I smiled at her.
'Have you seen the results yet?' she asked and I
  shook my head. She glanced at the noticeboard. 'Well, when you have, if you
  want to talk about your options, or anything else, then you know where to
  find me.' She smiled and walked off in the direction of the staff room. I
  stepped up to the noticeboard.
I scanned the list of names and almost called Mrs Black
  back when I couldn't find my own amongst them. It wasn't long before I
  realised that there was more than one list and I was soon looking at my own
  name, followed by a short list of subjects and grades. My heart sank as I
  read and realised that it was even more extreme than I had expected. I was
  conscious of the people around me looking at me and I put on a mask of
  indifference, even though inside I was desperate to shout out that there must
  have been a mistake. I was just about to turn away from the noticeboard when
  I realised I hadn't checked Davina's grades. At least I wouldn't be alone in
  my misery, I thought, I found her name quickly. My jaw dropped as I read
  along a string of As and Bs.

A14    Before visiting the school to
get her results, Rose 1) waits to build up the excitement.
2)
delays going
until she has to.
3)
worries that she
might be late.
4)
feels that she
might be getting ill.
A15      Rose says that before meeting Davina she had 1)
never realised how important schoolwork was.
2)
considered trying
to become a model.
3)
done better at
school than she did afterwards. 4) put a lot of effort into her studies.
Rose's mum became worried about her and
1)
pointed out the
advantages of doing well at school.
2)
prevented Rose
from seeing Davina so often. 3) offered to help Rose finish her work on time.
4) told her to leave school and get a job.
A17   Rose suggests that the others
taking the exams
1)
didn't realise
that there was a problem with the exam paper.
2)

were unable to prove that they
had understood the exam.
3)
wanted to copy
her answers to the exam questions. 4) were better prepared for the exam than
she was.
AIS    Rose is grateful to Mrs Black
because
I) the extra lessons made
a big difference.
2) she continued to
believe that Rose could do well.
3) she never insisted on Rose doing her homework. 4) the work in her
lessons was quite easy.
A19   When Rose looks at the
noticeboard, she
I) realises that her name is in the wrong place.
2) can't believe how good
her results are.
3) tries to hide her feelings from
those around her.
4)
realises spending
time with Davina was a mistake.
A20    Rose expects Davina's results
to be I) similar to hers.
2)
much worse than
hers.
3)
slightly better
than hers.
4)
much better than
hers.

no
         B2, m u A14-Ä20 HE .3AbYAbTE 17EPEHECTM CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK
  OTBETOB   !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  Ha B2, 133 u A14-A20   6 pa.3HbLr uacm.qx
  ãtamca. B2, B3 pacnoaoyceHbl g HUYCHeÙ qacmu Õaamca. npu
  nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòaH11f1-r B2, B3 ÕVK6b1
  aanucb1ßŒon1('H õea npoõe.10ß u .3}-taK06
  npenuwmu.fl.

                         Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTMKa
neKCÞIKa

17poqumaùme meR•cm 3anamume nponycK11
  npeòao.yceHum• noò H0JtepŒuu B4-BI I coomeemcmayougu.}tu
  cþop.ua.$tu 0106, HaneqamaHHb1.v  t5YKßa.Jtu cnpaaa om
  KaycÒ0?0

Ilpoqumaùme
  npueeòeHHb1ù Hitye meccm [Ipeoõpaavùme c:aoaa,
  naneqamaHHble atl?aa6HbL1t11 t5VKaaJt11 nocae H0Jtepoa B 12-1318 ma,ç,
  qmoõbl OHU apa.u.»tamuqecKll u coomaemcmaooaau
  coòepycamuo mexcma. 3anoauume npon.vc,tcu nt)JtyqeHHbLUU caoeŒuu.
  Kaycðblðl nponyc,'c coomaemcmayem omðeabhto.uy 3ClÒCIHll}0
  113 ¿pynnbl B 12-1318.

In Britain, the AA (or
Automobile Association) has been providing
     B12                                 to
drivers for over 100 years.                                                   ASSIST

Test
  17

B13     In that time, the          has
grown from 100 drivers to          MEMBER B14          15 million. The AA are
involved in many different          ACTIVE including publishing books and maps.
However, they are best known for
        BIS helping                               drivers
who have had an accident or whose cars       FORTUNE
B16      have
broken down. They also try to persuade the   to         GOVERN introduce new
laws to help drivers and which they think will improve
     B17      road                              For
example, the AA were in favour of the 1983         SAFE
        BIS law which made it                               to
drive without a seatbelt.                       LEGAL

Test
  17

Tlpoqumaåme mexcm c nponycwa.M11,
oõo,3HaqeHHbLVtu HOJtepa.'.ttt A21-A28. 3mu H0Jtepa coomaemcmeyom
aaòt1H11fLM A21-A28, B Komopbl.r npeðcma6aeHb1 603.MOYCHblC
eapuanmbl 0/11607106. Oõaeòume Ho-uep 6b1ÕpaHH0?0
6Œuu aapuawna omøema.

inside. She was writing for to go and see remembering the

A moment after Ruth knocked on the door, Dr Johansson opened
it and led her excitedly had called him the day before to A21      a few facts
for an article she the newspaper — Dr Johansson was a leading expert in physics
— and he had invited her his latest experiment. At first, she had tried to A22    out
of it, hours of physics lessons she had sat through at school. However, he had
insisted
A23  seeing her, saying that she wouldn't
regret it. As they walked into the laboratory, Ruth wondered exactly what she
was letting herself in for. A cat sat on a workbench. It opened one eye lazily
and looked at her. There was a black box connected to a computer and another
black box on the other side of the room.

'Now, Miss Evans,' said Dr Johansson, with a slight foreign
A24           'What you are about to see may change the world forever!'
Ruth smiled politely. It
sounded like a bad film script and she was quickly A25   to the conclusion that
he was slightly mad. Dr Johansson must have sensed her disbelief.
'Ah, I see you are not
sure. That is natural. However, A26 you have seen my invention, you will have
no doubts.' He pushed a couple of buttons and a low hum filled the room. 'I
have been A27 experiments on this for three years, and finally I have
succeeded.' 'Experiments on what?' asked Ruth. Dr Johansson picked up the cat
and placed it in the black box, closing the lid gently. He stood Ruth next to
the other black box.
'The transportation of a
living creature!' Dr Johansson said triumphantly, and he pressed a final
button. There was a spark of electricity in the air. He opened the box and the
cat had disappeared,
'You ... you've killed
it!' Ruth shouted. Dr Johansson smiled and pointed to the black box next to
her. He A28 her to look inside. She slowly lifted the lid. The cat looked up at
her as if it was used to this kind of treatment, then closed its eyes and settled
down for a nap.

A21

1) control

2) check

3) try

4) measure

A22

I) come

2) do

3) get

4)
  put

A23

1) on

2) with

3) for

4)
  in

A24

l) talk

2) speech

3) tongue

4) accent

A25

1) arriving

2) reaching

3) finding

4) coming

A26

1) while

2) whenever

3) once

4) then

A27

1)
  conducting

2) carrying

3) acting

4) making

A28

1) spoke

2) told

3) said

4) talked

no                               B4-B18,
  A21-A28 HE 3AbYUbTE TIEPEHECTM CBOM
OTBETb1 B               OTBETOB Ml
  !
pa.3Hb1-r qacmn.r tîQt1HKa. B4-B18 pacnoao.yeHb1 6
  HUYCHC'Ú qacmu (llamca. Ilpu omaemoa 6 3CIÒt1H11fLr B4-B18
  tîVKßb1 Janucb1ßŒomc,q õe.3
  npoõeat)ß 11 .3HUKOB

                                      Pa3neJ1
       Il"CbMO

Ha                  Cl, C2 WIAHK OTBETOB E2.
TIPI/ BbÜIOJIH"HUU
  aaðamtù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHUJta,t1Ue oõpamume Ha mo,
  timo aatuu omaenlbl õyòvm ogenuaantbcft movQbK0 no aanucRM,
  CÒeaaHHbLM B WIAHKE OTBETOB M2. 1-111KaK11e aanucu qePH0611Ka He õyÒym
  yqumb16amt-,c5t .9Kcnepmo.u.

aamuuume
  cooù omeem ECJlld OÒHOÙ cm0P0Hbl õaan,tca
  HeðocmamottH0, 6bl Atoyceme ucnoabaouantb ()pyeyo cmopony ã'tamca.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.

Test 17

This is part of a letter from
Alison, your English pen friend.

Write 100-140
words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Many people believe that producing a school magazine allows pupils to be
creative and teaches them many skills. Others disagree and say that producing a
school magazine is a waste of time when pupils

have important schoolwork to do.
What can you say for and
against pupils producing a school magazine? Write 200-250 words.
Use the
following plan I. Introduction (State the problem).
2.
Arguments
"for".
3.   Arguments "against".
4.   Conclusion.

Test 17

                            Pa3AeJ1
       roBoperute

Bbl noavqume Kapmowy, Ha ecomopoù
    npeòcmaeaeHb1 mpu aac)aHll£ ycmH0?0 omaema: C3 —
    me-yamuqecycoe -M0H0J10puqecxoe Bblcxa.3btaanue,
C4 —
    ðuaaoe c lge.QblO oõJteHa cþaKnlUqeCKOÙ
    u»uþop.uauueù, C5 — òuaaoz c      oõ.uena
OIVHOLIHOÙ UHCþOP.ual!UeÙ. OKOHLtaHue
    BblïlOJtHC'HUfl KaycÒ020 aar)aH11f1 onpeòeanem
    BK.3ŒueHamop. Bo epeMH npoeeòeHllH .9moù qacmu
    3R.3ŒUC'HZ1 llòem nocn10RH}Klfl aanucb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

                                                     3anaH11¶
    3K3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task I
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on your family.
Remember
to say:
who is
in your family
•     what they do
•     what things you like to do together

•     who you are close to in your family,
and why
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you
have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are visiting
a town. You are In the tourist information centre in the centre of town and you
have two hours to visit a local attraction. You are interested in local history
but you do not want to spend more than £10.
Before making
a decision, ask the tourist information guide about:
• attractions open at the moment • location of attractions
•
time to visit
them
•
the cost

The teacher will play the part
of the tourist information guide and will speak first.
Remember
to:
 be active and polite
•
get all the
information you need
•
decide on which
attraction to visit
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
It is the
final weekend of the summer holiday. You and your friend want to do something
with your other friends and you are discussing what you can do. You can:
•
have a picnic  go cycling
•
watch TV
•
organise a party
• play a sport
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:

discuss all the
options
       take an active part in the
conversation and be polite
       come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions  come to an agreement

Test 18

                       åhgUažeþtidE*arnSkhllšDe

Section 1 Listening: second task
A       Listen to these extracts from
the second task on page 210. As you listen, circle the phrase or number you
hear. 1 £15 / £50
2
£10 / lop
3
10 am/ 10 pm
4
6 am / 6 pm
5
3 km/h / 3 mph
6 18/8
7
2.4 / 24
8      20 / 22 9 £75 / £0.75p
10
£14 £15
B Choose one of the numbers or phrases
from Exercise A. Say it to the class. Everyone else must write down the number
or phrase you said.
Section 2 Reading: third task
c
Quickly read the text on page 214 and make notes to answer the questions.
1
Which new word
does the writer mention?
2
What do the
letters of this word stand for?
3
What might be
built in the writer's village?
4
Does the writer
want it to be built?
5
Do most of the
villagers agree with the writer?
D Find words and phrases in the text
which have a similar meaning to these words and phrases.
I unable to
be stopped (paragraph I)

2      welcomed (paragraph 2)

3      affect in a bad way (paragraph 3)

4      worth mentioning (paragraph 4)

5 to be honest (paragraph 5)

6
supported
(paragraph 6)

7
very important
(paragraph 7)

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
first task
E
Read the task with questions B4-B11 on page 216 and answer the questions.
1 (B4) Who did the
developing?
people I mobile phones
2       (B5) When are we talking about?
now I the
past
3      (B6) Which tense do we use for
general truths, and regular habits, in the past? past simple I past progressive
4      (B7) Which word or phrase helps us
decide which tense we need?
Since I were
introduced
5      (B8) When is this talking about?
note and generally I the past
6
(B9) Do any of
these fit the gap: 'be',

08

         'was', 'to be', 'are',
'been'?            yes I no
7

(BIO) When is this talking
about? now I the past
8
(Bl 1) Which of
these do we often use to talk about the future? bare infinitive I will + bare
infinitive
Section 4 Writing: first task
F Note down as many different types
of housework that you can think of.

Section 5 Speaking: third task
H Look at the Student Card for Task 3
on page 219. Make notes to complete the table. Try to think of at least one
point for each box.

Housework ironing
G Read the first task on page 218.
Work in pairs or as a group to discuss these questions.
1
How much
housework do you have to do each day?
2
What kind of
things do you have to do?

3
Is it fair that
Martin has to do a lot of housework?
4
What should
Martin do about his situation?

reasons why it's a good idea

reasons why it's
  bad idea

more
swimming
more
sunbathing
beach
volleyball
ice cream at a café

hire small boat

I Work in pairs or as a group to
discuss your reasons. If other people have come up with reasons you hadn't thought
of, add them to your notes in Exercise H.
09

Test 18
                               Раздел       Аудирование

Вы услышите 5 высказываний. Установите
соответствие межДу высказываниями кажДого говорящего 1 — 5 и утвержДенижищ
Данными в списке А — Е Используйте калсДую букву, обозначающую утверждение,
только один раз. В заДании есть одно лишнее утвержДение. Вы услышите запись
Дважды. Занесите свои ответы в таблицу.

А. I couldn't survive without ту саг. В.        try to use ту
car as little as possible.
С. Parking а
саг isn't as easy as people think.
       1).       occasionally decide
not to use ту car.
Е. I'm thinking of buying а new саг. Е I've never had ту
0'vvn саг.

Вы услышите разговор двух друзей об
организации благотворительного вечера. Определите, какие из привеДённьп•
утвержДений А1-А6 соответствуют содержанию текста (1), какие не соответствуют
(2) и о чём в тексте не сказано, то есть на основании текста нельзя Дать ни
положительного, ни отрицательного ответа (З). ОбвеДите номер выбранного вами
варианта ответа. Вы услышите запись ДВа.ЖДЫ.

ВоЬ has had а number of medical
problems.
                     1) верно         2)
неверно         З) в тексте не сказано
       А2    ВоЬ ofTers to give
Angela $0 to help her charity.
                     1) верно         2)
неверно         З) в тексте не сказано
АЗ Ange1a wants ВоЬ to give her some
топеу for each hour she walks. 1) верно 2) неверно З) в тексте не сказано
       А4    ВоЬ thinks that Angela
will walk 24 miles.
                     1) верно         2)
неверно         З) в тексте не сказано
А5 ВоЬ тау have to give Angela more
топеу than he imagines. 1) верно 2) неверно З) в тексте не сказано
         Аб         ВоЬ often goes to the town centre оп
Sunday.
                     1) верно         2)
неверно         З) в тексте не сказано

Test 18

Bbl
ycabttuume, KUK aoõõu paccnpatuuaaem onnga o paõome. B
3aðaH1141-r A7-A/3 oÕoeòume I'll(þpy I, 2 3,
coomoemcmayougyo 6b1tîPCIHHOMY acv,tu gapua,qmy omoema. Bbl ycabltuume
aanucb òeaycðbt.

When Debbie's father tells her to 'Fire away!' , he means she
1)   should not disturb him at that time.
2)
must put
something away first. 3) can ask him lots of questions.
  AS     Debbie's father suggests
that
I) he has no control over
what his job is called.
2) his job
title changes every time he is promoted. 3) he is allowed to create his own job
title.
Debbie's father runs a team of people who
l)
manufacture a certain product. 2) promote the company's products. 3) build
various public buildings.
AIO    According to Debbie's father, marketing at his company
involves I) past, current and future products.
2)
current and future products only. 3) future products only.
All Debbie's father spends most of a typical day I) driving
around the country.
2)
sitting down in an office. 3) visiting customers.
A12    He feels that the meetings he has 1) often create
problems.
2) are often
enjoyable. 3) are often boring.
A13    Debbie's father suggests he's different to other
people at work in that he 1) doesn't get angry in meetings.
2)   is respected by everyone else.
3)   enjoys watching people get annoyed.

no Bl u HE 3AbYJ1bTE IIEPEHECTM OTBETb1 B WIAHK
  OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME, qmo on16embl Ha aaÒClHldfl B I, Al-A13
  pacnoaazcuomcH 6 pa.3Hb1X qacm.qx Õaamca. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6
  HUYHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepe,qoce omcen106 6 aaòamqu
  Bl õYK6b1 aanucb1BŒomc51 õe.3 npoõeaoa u .31-taK06
  npenllHŒlHlffl.

211
                                     Pa3neJ1        LITeHne

Ycmcmoeume coon16emcmeue me-M A — G moccma.M 1 — 6. 3aHecume c6011
ome,embt 6 maâuugy. Mcno.ÆbJYùme Kaycòyo
õ_VK6Y moabK0 oÒt1H paa. B 3aòa1tuu           me.ua
attu1H5151.

A.     HARD
WORK
B.      POWERFUL
PRODUCTS
c. CHEAPER ALTERNATIVES
D. DIFFERENT STYLES
E. MODERN xrrrruDEs
F. FASHION ADVICE G. SPECIAL SIZES

1
2
3

Not that long ago, men were often hair was
  tidy, or were criticised for quite normal for men to care about even consider
  men who don't take Do you watch fashion models walking think: 'I'll never be
  able to afford stores these days stock clothes that shows only a few months
  ago. The wearing may be ten times more The thing about fashion is that it
  fashion, and then go out of fashion.

accused of being
vain when thev looked in a mirror to see if their putting moisturising creams
on their face. Today, however, it's their appearance as much as women do. Some
people would pride in how they dress and look to be old-fashioned!

down the catwalk in the latest styles at fashion shows and that!'? You might be
surprised to find that you can. Most high street are almost identical to the
ones models were wearing at fashion difference is the price. The slinky black
dress which the model was expensive than the copy available in the high street!
changes. If it didn't, it wouldn't be fashion! Things come
into
Take jeans. In the
1970s, people wore jeans which were tight around the waist but became wider and
wider towards the foot. This fashion of flared trousers had disappeared
completely by the early 1980s and didn't reappear until the 1990s.
4
Go into any supermarket or chemist and you'll see row upon row of
gels, creams and mousses for your hair. Some are for women, some are for men
and some are for children. What most of them have in common nowadays is that
thev claim to be extremely strong. The companies that produce them say in their
advertisements that they keep your hair styled in the way that you want it for
hours and hours, often even if you get your hair wet.
5
Most clothes shops and shoe shops stock products for the average
customer. For most of us, this isn't a big problem. If we buy a pair of jeans
that are too long, we can get them taken up. For some people, however, it is
difficult to find clothes and shoes in the high street that fit. So what should
you do if you have extremely big feet, or are particularly large or small?
Thankfully, there are a number Of shops, catalogues and websites that make and
sell shoes and clothes specifically for people who do not have average bodies.
6
Although many teenage boys and girls dream of being models, the
job isn't as glamorous or easy as it sounds. If you're on a fashion shoot, you
may have to get there at five o'clock in the morning. You'll spend several
hours getting your make-up put on and being dressed in the right clothes, and
then several more hours posing for photographs, It can be tiring and boring and
you might not be able to have anything to eat all day. Being a model is also
stressful, as you never know whether you'll be offered work the next day, and
you always have to look your best.

Ne •reKc-ra

Tesla

1

2

3

4

5

6

Test 18

Ilpoqumaúme
ym6epYòeH11H I — 6 u caeðyougue aa HII.UU meyccmbl. YcmaH0B1tme
coomaemcmeue .ueycðy ym6ep.ycòeHlffiJf11 u coðepyct1Hueat
muccmoe. Hanutuume I'll(þpy 1 — ecau ymeep.ycÒeH1te gepnoe, u
gucþpy O — ecnu ymuepycòenue neøepnoe. 3aHecume ceou
omeenlbl 6 maûuugy.

To do a simple
  calculation, a calculator was better than a microcomputer.
People with different home computers could
  easily share their games,
People with home computers spent most of
  their time playing games on them.
Laptops are smaller and lighter than notebook computers.
Five years ago, most PCs had less power
  than most laptops do nowadays.
It is still a major problem for the owner
  if a laptop does not come with a CD-ROM drive.

PCs, or personal computers, are a part of our lives. In the
  late 1970s, when computers entered people's homes for the first time, PCs
  didn't exist. Back then, computers for the home were usually called
  'microcomputers'. Initially, many people didn't understand what they were
  for, because it was more difficult to do a simple calculation on a
  microcomputer than it was on a calculator!
By the early 1980s, computers for the home began to be
  called 'home computers'. There were manv different models, made by different
  companies. Software such as games for one home computer rarely worked on a
  home computer made by a different company. Home computers had far less power
  and memory than computers today, so what you could do on them was extremely
  limited. In fact, people spent much more time writing simple programs for
  their home computer than they did using their computer for the kind of things
  we use computers for today: writing documents and playing games. Of course,
  the Internet didn't exist back then, so computers weren't used to send
  e-mails or look at websites.
Laptops, or notebook computers as they are also known, have become
  smaller and lighter in recent years. This is important, because the main
  point of laptops is that they are portable. The smaller and lighter they are,
  the easier they are to carry.
However, as PCs have become more powerful in terms of memory, so have
  laptops. Laptops today are far more powerful than PCs were only five years
  ago.
So what are the disadvantages of laptops? One disadvantage
  is the kevboard. Because of a laptop's size, its kevboard is often more
  difficult to type on than a regular keyboard. The screen is often quite
  small, too. To save weight and space, some laptops do not come with a CD-ROM
  drive. Although this was a major disadvantage a few years ago, the invention
  of memory sticks, which serve the same purpose as CD-ROMs, has basically
  solved that problem.

1

2

3

5

6

Test
  18

Ilpoqumaùme u 6btnomtume aaòamut A14-A20,
Illi(þpy 1, 2, 3 11.711 4, coomcemcmeyougyo Hovuepy Bb16paHH0?0 ea.uu
eapucutma omeema.

New words
  are invented all the time. I know that, and I know it's inevitable. For my
  part, and perhaps this is because I'm an old man now, I tend to think we've
  got enough words already and if we only used them properly we wouldn't need
  to come up with new ones.
There is a fairly new word, though,
  which I heard for the first time only a year or two ago. I believe it's
  American in origin, which makes it all the more surprising that I've added it
  to my vocabulary. And, I must point out, it's not unwillingly that I've
  accepted and embraced it. I honestly cannot imagine how I got through
  eighty-two years of life without it. Looking back, I can see occasion after
  occasion where the word would have been useful, where its existence might
  actually have changed things for the better, because to define something is
  to understand it, and be able to change it. The word is: nimby.
For those of you who are still unaware of this word, let me
  explain. A nimby is a person who does not want something such as a new
  building or road built near where they live. It's not that they can't see the
  value of the building project; often they can. They just want it built
  somewhere else — somewhere that won't disturb their peace and quiet at home.
  If you have an interest in language, you may like to know that nimby is an
  acronym, its letters being formed from the first letters of the words 'Not In
  My Back Yard'.
I have lived in the same small
  village in Sussex (population: 2,500) for over 30 years. I had always thought
  I was surrounded by neighbours, friends and fellow lovers of rural life. Now
  I have discovered I am surrounded — with a few notable exceptions — by nimbys
  (or 'nimbies', opinion seems to be divided on the plural). The village is at
  war with itself, and, unfortunately, the nimbys are winning. A few of us are
  fighting them, though, and I am confident that we shall win eventually.
The war is
  over a proposed new community centre. I see it — as any sensible person
  should as a much-needed addition to the village. It would be a place for the
  youth of the village to meet at night and would, frankly, help keep them out
  of trouble. It would be a place for pensioners like me to go for a coffee and
  chat in the mornings. It would have meeting rooms, a café, sports
  facilities, a small stage for performances, even a gym. It would create jobs.
  How could anyone oppose it? But of course for nimbys, the issue is not that
  the village doesn't need a community centre. I think I'm right in saying that
  every single one of them supports the concept in principle. They just don't
  want it next to their house.
There are four possible sites. This means there are four groups of
  nimbys. Each group wants the centre to be built in one of the three sites
  that are not near their own houses. While they fight amongst themselves, the
  centre is not being built. It could have opened six months ago, if the
  village had united and backed the proposals. The money — all £250,000
  of it — is sitting in a bank account waiting to be spent. Some doubt it ever
  will.
For me, the campaign goes on and I have one key strength.
  One of the proposed sites is almost right next door to my house. Am I
  terrified that there will be busloads of people arriving in the middle of the
  night and disturbing my sleep? No, I am not. Am I afraid that all the youths
  leaving the centre when it closes will smash my windows and burgle my house?
  No, I am not. Am I worried that a community centre next door will decrease
  the value of my house? No, I am not. Am I proud that I am not and never will
  be a nimby? Yes, I am.

A14

In the first paragraph, the writer
  says that he 1) recognises the importance of inventing new words.
2)
  believes he can
  stop the invention of new words.
3)
  thinks the
  invention of new words is unnecessary.
4)
  is very careful
  to always use new words properly.

A15

The word 'nimby' is now used by the writer despite the fact
  that
1)
  it originally
  came from the USA.
2)
  he was
  unwilling at first to use it.
3)
  it would have
  been more useful in the past.
4)
  he can't
  understand exactly what it means.

A16

The writer suggests that a nimby
  wouldn't oppose 1) worthwhile construction in their neighbourhood.
2)
  construction in
  their neighbourhood if it's quiet.
3)
  construction in
  other people's neighbourhoods.
4)
  any
  construction that adds value to their life.

Ali

The writer has recently
1)
  discovered that
  he has new neighbours.
2)
  learnt the
  truth about his neighbours.
3)
  realised he is
  alone in his struggle.
4)
  become more
  confident about winning.

AIS

The word 'frankly' in paragraph five emphasises that
1)
  the centre
  would solve all the problems caused by young people.
2)
  there are very
  few young people living in the village anyway.
3)
  most people do
  not believe the centre would be used at night.
4)
  young people in
  the village do sometimes get into trouble at present.

Al 9

The four groups of nimbys
1)
  agree that the
  village doesn't need a new centre.
2)
  have agreed
  where the centre should not be built.
3)
  disagree about
  where the centre should be built. 4) agree that one of the four sites is
  acceptable.

A20

The first three questions which the writer asks in the
  final paragraph
I) demonstrate how courageous the writer is.

2)   help show us what nimbys are scared
of.

Test 18

3)

suggest that nimbys sometimes
use violence.
4)   show that the writer has a very
secure house.

OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !
ObPATMTE
  BHMMAHME, qmo omaembl Ha .3aòí1H11fi B2, B3 u A14-A20
  pacnonaecwomcfl pa.3Hb1.r qacnmx ÕMH}CCI. B2, B3 pacnoaoyct'Hb1 B
  HUYt•neÚ qacmu ÕJUIHKa. [11211 nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaðaH11Rr
  B2, B3 õYK6bl aanucb16Œomca õea npoõeaoo u .3HCIK06
  npe,'111HaH11fi.

                        Pa3neJ1          rpaMMaTHKa
aeKCWKa

Ilpoqumaùme
  maccm 3ano.QHume nponycycu 6 npeòaoyceH11fLr not) HOAtepa.M11 B4-B11  tþop.uŒuu ca106,
  HaneqamaHHbtx aaua6Hb1.uu õYK6a.uu cnpaoa om KaycÒO?O
  npeòJ10yceH11f1.

Mobile
phones
Have you got a mobile
phone?
Before mobile phones ,
you could only call someone DEVELOP with a phone which was connected to a phone
line. That problem that it was often difficult to contact people, particularly
if you were on a bus or in a car.
Before mobile phones,
people text messages to each other. NOT SEND Since they were introduced, text
messages the way CHANGE we communicate.
         B8       With text messages,
you                            to actually call someone.                 NOT
NEED
139      You simply type a short message and send it,         careful,            BE
of course, to send it to another mobile and not to a home phone.
BIO Mobile phones to be big and heavy. Now, they're USE small
and light.

Bli The chances are that they even
smaller and lighter         BECOME in the future.

[Ipoqumaùme
npugeòeHHb1ú HU.ye mt'lcc•m flpeoõpaayùme caoea,
HaneqamaHHb1e .3aua6Hbl.MU ÕYK6ŒUU nocae HOAtepoe B12-B18 maR,
umoõbt OHII epa.u.uamuqecK11 u aeKCUqeCKU coomgemcmeoaaatl
coòepyct1H11R) moccma. 3ano.1Hume nponycxu 110JIVqeHHb1.UU
CJ106Œuu. KaycÒb1Ù nponycR coomeemcmeyem omÒeJ1bHOMV
aaòamoo epy/lllbl B12-B18.

Finding a good job is
never easy at the best of times. In times Of high
B12 ,
with more and more people chasing fewer and fewer EMPLOY jobs, it becomes even
more difficult.
       B13                                 and
skills can make all the difference. The better yours        QUALIFY
          B14 are, the less                              you
will have in finding a job.                             DIFFICULT
B15      If you need to improve your skills, find out about  courses
TRAIN in your area. If there aren't many jobs in your area, it is worth considering
       B16      the                           of
moving.                                                                            POSSIBLE
You may not want to leave
your friends and family, but choosing to live in
       B17                                    where
there is work may be the best solution,                     LOCATE
B18       And
remember: the more     forms you fill in, the more your APPLY chances of being
called for an interview increase.

Tlpoqumaùme
moccm c nponvcxa.tu, Ot50,31taqeHHblJtU Ht).uepa.lfll 421-428. 3mu H0Mepa
coon16emcn16yom 3CIÒUHUHJt Ä21-A28, 6 KOIÈlOPbLr npeòcmaeaeHb1
60.3.UOYHbte eapuaffllbt omøemog. ()õgeòume
6bttîpaHHO?0 6Œuu gapuanma omaema.

intelligent life elsewhere in the
  universe? One quite valid response to that question is: we just know and we
  haven't seen any proof that there is so A21  . (Some people's
  that they have seen UFOs certainly do not count as proof, They are not even
  evidence.) scientists are becoming increasingly A22  that the Earth is
  not the only of life in the universe.

Is there don't claims However, source
There are two main
reasons for this. The first is that the more scientists learn about how life
started here on Earth, the more they realise how easily those conditions could
be recreated somewhere else.

Test 18

The second reason is A23  to the first. A24 it's not that
difficult to create the right conditions for life to form, the universe is so
big that the A25 are if it can happen somewhere else, it will.
None of that is to A26
however, that we'll be communicating with aliens any time soon. Firstly, if
there is life on other planets, it may not be intelligent in the way that
humans are. There are billions of different life forms here on Earth, but it's
only humans who have been able to leave the planet. Secondly, A27 if there was
an intelligent life form on another planet, it may have evolved and become
extinct billions of years before the Earth even formed. Or, it may not come
Into existence until billions of years in the future. Thirdly, one of the main
reasons why there might be life elsewhere — the sheer size of the universe — is
also a reason why we will probably never A28 to see it. It takes so long to
travel even short distances in space — the journey from Earth to our close
neighbour Mars takes several months — the odds of two intelligent life forms
from different planets being in the same place at the same time are incredibly
small,

A21

1) long

2) far

3) much

4) many

A22

I) forced

2) influenced

3) convinced

4) supported

A23

1) connected

2) joined

3) fixed

4) glued

A24

1) Measuring

2) Guessing

3) Taking

4) Assuming

A25

1) opportunities

2) chances

3) possibilities

4) choices

A26

1) say

2) tell

3) speak

4) mention

A27

I) as

2) even

3) what

4) only

A28

I) succeed

2) achieve

3) get

4) make

ObPATMTE BHLfMAHIfE, qmo omeembl Ha aat)t1H11f1 B4-B18 u A21-A28
  pacnoaauuomctfl 6 PC13Hb1X qacmnx ãqaHKa. B4-B18 paci10A0Yé'Hb1
  6 Hil.ycnel"l yacmu ÕaaHKa. Ilpu nepeHoce omeemog 6
  aaòcmunx• B4-B18 õYKdbl aanucbteawmcn õea
  npoõeaoe u 3HClK06 npemmanua.

omeemoe Ha aaòaHllH CT, C2
  ucnoabayùme WIAHK OTBETOB Y22.
Ilpu ßbtnoa,qeHUU
  aaòanuù CI u C2 ocoõoe BHILMCIHue oõpamume Ha mo,
  qmo Baum omaenlbl õyòym 014t'Huean1bcf1 moatbKO no aanucsw,
  cðenaHHbt.u e WIAHKE OTBETOB N2. HII}CŒCUE' aanucu 'tepHOBIŒa
  He õyðvm yqurnbtaantbc•a ,9Kcnepmo.u.
[Ipu
  .3ffl10JtHeH1d11 WIAHKA OTBETOB   yycaycume cHaqaaa Ho-step aaÒaH11H
  Cl. C2 game-u aamuuume ceoðl omeem Ecau oÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1
  õaamca Heðocmamot1H0, 6bt Jtoyceme ucnoall,aoaanlb ()pyeyo
  cmopo,qy ÕJICIHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.
This is part
of a letter from your English pen friend.

Write back to Martin
answering his questions.

Test 18

Write 100-140 words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Most schoolteachers give their students homework. However, some teenagers
today believe that they are being given too much homework and that they don't
have the time to do it all properly.
Do you
think that teachers give Use the following plan too much homework?   1.
Introduction (State the problem).
Write 200-250 words,                       2.
Express your opinion and give reasons for it.
3. Give other people's arguments and explain why they are wrong.
4.
Conclusion.
                                 Pa3aeJ1        roBopeHne

Bbl noayqume Kapmot1KY, Ha
  Icomopoù npeòcmaaaeHbt mpu .3aòaH11f1 ()JIH ycmH0?0
  omgema: C3 — me-uamuqeucoe .uonoaoeuqecycoe 6b1CKa3b1eaHUe,
C4 —
  òuaaoe c lge.Qb'0 oõatena tþcncmuqecvcoù  C5
  — c)uaaoz c tge.1b10 oõ.ueHa
01ßHot1H0ñ
  11Híþop.uauueú. OROH11CIHue 6bUIOJIHeHUfi
  ,ça.ycòozo aaÒCIH11f1 onpeòeaaem
  .9K3ŒueHamop. Bo epeatfl npogeÒeH11$1 amt)ðl Ltacmu
  3K3ŒueHa uòem aanucb Ha ayòuŒaccemy.

3aaaHV1¶ 3K3aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task 1
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a 2-minute talk on
your plans for the future.
Remember
to say:
•
what job you want to do in the future, and why
• where you want to live in
the future, and why
•      if you want to visit other countries
in the future
•      what other things you want to do when
you're older
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)

Test 18

You need to get to City Hospital
as quickly as possible. You have never been there before. Ask a passer-by
questions about:
•      how to get there
•      where to catch available transport
•      the time needed to get there
You
begin the conversation. The teacher will play the part of the passer-by,
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on the best way to get there
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and a
friend are on the beach. You have half an hour left until you have to leave.
You are discussing how to spend your half hour. You can:
•      do some more swimming
•      do some more sunbathing
•      play beach volleyball
•      go to a café for an ice cream
•      hire a small boat
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
•      discuss all the options  take an active part in the
conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and take them into account  invite your friend to come up with
suggestions come to an agreement

A Look at the second task on page
222. 3 Mark was shocked at the sof For each statement, you will hear two his
garden when he got back from extracts (A and B). Circle the extract holiday.
which means that the statement is true.
4 My cat is
more than a pet to me. He's
      I (Al) The pupils should arrive at the                         also
a friend and c

airport one
hour before take-off. A B
2
(A2) The flight will
last about four hours.
3
(A3) The pupils will
each have their own hotel room in London. A B
4
(A4) The first
attraction they are planning
          to visit is the Tower of
London.            A
5
(AS) The teacher has taken
pupils to London before.
6
(A6) Jonathan decides
to go on the trip to Kew Gardens. A B

I

What is Peter Madison's job?

2

Where does he sell things,

Decide if these statements are True (T)

apart from his shop?

or False (F).

1

Roberto and Mario are out

3

What is Peter interested

camping.

TIF

in buying?

2

The trip was Roberto's idea.

TIF

4

How much is it worth?

3

Roberto enjoyed the first few days

5

What is the price on the

of the trip.

TIF

price tag?

4
5

A noise outside wakes Mario up.
Roberto goes to check what the

TIF

6

How much
  does Peter pay for it?

noise was.

TIF

E Write a word from the box in each gap

Section 2 Reading:
third task
B
Quickly read the text on page 226.
5       After two hours of arguing, I had
finally  my parents that I was right.
6       I had little difficulty in p
Sally to have a birthday
party.
7       Carl never finds it easy to make up
his mind. He's so i
Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
third
task

6 The noise was made by
  a dangerous     to complete the sentences. animal.           TIF
C Complete each sentence with a word or from the text. You
  are given the 1 1 watched the greengrocer as he phrase first letter of the
  word or phrase to help  all the vegetables out so the customers could see them.
  you.
1 1 can't sleep because you s  so loudly!

D Quickly read the text on page 229,
ignoring the gaps. Write a word or short phrase to answer each question.

2
Don't worry about
the party tomorrow. I'm sure everything will  out fine.
3
Quite a few of
the hotel rooms out over the lake.
4
When does her new
CD  out? actual • genuine • honest proper
5
Come on, now. Be    Did
you take the money?
6
I thought the
painting was by Picasso, but an expert said it wasn't
7
I need a hammer.
I can't do this job without the  tools.
8
People often
think Sydney is the capital of Australia, but the  capital is Canberra.

9
If anyone finds
Jimmy's money, then please hand it  at the school office.
10
There was a man
in the street handing  leaflets to everyone walking past.
Il
The shopkeeper looked annoyed when I handed  a £50 note.
12 Jane passed the photo to me and I
glanced at it before handing it  to her.
Section
4 Writing: second task
F
Look at the second
task on page 230. Decide whether each of the following is a point for (F) or
against (A) performing experiments on animals. Write F or A on the line
provided.
1   We can test new medicines on animals
to see if they are harmful to humans.
2

A lot of the experiments have
been done before and don't need to be repeated.
3   Animals have rights, just like people do.
4   In most experiments on animals, the
animals don't suffer.
5   It's important to gain scientific knowledge, even if some animals
suffer.
6   The information we gain from testing
medicines on animals is very limited.
G
Discuss which of
the statements above you agree or disagree with. Explain why.
Section 5 Speaking: second task
H Look at the Student Card for Task 2 on page 231. Read this extract from
a dialogue and find five mistakes. Underline them and write the correct
form above the line.
Shop assistant: Hello.
Can 1 help you?
Student: Hello. Yes. I like to buy a present for a friend. What Moscow
Dynamo products you have?
Shop assistant: We've got hats and scarves.
Student:
Can you tell how much the hats are?
Shop assistant: They're
£19.99 each.
Student: That's enough
expensive.
What's the scarves' price?
Shop assistant: They're £16.
Student: Do
you have any other

Moscow Dynamo products?
                          Pa3aeJ1      Aynwpormme

Bbl
vcabltuume 5 BblCKCt3b1ßClH11ñ. YcmaH0ßume coomgemcmgue
vueycðy 6b1CKC13b1aaHUHMU KCIYÒOZO ?060pnugezo 1 — 5 u
ymeepYòeHllHvuu, ÒaHHbLM11 6 cnucwe A — F. Mcno.lbayúme
Kaycðyo õYK6V, oõo.3Haqcuougyo ym€epycðemŒ,
mœ1bK0 oÒtut pam B aaÒaHuu ecntb oÒH0 autunee
ymeepwòeltue. Bbl yc.lbltuume aanucb maycÒb1. 3aHecume coou
omaembl 6 maõ.au«y.

A.
She listens to
music to help her relax.
B.
Listening to the
radio makes her feel less alone. C. She likes to hear other people's opinions
on the radio. D. Music helps her concentrate on her work. E. She used to work as a DJ on local
radio.

F. She would like to work in
radio in the future.

YTBep>KneH1te

             1

2                        3

4

5

Bbl pa.g¿oeop yqumŒQbH111!bl C _ygeHUKOJt O
  npeòcmonugeù noeaòxe. Onpeòenume, 143
  nP116eÒëHHbLr ymeepycòeH11ú Al-A6 coomeemcmoyom
  coðepyamuo moccma (1), KUKU" He coomeemcmeyom (2) u O tië,u 6
  mexcme He CKa.3aHO, mo ecmb Ha OCH06tmuu moccma HCJZb3R ðanlb Hil no.aoycume.1bH020,
  Hil omaema (3). Oõaeòume 6blÕPClHHO?0
  6tL8tu gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycJlbuuume aanucb ()eaycðbl.

Al       The pupils should arrive at
the airport one hour before take-off.
                     l) BepH0                2)
HeBepHO                3) B •reKc•re He CKa3tiH0
A2      The flight will last about
four hours.
                     l)
BepH0                2) HeBepHO                3) B •rewre He CKt13aHO
A3      The pupils will each have
their own hotel room in London.
1)
BepH0            2)
HeBepH0           3) B TeKCTe He CKa3aHO
A4      The first attraction they are
planning to visit is the Tower of London.
                   1) BepH0              2) HeBepH0            3)
B TeKcre He CKt13aHO
A5      The teacher has taken pupils
to London before.
                    1) BepHO               2)
HeBepH0                 3) B Tek'CTe He cKa'3aH0
A6      Jonathan decides to go on the
trip to Kew Gardens.
1)
BepHO           2)
HeBepH0           3) B -reKc-re He

Bbl ycalblluume 6b1CKa.3b1dUHUf1 -Q10òeñ 6 ceuu
paaauwtbLt cumva«unx. Omeenužne Ha aonpocbl no coc)epycantoo
6blCKa.3b16aHUÚ, Bblõpaa oðllH 113 npeòaoyceHHbLr
gapuaH71106 omæma. Bbl yc.lblluume KaycÒoe
BblCKa.3bteaH11é' ðea.ycÒb1. Bo epeMH npocayužugamtfl 6
aaðaH11fLY A7-A13 oõeeòume H0.uep omeema, Komopblù
6ŒU ,rca.ycemcfl Hauõoaee e,ePHbLM.

You will hear a man talking about his
doctor. What does he say about his doctor's advice? 1) He will ignore it.
2)
He will check it.
3) He will follow it.
A8 You will hear a woman talking about her shopping
experience. What did she think had improved? 1) the service
2)
the choice
3)   the offers
   A9   You will hear a boy talking
to his friend. What does he say about his teacher?
1)   She helped him.
2)   She treated him unfairly.
3)

She ignored his problem.
AIO    You will hear a woman talking
about a painting. How did she feel about it?
1)
She was shocked
by it.
2)   She thought it was clever.
3)   She found it uninteresting.
All You will hear a conductor talking to an orchestra. What does he ask
them to do?
1)  play more slowly
2)  play more quickly
3)  play with more feeling
A12    You will hear a woman talking
about a newspaper. How does she feel about it?
I) She
thinks it ignores the most important news.
2)
She thinks it
always presents the news fairly.
3)   She thinks it always presents its own
point of view.
A13   You
will hear a commercial for a kitchen product. What does the commercial claim
about the product?
l) It will save you effort. 2) It will save you money. 3) It
will save you time.

no OKOHtlClHUU Bl u Al-A13 HE 3AbYAbTE IIEPEHECTM
  CBOM OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB El !
ObPATIfTE BHHMAHME, timo omeembl Ha .3aÒaHllf1 BI,
  Al-Ä13 pacnoaaeŒomcn 6 pat3HbLr

BI õYK6b1 aanucb16ŒomcH
  õea npoõenoa u .3HüK06 npenllHaHllH.

                                        Pa3AeJ1         I-Irrerme

YcmŒtoeume
coomeemcmeue me-u A — G moccma•t 1 — 6. 3anecume      omoembl a maõau«y.
Mcno,1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õYK6Y moabK0 oò11H pa.3. B
3aÒaHltu oÒHa me.'ta JIUIUHHH.

A. CONFUSING PICTURES            E.
FAILED HOPES B. IMPRESSIVE PROGRESS        F.
QUESTIONING EXPERT
c.
COMPLEX NETWORK G. SOCIALISING PROBLEM D. UNUSED POWER
1 It has
been claimed that we only use ten per cent of our brain. This is a myth but it
is true that we are probably all capable of doing far more with our brains than
we do at present. The brain can be trained to improve performance, rather like
a muscle can. There are various techniques for improving
your
memory, for example, that do seem to work. Many magicians and stage performers
use these methods and there seems no reason why the rest of us couldn't learn
to improve our abilities with practice.
2

James Randi is a professional
magician. He is well known for more than just his performances of magic, however.
He is also famous for offering Sl 0,000 to anyone who can prove that they have
supernatural or paranormal powers. As a magician, he believes that all the
people who claim to have special powers are actually tricking other people into
believing them. His knowledge of tricks means that he can soon see how people
are being deceived.
3      Our brains are usually very good at
analysing the information they receive from our eyes. However, it is possible
to fool the brain using certain images. To test this, draw two lines of equal
length, one above the other. Now draw two more lines crossing them, going up
the page and going in at an angle. The new lines should look like railway
tracks disappearing into the distance. When you look now at the original two
lines, your brain will think the top line is longer than the bottom line.
Images like this are known as 'optical illusions'.
4      Watch science fiction films and you
will often see a computer or a robot that is intelligent. In the 70s,
researchers in artificial intelligence were generally optimistic that thev
would create a thinking computer within a few decades. However, they have not
been very successful. Outside a few very specialised tasks, such as playing
chess, computers are still a long way from being intelligent in any real sense.
Some scientists even question whether it is ultimately possible to create an
intelligent computer at all.
5      In the middle of the twentieth
century, a new medical condition was identified: autism. A child with autism
has problems communicating with other people and finds it difficult to
establish relationships with others. Autistic children develop language more
slowly than other children and often seem very distant. The condition can be
stronger in some people than in others and there is no cure, although

6

many
  autistic people can learn to interact with other people reasonablv well.
The
  brain is composed of about 100 billion neurons or nerve cells, all connected
  to one another. Information comes into a neuron from other neurons and then
  the neuron sends out a signal to other neurons it is connected to. Using
  electrical and chemical signals, this complicated svstem of neurons is behind
  all the processes of the brain, from looking after the body to higher
  thoughts and aims.

Testa

1

    2                     3

4

5

6

Ilpoqumaùme
  vmgepyòehlllfl I — 6 u caeòyougue aa HILMU me,tccmbl.
  YcmaH06ume coomgemcmaue MeycÒv vn16epycòeHldHvuu u
  coòepycaHueM meKcn106. Hanuužume Igucþpy 1 — ecau
  ymeepycòutue

1
Elvis Presley 's
family were quite rich.
2
Elvis's
first hit record and first film were made in the same year.
3
Elvis had a
brother who lived longer than he did.
4
John
Lennon never saw his mother after the age office.
5
'Ohn
Lennon and Paul McCartney both played in The Quarry Men.
6
'Ohn
Lennon died a fez' years after Elvis Presley did.

Test 19

Elvis
Presley was born into a working class family in Mississippi in 1935. Although
there was never much money, his family was very close and went to church
together. The music he heard there had a big influence on his future sound.
Elvis recorded his first songs in 1953, but it wasn't until January 1956 that
he produced his first hit, Heartbreak Hotel. In August of that year, he also
filmed his first movie, Loze Me Tender. He would go on to make 33 films and
sell over 500 million records around the world.
Despite this enormous success, there was also tragedy in
Elvis's life. He had a twin brother who died at birth and his mother died at
the young age of 46. He himself suffered a heart attack and died in 1977, aged
just 42.
Born in 1940, John Winston Lennon was brought up by his
Aunt Mimi. His father left his mother when John was five and his mother, Julia,
didn't feel able to look after him. They kept in touch, though, and it was in
fact Julia who taught him to play banjo, starting one of the most amazing careers
in pop music. Lennon went to art college, although he left before finishing the
course to concentrate on his music. He had already formed a group called The
Quarry Men and they performed at various places in Liverpool. Lennon was
introduced to Paul McCartney, who joined the band. They changed the name of the
band a few times, finally settling on The Beatles by 1960.
The
band became very famous and had 20 number one hits in America. They introduced
a serious, poetic side to pop music and influenced many performers. Various
artistic differences led to the group splitting up in 1970.

1

2

4

       5                         6

Lennon continued to make music on his own
and with his wife, Yoko Ono, until he retired in the mid-70s to spend more time
with his family. He started to make music again in 1980 and had released a new
album, Double Fantasy, when he was shot and killed by a fan in December of that
year. He was 40 years old.

Ilpoqumaùme mel-ccm u Bbl,'10JIHume           A14-A20, ot560Òfl
  l!tltþpy 1, 2, 3 coomßemcmgyougyo no-Mepy 6b1ÕpaHHO?0
  6ŒM1d gapuawna omeema.

4,

Roberto lay awake, listening to the
  rain outside the tent and the soft sound of snoring coming from Mario beside
  him. As usual, Mario had no trouble sleeping through the roaring storm,
  Roberto thought as he pulled his sleeping bag tighter around himself. Roberto
  had known him to snore happily in a train station with trains coming and
  going. He would have thought, though, that even Mario might have had problems
  with the freezing wind coming through the door of the tent. No amount of
  clothes piled on top of each other could stop the cold air getting in and
  Roberto was beginning to get annoyed at the sight of his sleeping companion.
The
  trip had been Mario's idea and Roberto had agreed despite his lack of
  enthusiasm for the outdoor life and its physical demands. As far as he was
  concerned, the countryside was a place filled with insects and inconvenience,
  but Mario had convinced him that they would enjoy it. Roberto had managed to
  maintain a smile for the first few days of hard work and badlycooked food,
  but his patience was coming to an end. He wasn't sure why Mario usually
  succeeded in persuading him to do things that were against his better
  judgement, but he thought it was probably due to Mario's ability to focus on
  the positive. He seemed not to hear Roberto's arguments against the idea
  until it just became easier for Roberto to agree than to try to make him
  listen. Roberto wished he could be more like Mario. His own ideas usually
  never got very far. He was too aware of the opposite point of view and often
  argued himself out of his own suggestions. It made him seem indecisive and
  weak, while Mario came across to everyone as very confident.
The wind
  seemed to get a little stronger and Mario rolled over and opened his eyes
  sleepily.
'What time
  is it?' he asked and Roberto peered at his watch.
'Four,' he
  replied and yawned. Suddenly there was a noise outside the tent.
'What was that?' asked Mario. They
  both listened. It had sounded like the grunt of an animal of some kind, a
  large animal by the sound of it. Neither of them moved. After a moment
  Roberto offered to check what was outside and Mario nodded his head, nervously.
  Not that Roberto wasn't afraid — the sweat on his hands and forehead proved
  that — but he knew that unless he acted Mario would beat him to it and would
  come out of it looking like a hero. Roberto was determined that when they got
  back home he was going to have stories to tell, just like Mario normally did.
He moved to the entrance to the tent and unzipped the
  door slowly. The wind blew rain in. He glanced back at Mario before stepping
  outside and closing the door behind him.
Mario blinked in the darkness and listened carefully. He
  heard the animal noise again, closer this time and then a strange human
  noise. He felt very alone and insecure. All kinds of images flashed through
  his mind quickly. What if Roberto didn't come back? He thought of going back
  to town and having to break the sad news to Roberto's family. That would be
  bad enough, but his real concern was that he would look like a coward. He
  quickly pulled his boots on and rushed outside the tent.
It was then that he realised what
  the strange human noise had been. Laughter. Roberto was laughing, even though
  he was dripping wet from the rain. Mario looked where he was pointing. There
  was a cow standing by the tent, lazily chewing on some grass.

A14   Roberto is surprised
that
I) Mario is able to sleep
despite the noise.
2)
the cold does not
wake Mario up.
3)
Mario makes so
much noise when he's asleep. 4) he can hear trains in the distance.
AIS    Mario begins to annoy Roberto
because
I) his snoring prevents
Roberto from sleeping.
2)
he didn't close
the tent door properly.
3)
he hadn't put his
clothes away tidily.
4)
he can sleep at a
time when Roberto can't.
A16    Roberto thinks that camping is
generally I) an uncomfortable experience.
2)   a good chance to study nature.
3)   enjoyable despite the hard work.
4)   a good way to get some exercise.
A17 Roberto thinks that Mario
probably gets him to agree to things by I) listening to his needs.

no B2, B3 u A14-A20 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTM CBOJf OTBETb1 B
  WIAHK OTBETOB Ml !
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  qmo omeembl Ha aaÒaHllH B2, 133 u A14-A20 pacno.aazcuomca 6 pa.3Hb1X
  Õaamca. B2, B3 pacnoao.yceHbl 6 HUYHeÙ qacmu ÕaaHKa.
  Ilpu nepeHoce omeemoe 6 aaòcmu.qx B2, B3 õYK6bl
  3anucblBŒomcH õea npoõeaoe u .3HUKOB npenummu,q.

2)

judging his mood.
3)   ignoring his objections. 4) starting
an argument.
AIS When he has a suggestion to make,
Roberto often ends up I) getting into arguments with other people and giving
up.
2)
persuading people
to do things that they later regret.
3)
deciding against
it because he sees the negative side. 4) pretending that it was originally
Mario's idea.
A19 Roberto volunteers to see what is
outside because he I) wants to appear brave afterwards.
2)   thinks Mario might get violent.
3)   isn't frightened of wild animals. 4)
knows Mario is very scared.
A20    Mario's biggest worry is that
I) people might think he
was too frightened to do anything.
2) Roberto might leave him and go back to town on his own. 3) Roberto's family might blame him
if something happened. 4) the animal outside might attack him inside the tent.

                      Pa3aeJ1        rpaMMaT11Ka
n .neKC11Ka

[Ipottumaùme maccm 3anoamume
  nponycwu 6 nor) no.',tepaatu B4-B11 coomaemcmayot"ll.uu
  cþopvua.uu caot3, HaneqamaHHbLV .3Cl?M6HbLU11 ÕVK6Œuu
  cnpcwa om KCIYÒO?O npeðao.yceH1ffi.

Diamonds
B4
Diamonds are a symbol of luxury for many people. People     VALUE diamonds as
attractive jewellery for around 2,500 years.
The Indians used them to
decorate religious icons and it seems the ancient
        B5 Chinese                                their
axes a sharp edge using diamonds.                    GIVE
Diamond is
the hardest substance on Earth,            that only another diamond can be
used to cut a diamond.
B7 Diamonds consist of carbon and usually they deep FIND
underground in mines, but you might get lucky and see them on the surface.
B8
Mining     in places like Africa make a lot of money     COMPANY from diamonds.
                However, the miners                             are
often quite poor.                               THEY

Test
  19

BIO      The value of a diamond
is judged on four criteria,  KNOW as the four Cs: carat (or size), clarity,
colour and cut.
Bll
The diamond ever found was the Cullinan diamond, HEAVY which was discovered in
1905 and weighed 621 grammes.

[Ipoqumaùme
npueeòeHHb1ù 1--111M? melccm [Ipeoõpaayúme c:aoea,
uaneqamam-lbte actua6HblJtu (5VK6ŒMU nocae HO.Jtep06 1312-1318 mow,
qmoõbl OHII epavu.uamuqecRll u ae,çcuqecwu coomeemcmeoeaau
coòepycautll() mtwcma. 3anoauume nponyc,£ll noviVqeHHb1Jft1
ca10ßŒwu. Ka.ycÒblÙ nponycw coomaemcmoyem
omðeJ1bH0MY aaòaH11*0 11.3 epyn'lbl B12-B18.

B12
B13
B14

B15
B16 B17
B18

Greek is full of amazing stories about gods and heroes.            MYTH
These stories describe the  actions of people such as                  HERO
Hercules
  and were well known in ancient Greece. One such story is that of
Daedalus, a skilful  , and his son, Icarus. Daedalus
  and            INVENT
Icarus were put in
  prison on Crete by King Minos. One day, Daedalus had a clever He decided to build giant wings
  from feathers and wax which would them both to escape from the
  island. ABLE He built the wings and gave Icarus  not to fly too close to            INSTRUCT
  the sun because the heat would melt the wax. They escaped, but Icarus forgot
  his father's  and flew too close to the sun. The wax WARN

melted and
he fell into the sea, where he died.

Test 19

Tlpoqumaùme
me,çcm c nponycxa.uu, oÕ03HaqeHHb1Jtt1 HOAtepŒttt1
A21-Ä28. 3mu H0Jtepa coomaemcmø.yw»n 3aÒaHldHJt
Ä21-Ä28, 6 ,çomopbl-v npeÒcmaœ1eHb[ 603.MOYHb1e
gapuamžlbl omaemot$. ()õgeòume H0.uep 6b1õpt1HH0?0
('tutu eapuamna omeema.

which meant that he spent his days either serving customers
  In antiques at antiques fairs. Today was the day of the Redwood there. He got
  there early and A21 out on might sell well, like a gold cigarette case and a
  silver teapot.
began to walk around
  the stalls, occasionally sold a few A23      and it was soon lunchtime.
and he
  asked the dealer next to him to keep an eye on his stall
it as he A24  around. He looked at a few things
  attention. He was about to return to his stall when he saw a small blue been
  made by a famous local potter, who was very much in

Peter Madison
was an antiques dealer, his small shop or twing to sell his Antiques Fair and
Peter had a stall display various objects that he thought Eventually, members
of the A22 stopping to examine something. Peter He decided to walk around a
little while he was away.

He bought
a sandwich and chewed but nothing really grabbed his vase that looked like it
might have
A25  'I expect it's just an inexpensive copy,' he thought to himself.
However, as soon as he picked it up, he knew that it was A26           His
heart began to race in his chest. The small object in his hand was worth over
twenty thousand pounds. He lifted up the price tag to see how much it was being
sold for. He almost dropped the vase when he read the figure. The price on the
tag was fifty pounds. Clearly the dealer didn't know what it was worth.
Very calmly,
A27  a great effort to keep his voice level, Peter said to the dealer, 'How
much do you want for this?' The dealer looked at him, then at the vase in his
hand, sniffed and said, 'It's fifty pounds.' He paused. 'But you can have it
for forty-five.' Peter reached into his pocket very slowly and pulled out his
wallet. He handed the money A28 and thanked the man. He returned to his stall
and sat down. 'It must be my lucky day,' he thought and smiled.

A21

l) set

2) came

3) looked

4) turned

A22

1) audience

2) nation

3) public

4) society

A23

I) items

2) individuals

3) atoms

4) units

A24

1) hopped

2) wandered

3) marched

4) stamped

A25

1) request

2) order

3) desire

4) demand

A26

1) actual

2) genuine

3) proper

4) honest

A27

l) doing

2) giving

3) making

4) putting

A28

1) in

2) out

3) back

4) over

ObPATLfTE BHMMAHME, Limo omeembl Ha aaÒt1H11f1 B4-B18 u A21-A28
  pacnoaaauomc•H 6 pa,3Hb1.r qacnlfl.r t11ClHKCl. B4-B18 pacnoao.ycellbl a
  Htl.ycneñl qacmu tî.aamca. [Ipu nepenoce onwemog 6
  .311ÒaHUf1X B4-B18 ÕVK6b1 3anucb16tuomcfl õC'3
  npoõe.Q06 u ,3HCIK06 npenunaH11f1.

                                     Pa3neJ1
      11MCbMO

omeemog Ha aaòanusž CI, C2 ucno.1b3Yñme
  WIAHK OTBETOB JE2.
TIPI'
  6bÜIOJIHé'HUU aac)cmuù CI u C2 ocoÕoe 6HIL,waH1te
  oÕpamume Ha mo, Limo 6alUU omaenlbl õyðym ogemteamt.cfl
  mtMbKO no aanucmt, CÒeACIHHbLU B "'TAT-IKE OTBETOB vhè2.
  Htuccucue aanucu qePH06t1Ka He õyòym .yqunlbtoanlbcfl
  .9Rt•nepmo.u.

aanutuume
  ct30ù omaem Ecau oòHOù cmop0Hb1 ÕaaHKG'
  nec)ocmamotlH0, Bbl .$to.yeme ucnoabaoaantb òpyeyo cmopoHY
  ÕaaHKa.

You have 20 minutes to do
this task.

Test 19

This is part of a letter from
Jack, your English pen friend.

...Haveyvu
  thought about what   like to a'v the future? / haven't, but myparents said /
  need to start thinkivy about it. Hareyou decided whatyou want to do? How
  didyou
Let me
  know whatyou think.
Love,
Jack

Write back to Jack
answering his questions.
Write 100-140
words.
Remember the
rules of letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Some scientists perform experiments on animals. However, some people say
that this is cruel and unnecessary.
What can you
say for and against performing Use the following plan experiments on animals?
I. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments
"for".
3.   Arguments "against".
4.   Conclusion.

Pa3aeJ1       roBopežme

Bbl nonyqume Kapmotwy, Ha
  KomopoÚ npeðcmaeaeHbt mpu òJ1fl ycmno¿o omaema: C3 —
  me-uamuqecxoe .M0Hoaoeuqecyoe 6blCKa3b16aHlže,
C4 — C)UŒIO? c lge.1b}O oãueHa
  cþaŒcmuqecK0ù llHCþop,uatgueù, C5 —
  òuaaoz c tge.1b}0 oõ.ucwa
Otlé'HOt1HOÚ
  11H(þop.uažgueú. OKOHqaHUe Raycòopo aaÒaH14H
  onpeðeäftem 9Kaa.uenarnop. Bo e,peMÆ1 npoaeòeJ111H
  amoù qacmu aycaa.ueHa uòem gantlCb Ha ayòuoxaccemy.

3aAaH11¶  3K3•aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task 1 (3—3.5 minutes) Give a 2-minute talk on your school,
Remember
to say:
•      how big your school is
•      what your school looks like
•      what facilities it has
•      whether you like your school, and why
You
have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The
teacher will listen until
you have finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are in a sports shop.
You would like to buy a Christmas present for your friend, who is a big fan of
Moscow Dynamo. You only have £15 to spend.

Test 19

Before
making a decision, ask the shop assistant about:
•
Moscow Dynamo
products available
•
the price special offers
The teacher
will play the part of the tourist information guide and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•
be active and
polite
•
get all the
information you need
•
decide on what to
buy your friend
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You and your
friend work for your school magazine. You are planning to invite a local person
to speak to the school and to be interviewed for the magazine. You are
discussing who to invite. You can invite:
a local politician
•
a local police
officer a local radio DJ
•
a local
businessman/woman
•
a local
sportsman/woman
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
 discuss all the options  take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas
•
give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account
• invite your friend to come up with
suggestions  come to an agreement

Test 20

                           ähžüäg@                                             merit
Extract

Section 1 Listening:
third task
A  Look
at the third task on page 235. Listen to seven extracts from the task.

Extract I

Extract 5

Extract 2

Extract 6

Extract 3

Extract 7

Match each extract with a situation
(M to A13).
Extract 4
A7 You will hear a news report about a fire.
A8
You will hear a politician talking about her career.
A9 You will hear a man talking about his house.
AIO You will hear a nurse talking to a patient,
All
You will hear a woman talking about a lot of money.
A12 You will hear a singer talking about his next album.
A13 You will hear a woman talking about moving to another
country.

B Listen
to the extracts again and make notes to answer the questions. Be careful! The
extracts are in a different
6
What's the album called?

Extract 7
     XX'hat can she quit?
Section 2 Reading:
second task
C   Look at the task on page 237.
Complete the information.

Name of tourist attraction:
Location:
Number of visitors each year:
Facilities in Visitor Centre:
Names of biomes:

Biomes
  contain:
Future plans:
Other events held there:

The Eden Project

(1)
  Humid biome
(2)
   biome

Section 3 Grammar and vocabulary:
third
task

What kind of swimming pool will it be?

1

I'm going swimming tomorrow as r even I what I only if the
  weather's not very good. A bit of rain's not going to stop me!

order this time.

2

It looks as / even / what I only if it

Extract 1

might rain.

How long has she been there?

3

We'll go up the mountain as I even I

Extract 2

what I only if the weather forecast says

What kind of building was it?

it'll be fine. We don't want to take any

Extract 3

risks.

What kind of newspaper was it?

4

The weather's good now but as I even I

Extract 4

.w-baj./ n•lyif-iÿ    had

What's the person's name?

the mountain?

Extract 5

5

Let's settle down I in I up I on
  and leave, shall we? I'm bored of this restaurant.

D   Circle the correct word to complete
each sentence.
6
Have you settled
down I in I up I on what style of material you want for the curtains?
7
How's the new
house? Have you settled down I in I up I on yet?
8
It's time I
settled down I in I up I on . I want a quieter, more stable life from now on!
Section 4 Writing: second task

F Look at the second task on
page 242. Work in pairs or as a group to discuss what technological
developments you think might happen in the future. Make a list.

solar-poweredcars
E
Quickly read the task on page 241. Make notes to answer these questions. 1
Where are Graham and Jane?
2
What does Graham
do just before he repeats his question?
3
What's Jane's
answer to the question he repeats?
4
How long have
they known each other?
G Discuss whether the developments on your list will benefit humans or
will create problems for people.
Section 5 Speaking: first task
H Look at the Student Card for Task 1
on page 243. Make notes to complete the information.

name of your best friend
what your best friend looks
  like
when you met
how you met

what
  you enjoy doing together

                                       Pa3neJ1           AYAMI)0BaHHe

Bbl ycabltuume 5 6b1CKa3b1daHUÙ. Ycmanoeume coomeemcmeue
.ue.ycòy BblCKG'3b1BCIHU}LUt1 KOICÒO?O ¿oeopaugeeo I — 5 u
ymgep.ycòeHlffiJf11, ÒCIHHbLMU 6 cnucvce A — F.
Mcno.lbayúme Ra.ycòyo õYK6Y, otî03Haqarot«yo
ymøepycòeHue, mœ1bK0 oÒun paa. B aaðanuu ecntb oðHO
auumee ymeep.ycðeHtte. Bbl ycalbltuume aanucb ðaaycðbl. 3anecume
c6011 omeenlbl 6 maõau«y.

A. I prefer
watching films at the cinema. B. I'm not keen on films with special effects.
C. I have seen several very good
films recently. D. Cinemas are too expensive for me these days. E. Watching
films at home seems more fun to me.

Test 20

F. I am not influenced by film
reviews in newspapers.

YTBepxaeH11e

1

2

3

Bbl
  yc„lbltuume õeceðy Y_vpHŒtucma c npeòcmaeumeae.u
  oõugecmeeHHocmu.
Onpeòeaume, RCIKtte 11.3 npugeòëHHbLr
  ymaep.ycòeH11ù Al-A6 coomaemcrnayom coòep.ycamuo meyccma
  (1), KUKU'? He coomaemcmeyom (2) u O që*f 6 meyccme He CKU3t1HO, mo
  ecnlb Ha OCH06ClHUU meyccma Heelb3f1 ()amb nonoycume.1bH0?0, Hil omaema (3). Oõeeòume
  HOMep BblÕPaHHO?O BCLUU gapuamna omeema. Bbl ycJ1b11uume aanucb
  Ò6aycÒb1.

Al       The Friends of Fisher Park
is a group of 25 children.
                    I) BepHO               2)
HeBePHO                3) B ereKcere He
A2     The local council is planning
to build some flats where the park is now.
                    I) BepHO               2)
HeBepHO               3) B •reKc-re He CK"a3t1H0
A3 The group has just sent a letter to every councillor. 1)
BepH0 2) HeBepHO 3) B ereKc•re He CKa3t1H0
A4      There are council elections
every two years.
                    l) BepHO                2)
HeBepH0                3) B •rek'c•re He cK'a3aH0
A5      The man has decided that he
wants to be on the local council.
                    l) BepH0               2)
HE'BepH0                3) B TeKCTe He CKtuaHO
A6      The council will make its
decision about the park next month.
                    l) BepH0                2)
HeBepHO                3) B -reKcrre He CKa3tìH0

Test
  20

Bbl
vcelblžuume 6blCKC13bteaHUfi -uoÒeÙ 6 cestu
paaau¼HbLt cumyatguax. Omaenužne gonpocbl no coòepycaH1110
6b1CKa.3blßaHllÙ, Bblõpac3 oò11H 11.3
npeò.aoyeHHbLr aapuaHÐ10B omeema. B aac)t1HumA7-A13
oõeeòume IguØpy I, 2 ILIU 3, oõ03HaqŒoucvyo
omeežïè Komopbtù      Kauycemcfl nauõonee
6"PHbtJt. Bbl yc-lbltuume KaycÒoe ßblCKU3bteaHlže
C)aaxàbl.

A7      You will hear a news report
about a fire. What was its probable cause?
1)   a person
2)   lightning
3)   faulty electrical wiring
A8    You
will hear a politician talking about her career. When did she become interested
in politics?
1)   at school
2)   at university
3)   at work
A9 You will hear a man talking about his house. What is he going to build
next? 1) an extension to the living room
2)   a swimming pool
3)

a garage
AIO    You will hear a nurse talking
to a patient. What does he want the patient to do?
1)   get out of bed
2)   eat her lunch
3)   take her tablets
All     You will hear a woman talking
about a lot of money. How did she get it?
I) She won
the national lottery.
2)
She entered a competition in a magazine. 3) She inherited it from a relative.
A12
You will hear a singer talking about his next album. What inspired him to write
the songs on the album?
1)  his success
2)  a relationship
3)  his recent tour
Al 3 You will hear a woman talking about moving to another country. What
did she find difficult? I) getting a job
2) learning
the language
3) meeting new people

OTBETb1 B IMAHK OTBETOB M,'
ObPATMTE BHMMAHME,
  '-tmo omaembl Ha .3aÒaH11fl BI, A I-A 13 pacnoaaeaŒomcfl pa.3Hb1X
  Liacmm• t1aaHKt1. BI pacnoaoyceH0 6 HilYCHeÚ qacmu ÕaaHKa. flpu
  nepeHoce omeemog 6 aaòanuu BI ÕVKBb1 aanucbteayomcH t5ea
  npoõe.10ß u .31-ta,tC06 npenuHaHlffl.

                                     Pa3neJ1         I-Irrerme

YcmaH06ume
  coomaemcmeue me.'yt A — G mexcma.u I — 6. 3aHecume ('6011 0/716en1bl 6
  maõau«y. Mcn0J1b3Yùme Kaycòyo õycgy mo.11bK0
  OÒIIH paa. B aaðanuu oðna me.ua

A. UNUSUAL RELATIONSHIPS B.
SIMILAR CHARACTERISTICS
C.
HOME ALONE D. TWO TYPES
E. IMPORTANT MOMENTS F.
MISTAKEN BELIEFS
G. MANY RESPONSIBILITIES

1     In
Britain, most families are 'nuclear families'. This means that the family
consists of the parents and children. Of course, there are uncles and aunts and
grandparents too, but they do not have much to do with raising the children and
often live a long way awav. In many other countries, the 'extended family' is
more common. With the extended family, uncles, aunts and grandparents live much
closer to the parents and children — sometimes even in the same building — and
everyone in the family has a much closer relationship.
2

Most
teenagers say at some point: 'When I'm a parent, I'm going to give my children
much more freedom than I have now.' When they do actually become parents
however, they soon realise that giving a child or teenager lots of freedom is
not always the best thing to do. Many parents end up hearing their children
saying to them exactly the same things they said to their parents when they
were young.
3     What
does bringing up a child involve? Giving a child love and making a child feel
safe in their environment are extremely important. So is providing food and
warmth. Parents also have a dutv to teach their children the difference between
right and wrong, and to make sure their children get a good education. Some
parents believe that their role is also to teach children about the importance
of things such as family, religion and society.
4     The
English phrases 'a chip off the old block' and 'like father, like son' (or
'like mother, like daughter') are used to show the similarities between a
parent and their child. These might be similarities in terms of appearance,
behaviour or interests. For example, if a dad loves watching cricket and his
son Eric becomes interested in cricket too, you might say, 'Eric's a chip off
the old block, isn't he?'
5     'Latchkey
kids' are a major problem in many countries, including Britain and the USA.
These are children whose parents are still at work when they come home from
school, so there is no one at home to look after them. Their parents aren't
there to help them with their homework, and some of them spend hours on their
own before their parents return.
6     The
idea of 'quality time' is based on an understanding that the amount of time a
parent spends with their child is not the only important thing. What is also
important is what they do together during that time. Ten minutes of discussing
problems that a teenager is facing may be much more valuable than two hours of
watching a movie together in silence.

2                     3

               4                         5

6

I The Eden Project has been a tourist attraction for
a long time.
2      Visitors
can buy souvenirs in the Visitor Centre.
3      Both
biomes are the same size.
4      Visitors
can learn about the plants and trees, as well as look at them.
5      There
will probably be more for visitors to see in the future.
6      It
is often possible to listen to music at the Eden Project.

[Ipoqumaùme
  .ymeepYòeH11f1 1 — 6 u caeÒyouguÙ aa HU.MU mexcm
  YcmaH06ume coomaemcmaue u coðepyca}tuevt meyccma. Hanužuume
  I'll(þpy 1 — ecau

The Eden Project, near St
Austell, is not just one of Cornwall's major tourist attractions. It is now,
despite only being a few years old, one of the most popular attractions in the
whole of the UK. Over a million people visit the Eden Project each year.
Tim Smit was the person
responsible for turning the Eden Project from a dream into a reality. Built on
the site of an old china clay quarry, the Eden Project currently consists of a
Visitor Centre, which includes a café, gift shops and exhibition space,
and two 'biomes'. Each biome is an enormous greenhouse. And they are enormous!
The Humid Tropics biome, which contains plants and trees from tropical
countries, is 100 metres wide, 200 metres long and 55 metres high. The second
biome, which is called the Warm Temperate biome, is slightly smaller but still
extremely impressive, being 65 metres wide, 135 metres long and 35 metres high.
Visitors walk through the biomes looking at the thousands of plants and trees
they contain. Information is given about each plant. The biomes also contain
sculptures, waterfalls and birds and insects from the same environments that
the plants come from.
Tim Smit is
planning to build a third biome on the site in the next few years.

1

4

5

The Eden Project also frequently
holds concerts and plays in its grounds, and has been used as a location in
several films and television programmes, including the James Bond movie, Die
Another Day.

flpoqumaùme me}ccm u 6bÜ10JIHume
  aaÒaHlffl A14420, OÕ60ÒH Illi(þpy 1, 2, 3
H0.uepy dblÕPClIlHO?0
  6Œuu øapuawna omeema.

4,

Damian would
never have called himself a bully. A victim of bullying himself on occasion, if
he'd thought for one second that he was bullying his classmates, he would have
been devastated. The idea that he bullied his friends had never even entered
his head. But now he was having to face up to the fact that perhaps in certain
ways he was a bully.
It had all
started in the mid-morning break, when Damian and a couple of his friends were
discussing what to do about Frank Rice. Frank Rice was a bully and the whole
school knew it. The question was, should they tell a member of staff the next
time Frank picked on one of them? Damian thought they should. Chris and Will
thought that they shouldn't. As they were arguing, Damian said: 'We've got to
do something. He's making people's lives a misery. It can't go on like this.'
There was silence when Chris replied: 'Well, he's not the only one, you know.
You should take a look in the mirror, Damian, before accusing other people.
You're not perfect, you know.'
Damian was so shocked, he didn't know how to reply. He
didn't know where to begin. Finally, he managed to ask: 'What on earth do you
mean? You're not suggesting I'm a bully, are you? How am I like Frank Rice?'
Will
explained. 'No, you're not like Frank Rice at all. Chris didn't mean that. You
don't hit people, you don't want to be horrible and nasty. You're usually just
trying to be funny, but sometimes the things you say do hurt people. Quite
often, in fact.' 'Give me an example,' said Damian.
'Well, take
yesterday, for example,' said Will, 'when we were in the changing room after
football. You kept saying how Chris was such a terrible goalie, you seriously
wondered if he'd been bribed by the other team.'

'I was only joking!' protested
Damian. 'You know that, Chris, don't you? I was only teasing.' 'That's exactly
the point,' said Will. 'You were teasing Chris. And you do that a lot. It's not
very nice, you know. I could see that Chris was upset, even if you didn't
notice.' 'Were you, Chris?'
'Well, I
can't say I enjoyed it, to be honest. And Will's right. You do seem to do it a
lot.'
The bell
rang, and they went off to class. Damian found it hard to concentrate for the
rest of the morning. The conversation he'd had with Will and Chris kept coming
back to haunt him. Was he a bully? If he was, he certainly didn't mean to be.
But there was no escaping the fact that two very good friends of his thought
that his comments often hurt them.
At lunch, Damian, as usual, sat next to Chris and Will. 'Guys, I've been
thinking about what we were talking about earlier and I think you're right. I
just want to say that I'm really, really sorry. You're my best friends, and I'd
never do anvthing to hurt you on purpose. I can see that I do sometimes say
things that would upset you, and I'm going to make a real effort not to do that
from now on. Still friends?'
'Of
course we are, Damian,' said Chris. 'But thanks.' 'No problem,' said Will.
In the changing room that afternoon after football practice, Damian, Chris
and Will were discussing the game. Will had fallen over the ball at one point,
and Damian was just about to make a joke about it when he stopped himself. 'Am
I allowed to say something like that?' he thought to himself. 'We are friends.
We've got to be able to joke with each other. Or is it too nasty?' Damian
decided not to say anything on this occasion, but he began to realise that
keeping his promise to Chris and Will would not be as easy as he'd thought.
A14 From the first
paragraph we learn that Damian has 1) sometimes been bullied by other people.
2)   never thought about bullying before.
3)   briefly considered bullying his
classmates. 4) only been bullied once in his life.
AIS The boys disagree about whether
I) Frank will bully them again in the future.
2)   they should have told a teacher about
Frank.
3)   Frank is making people feel very
miserable.
4)   to tell a teacher if Frank bullies
them again.
A16    When Chris tells Damian to
'take a look in the mirror', he means Damian should
1)
look at what
Frank has done to him.
2)
take more care
with his appearance.
3) think about his own behaviour.
4) remember that no one is perfect.

Test
  20

Ali Will's explanation to Damian
suggests that Frank Rice 1) never tries to make people laugh.
2)   sometimes uses physical violence.
3)   doesn't want to be nasty either.
4)   only uses language to hurt people.
AIS The example from the previous day
that Will gives shows that I) Will thinks it is extremely funny when Damian
teases Chris.
2)
Damian only
teases Chris and never makes jokes about Will.
3)
Damian's jokes
about Chris and Will can sometimes be cruel,
4)
Chris gets more
upset by Damian's comments than Will does.
A19 Damian finds it difficult to
concentrate in class because he 1) is angry his friends have accused him of
being a bully.
2)   believes he will never be friends
with Chris and Will again.
3)   is continually looked at by Will and
Chris during the lessons. 4) can't stop thinking about what he's been accused
of.
A20 In the changing room, Damian understands that
I) it is difficult to
balance making jokes with being nice.
2) he has already broken
his promise to Chris and Will.
3) keeping his promise is the most
important thing to him.
4) stopping himself from
saying nasty things will be impossible.

no m, m u A14-Ä20 HE 3AbYAbTE [IEPEHECTU CBOU
  OTBETb1 B WIAHK OTBETOB !
ObPATMTE
  BHMMAHME,          on16enlbl Ha .3aÒaHllH 132, m u A14-A20  6
Pa.3HblX
  Ltacmnx ÕJ1amca. B2, B3 pacnoaoyceHbt e HUYCIIC'Ù qacmu
  ÕaaHKCl. [Ipu nepeHoce omaemoe B .3aòaHllH-r B2, B3
  õYK6bl .3anucb16ayomcH õea npoõenoe u .3,qaK06
  npemmahlllfl.

                   Pa3neJ1         rpaMMaTHKa
neKC11Ka

Tlpoqumaùme
  mt'Kc•m 3ano.auume nponyc,tcu 6 npeòaoyceHlŒx noò
  H0Mepa.uu B4-BI I coont6emcn1BY/01UIL8f11 cþop.uaatu cat)6,
  HaneqamaHHbtx aa¿Qt1BHbl.MU õYK6Œuu cnpaea om

Alexander Fleming
Have you
heard of penicillin? It's a type of medicine that bacteria. Bacteria can cause
infections. KILL Before antibiotics , infections were a very DISCOVER serious
problem.
B6         Many people                            in
the past because of them.                    DIE
A doctor from
Scotland, called Alexander Fleming discovered antibiotics. Fleming medicine at
St. Mary's STUDY Hospital in London.
During the First World War, he worked in a hospital in France, the
soldiers who had been hurt. HELP
B9       After the war, he       an important discovery. He
discovered a way to kill bacteria.

BIO At the time, however, other
doctors how important NOT UNDERSTAND Fleming's discovery was. Because of this,
he stopped doing his experiments.
Bll It    several years for scientists to realise that Fleming TAKE had
found a way to save millions of lives.

Tlpoqumaùme
  ,'1PUaeÒeHHblÙl Hit-we meyccm 17peoõpaayúme
  cu10(3a, HaneqamaHHblt' aaeaa6HbLUll                           nocae
  H0Jtep06 B12-B 18 mcuc, qmoõbl OHU epa.MJtamuqecKll u nuccuqecK11
  coomaemcmeoaaau coòepycamuo muccma. 3anoaHtune nponycycu ntEIVEWHHblJt11
  caoea.uu. Kaycòblù nponycx coonwemcmayem omÒeJ1bH0Mv
  .3aðaHll}0 113 epymlbl B 12-1318.

B12        Harry Houdini is said to
be the greatest                             of all time.             MAGIC
He started doing his
magic show professionally in the USA in 1891. In
B13      1893,
he met a fellow           called Bess Rahner. They married     PERFORM three
weeks later and, for the rest of Houdini's career, Bess worked as his
B14                                 on
stage.                                                                                ASSIST
B15      Houdini mainly concentrated
on card tricks at the  of his   BEGIN career. It was his incredible escape
acts, though, that brought him fame and great wealth.
B16     In 1904, after a four-year                          tour,
Houdini returned to the     EUROPE
B17      States
with cause for He had become a major star in the CELEBRATE entertainment world
and audiences couldn't get enough of his
B18
and exciting act. Houdini carried on thrilling audiences DRAMA until his death
in 1926, at the age of 52.

Test 20

Tlpoqumaùme meyccm c nponycwa.uu,
  OÕ03HatWHHbLW1 A21-A28. amu H0Atepa coomgemcmav»om
  aaÒaHllfL1t A21-A28, 6 KomopblX npeòcmaeaeHb1 603.UOYCHb1e
  eapuaffllbl omaemoe. C)õ6eÒume HOMeP 6blÕpaHHoeo
  eapuawna omeema.

'Jane, will you marry
me?'

supermarket, and Jane was in own
  but more expensive, soup
Graham
  got down on one knee.
A24                                  He

It was not
the most romantic of settings. Graham and Jane were in the the A21 of pointing
out to Graham that the supermarket's A22 of soup was exactly the same as the
more famous, next to it.
'Don't be silly, Graham,'
was Jane's reply.
'I'm not being silly. I'm
deadly serious.' To A23 it, 'Graham, people are looking. Get up!'
'Not until you give me an answer,' said Graham, beginning to get annoyed.
'All right. The answer's no.'
Graham paused. 'No?' he finally said. 'No? Why not? Give me
one good began to feel slightly uncomfortable — physically and emotionally.
'I can't believe we're having this conversation here,' said Jane. 'Let's
just finish the shopping and go home.' 'I'm not going anywhere until you've
explained to me why we shouldn't get married. We love each other!'

'Of course we do,'
said Jane, A25  if she was talking to a young child, 'but that doesn't mean we should
get married, does it? You get married when you want to settle
A26
and make a life together. It's far too early to think about marriage. Ask me
again in a year or two, if we're still going A27  together.' 'If ... if,' stammered
Graham. 'You think we might not be?'
'Graham!' said Jane. 'You're being ridiculous! Now, let's not talk about
it again. A28 me a packet of spaghetti, would you?'
Graham handed Jane the
spaghetti. 'So, you'll think about it, then?' he asked eventually.

A21

l) focus

2) middle

3) centre

4) heart

A22

I) product

2) mark

3) brand

4) style

A23

I) present

2) exhibit

3) reveal

4) prove

A24

1) thought

2) sense

3) reason

4) cause

A25

l) as

2) even

3) what

4) only

Jane rolled her eves, let out a deep sigh, and pushed the trolley
over to the breakfast cereals.
A26                  1)
down                  2) in                       3) up                   4) on
A27                    I) by                        2)
off                      3) out                    4) with
A28                   1) Deliver                2)
Pass                    3) Donate             4) Forward

paal-tbl-r qacmnx õJtamca.
  B4-B18 pacnoaoyeubl 6 HilYHeñ qacmu Õ.QCIHRa. flpu nepenoce
  omeemoe 6 aaðaHUfLV B4-B 18 õYK6bl aanuc•bl€cuomcfl õea
  npoõeaoa u anal-COB npenu,qaHlffl.

                                     Pa3neJ1
       IIUCbMO

omæmoe Ha .3aòaHllH CI, C2 ucnoab3YlUune
  "'7,4HK OTBETOB VE2.

õyðym
  OIVHU6CWlbCH moabK0 no aamŒH.M, CÒeaaHHbLU B WIAHKE OTBETOB JV2.
  I-IUKaKUe aanucu qePHOBtuca He õvòym yqunlblaanib('fl
  .9KcnepmoM.

aanutuume ceoù omøem
  Ecau OÒHOÙ cmop0Hb1 Õaamca Heòocmamot1H0, Bbl
  Jtoyceme ucnoab.30eamt, ()pyzyo cmop0HY ÕäCIHŒca.

You have 20
minutes to do this task.

Test 20

This is part of a letter from
your English pen friend.

.„Myparents often get because /
  spenda lot thephone talking to my friends. talk thephone too?
  Doyourparentsget with you? What Hoyou a/o about it? Ifyou'veyot any ideas
  about what about it, let me know!
Write
  soon,
Love,
Rebecca

Write back to Rebecca
answering her questions.
Write 100-140
words.
Remember the rules of
letter writing.
You have 40
minutes to do this task.
Comment on
the following statement.
Technology is an important part of our lives. We use computers and other
electronic equipment at work and in the home. However, some people believe we
rely too much on machines, and that the more technology improves, the lazier
and weaker humans will become.
What can you
say for and against future Use the following plan technological developments?
1. Introduction (State the problem). Write 200-250 words. 2. Arguments
"for".
3.  Arguments "against".
4.
Conclusion.

                                   Pa3neJ1
       roBopeHV1e

Bbl nonyqume xapmot1KY, Ha Komopoù
  npeòcma6.aeHb1 mpu ,3aÒaHlffi   ycmH0?0 omæma.•
C3 — me-uamuqeocoe dblCKaab1BCIHUe,
C4 —
  òuaaoe c tge.1b10 oóAteua cþŒcmuqecK0ù  C5
  — òuaaoe c          oõ.ueHa
OIVHOLIHOÙ
  uncþop.ucngueðl. (DROHqaHUe 6b1110JIHeH11H Ka.YCÒO?O
  .3aÒClHllH onpeòeuem 3K3ŒueHamop. Bo epe.&tH
  npogeðeH1151 9111017 gacmu 91•caaatŒ'Ha uòem nocmt)flHHZIH
  aanuct' Ha ayòuoycaccemy.

3aAaHvtq 3K3•aMeHyeMoro

STUDENT CARD
Task I
(3—3.5 minutes)
Give a
2-minute talk on your best friend. Remember to say:
•
what your best
friend looks like  why you like him/her
•
when and how you
met
•
what you enjoy
doing together
You have to talk for 1.5—2 minutes. The teacher will listen until you have
finished. Then he/she will ask you some questions.
STUDENT CARD
Task 2
(1.5—2 minutes)
You are
interested in doing an evening course at a local college that is connected to
history in some way. You are not free on Monday and Friday evenings. You would
prefer to do a course that doesn't involve written homework.

Before making a decision, ask
the college secretary about:
•      the courses available
•      when they are held
•      what the course involves
•      how much homework there is
The teacher
will play the part of the college secretary and will speak first.
Remember
to:
•      be active and polite
•      get all the information you need
•      decide on a course
STUDENT CARD
Task 3
(3—4 minutes)
You are on
holiday with a friend and it is your final day. You have time to see one
more tourist attraction before leaving. You and your friend are discussing what
to go and see. You can go:
•      to an art gallery
•      to a funfair
•      to a castle
•      to a beach
• to a theatre
The teacher will play the
part of your friend.
Remember
to:
 discuss all the options take an active part in the conversation and be polite  come up with ideas  give good reasons  find out your friend's attitudes and
take them into account  invite your friend to come up with suggestions come to an agreement

БЛАНКИ ОТВЕТОВ

Бланк ответов № 1

Единый государственный экзамен -
  ОБРАЗЕЦ

S

Заполнять селевой или капилврной
  ручкой ЧЕРНЫМИ чернилами ЗАГЛАВНЫМИ ПЕЧАТНЫМИ БУКВАМИ по следующим образцом:
A P C P E FC H I J K LMNO?Q ZSTU
  VWXYZ . 4 23 4567 8 9 0
Д А Д Ь 6 Ё Ё Ё Ё " 00066

Код
п)едмета                                         Название
  предмета

Подпись участника ЕГЭ

102

ВНИМАНИЕ!

Данный бланк использовать только совместно с двумя другими
  бланками из данного пакета

Номера заданий типа с выбором ответа из предложенных
вариантов
Образец написания метки                    ЗАПРЕЩЕНЫ
Будьте аккуратны, исправления Спучайный в области штрих внутри ответовквадрата
может быть воспринят как метка

Замена
ошибочных
ответов на
  задания типа

Резерв - 4

Результаты выполнения заданий типа В с ответом в
краткой форме

Macmillan Education
Between Towns Road,
Oxford OX4 3PP
A division of Macmillan
Publishers Limited
Companies and representatives throughout the world
Practice Tests for the Russian State Exam ISBN
960-6620-58-1
Practice Tests for the Russian State Exam, Teacheris
Guide ISBN 960-6620-59-X
Text and design C) Macmillan
Publishers Limited 2006
First published in 2006
All rights reserved; no part of this publication may
be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of the publishers.
Designed by Eleni Fine
Cover designed by Eleni
Fine
Sound recordings by George at Artracks studio.
Special thanks to the following actors: Charlotte
Barratt, Noelle Douglas, Gareth
Jones, James Morton,
Lauren Obee, Kathv O'Donnell, Thomas Orlandi-Fantini, Andrea Phillipson, James
Phillipson, Ian Robertson, Oliver Schnitzer and Erika Stiles.
Malcolm Mann and Steve Taylore-KnowIes wish to thank Joanne
Chapman for her invaluable input as project manager. They would also like to
thank Elena Klekovkina, without whom this book would not have been possible.
Many other people gave willingly of their time and expertise during the planning and production of this book,
including G.A.Kornikova, K.S.Makhmuryan, and F.Y.Amineva, and we would like to
thank all of them for their support and the insights they provided. Printed and
bound in China
2010 2009 2008 2007 2006
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
«Practice Testsfor the Russian State Ехат» тесты для подготовки к
выпускным экзаменам по английскому языку в формате ЕГЭ. При разработке тестов
учитывались требования, предъявляемые Федеральной службой по надзору в сфере
образования и науки к контрольно-измерительным материалам и тестовым заданиям
для единого государственного экзамена.
Учебное пособие соДержипк
•
20 тестов в
формате ЕГЭ;
•
советы учащимся
по выполнению тестовых заданий в разделах
«Аудирование», «Говорение», «Чтение» и «Письмо»;
•
упражнения на
закрепление лексического и грамматического материала, включая повторение
видовременных форм глагола, фразовых глаголов, а также средств и способов
словообразования;
•
рекомендации по
совершенствованию всех видов речевой деятельности;
•
описание формата
экзамена.
Книга для учителя включает:
•
ключи к
упражнениям;
•
тексты
аудиозаписей;
•
дополнительные
рекомендации к разделу «Говорение». Компоненты:
•
Practice Tests
for the Russian State Ехат Student's ВооК
ISBN: 9604620-58-1
•
Practice Tests for
the Russian State Ехат Teacher's Guide lSBN: 960-6620-59-Х • Cassettes / Audio
CDs

lSBN 960-6620-58-1
MACMILLAN                                                                                9
789606 620584

английский язык

group: Дисциплины

title: ПОДГОТОВКА ЕГЭ